YASKAWA | VS-626M5 | Instruction manual | YASKAWA VS-626M5 Instruction manual

CNC CONTROLLER
R
SENTROL 2
MAINTENANCE
SENTROL 2
Table of Contents
For Safe Maintenance ··················································································································· S-1
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
1.How to troubleshoot ····················································································································· 1-1
2.ALARM MESSAGE and Treatment ··························································································· 1-2
2.1 ALARM numbers ········································································································ 1-2
2.2 ALARM LIST ············································································································· 1-3
1) PROGRAM MISS (P/S ALARM) ···································································· 1-3
2) Communication alarm (SR SEND/RECEIVE) ··············································· 1-12
3) Heat & Power alarm ························································································ 1-14
4) Over Travel Alarm ··························································································· 1-15
5) External I/O device alarm ··············································································· 1-16
6) Rigid tapping alarm ·························································································· 1-17
7) Servo alarm ······································································································· 1-18
8) SYSTEM ALARM ···························································································· 1-20
2.3 Details of the "401 THERMAL SENSOR ALARM" ·········································· 1-21
2.4 Details of the "500 ~ 505 STORED STROKE LIMIT ALARM" ···················· 1-21
2.5 Details of the "1000~2099 Sequence-related Alarms&Numberless Alarms" ······ 1-22
3. Function and Operation of Alarm History ··············································································· 1-23
3.1 Functions ···················································································································· 1-23
3.2 Displays ······················································································································ 1-23
3.3 Symbols ······················································································································ 1-25
4. NC Functions & Malfunction ···································································································· 1-26
1) Incapable of Operating with Manual Pulse Generator ································· 1-26
2) Incapable of Synchronized Feed (Thread Cutting) Operation ····················· 1-27
3) Incapable of Automatic Operation. ································································· 1-28
4) Wrong Location of Ref. Point Return ··························································· 1-29
<How to Adjust the Location of Ref. Point Return> ··································· 1-30
5. Abnormalities on Screen ············································································································ 1-33
5.1 Screen Inactivated When Turning Power Switch On ··········································· 1-33
5.2 Screen Disappears ······································································································ 1-34
5.3 Stripes on the Screen ······························································································· 1-34
6. Power ON Malfunction ·············································································································· 1-35
7. Communication Troubles ············································································································ 1-36
Chapter 2 Servo
1. Servo-related NC Alarms (Details) ····························································································· 2-1
Chapter 3 Spindle
1. How to Troubleshoot ···················································································································· 3-1
1.1 Checkpoints for Troubles ··························································································· 3-1
1.2 Step 1 ··························································································································· 3-1
SENTROL 2
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection & Adjustment When Installing NC ·········································································· 4-1
Validation & Adjustment of Power Supply Voltage ································································ 4-5
Volume of Each Printed Board ··································································································· 4-6
How to Adjust Screen ·················································································································· 4-7
How to Adjust Servo ··················································································································· 4-8
5.1 Parameter Setting ········································································································· 4-8
5.2 ZERO SETTING ········································································································· 4-9
5.3 Adjustment of Position Loop Gain ········································································· 4-10
5.4 Adjustment of Overshoot and Undershoot ····························································· 4-11
5.5 Load Torque Check ·································································································· 4-12
5.6 Display Function of Servo Waveforms ·································································· 4-13
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
1. System Configuration ···················································································································· 5-1
2. Configuration of Main Unit ········································································································· 5-2
3. Connector Layouts ························································································································· 5-3
3.1 Connectors of Main Unit ··························································································· 5-3
3.2 Connectors of DKU (Display Keyboard Unit) ························································ 5-5
3.3 Connectors of EPS4 Board ························································································ 5-6
3.4 Connectors of DIO3 Board ······················································································ 5-11
4. Installation ···································································································································· 5-14
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
1. How to View "Diagnosis" Screen ······························································································ 6-1
2. PLC Diagnosis ······························································································································· 6-2
2.1 PLC Signal List 1 (in the order of addresses) ······················································· 6-2
2.2 PLC Signal List 2 (in the order of functions) ····················································· 6-37
3. PLC Monitoring Function (PLC Timing Chart Function) ······················································ 6-47
4. General Diagnosis ························································································································ 6-54
Chapter 7 Parameter
1.Parameter Setting ····························································································································· 7-1
1.1 Parameter setting method ··························································································· 7-1
1) Operational parameter setting method ······························································ 7-1
2) Service parameter setting method ····································································· 7-2
3) Pitch error compensation parameter setting method ······································· 7-3
2. Parameter List of SENTROL2 ·································································································· 7-5
Chapter 8 Ordinary Repair
1. Repair Tools ·································································································································· 8-1
2. AIR FILTER ·································································································································· 8-1
3. Checkpoints bBefore Requesting for After-Ssales Service ······················································· 8-1
SENTROL 2
Table of Contents
Appendix
1. Basic Interface Connection ········································································································· 9-1
2. DIO3 Board I/O Signal List ······································································································ 9-2
3. RIO1 Board I/O Signal List ······································································································ 9-3
4. Other Input/Output Signals ········································································································· 9-4
5. Connection of AC Power ··········································································································· 9-4
6. Connection of 24V Power ········································································································· 9-4
7.Connection of MPG ······················································································································ 9-4
8. FDD Connection ·························································································································· 9-5
9. RS232C INTERFACE ················································································································· 9-5
10. LAN INTERFACE ······················································································································ 9-6
11. Connection to SENTROL2 MAIN UNIT and DKU ······························································ 9-6
12. Connecting to SENTROL2 and AC SERVO ·········································································· 9-7
12.1 Connecting to YASKAWA SIGMA/SIGMAⅡ SERIES AC SERVO ··············· 9-7
12.2 Connection with LG AC SERVO(FDA-5000/6000) ··········································· 9-8
12.3 Connection with HYOSUNG/YASKAWA AC SERVO ······································· 9-9
12.4 CONNECTION WITH PANASONIC MINAS A SERIES AC SERVO ········· 9-10
12.5 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI MR-J2 SERIES AC SERVO ················ 9-11
12.6 CONNECTION WITH DAEWOO M SERIES AC SERVO ···························· 9-12
12.7 CONNECTION BETWEEN AC SERVO UNIT AND AC 220V POWER ···· 9-13
13. CONNECTION BETWEEN SENTROL2 AND SPINDLE UNIT ······································ 9-14
13.1 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE SG-J SERIES ······················· 9-14
13.2 CONNECITON WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE SF SERIES ··························· 9-14
13.3 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE MDS-A-SPA SERIES ········· 9-15
13.4 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE MDS-A-SPJA SERIES ········ 9-16
13.5 CONNECTION WITH FUJI SPINDLE FRENIC 5000M3 ······························· 9-17
13.6 CONNECTION WITH FUJI SPINDLE FRENIC 5000MS5 ····························· 9-17
13.7 CONNECTION WITH YASAKAWA VS626M5 ················································ 9-18
13.8 CONNECTION WITH POSITION CODER ························································ 9-18
14. DNC FUNCTION ····················································································································· 9-19
14.1 WHAT IS DNC? ···································································································· 9-19
14.2 Preparation for DNC Operation ············································································· 9-19
is a registered trademark of CURIOUS, Inc.
(Any unauthorized reproduction of this manual is prohibited.
The exterior and specification of this control device may be changed without
prior notice for purposes of improvement.)
(This manual attempts to provide as much diverse contents as possible. Note, however, that
descriptions of the [This cannot be done] or [This is not possible] type have not been
included to reduce the number of pages of this manual. Therefore, anything that is not
described as [Possible] in this manual should be interpreted to mean [Not possible].
For Safe Maintenance
For Safe Maintenance
This manual describes matters requiring attention in relation to the safety of the CNC
equipment to enable Machines where CNC equipment (Machine) is mounted to be maintained
more safely.
Maintenance work for CNC equipment is dangerous for many reasons. Therefore, maintenance
work must be carried out only by personnel with sufficient training on maintenance and safety.
Depending on the CNC equipment used, some of the functions available in other machines
may not be supported. In this case, just read any warning or caution that does not apply to a
particular Machine and go on to the next section.
For matters requiring attention in relation to Machine safety, refer to the instruction manual
issued by the Machine manufacturer.
In addition, when programming or checking the operation of the Machine during maintenance
work, do so only after sufficiently understanding the instruction manual issued by the Machine
manufacturer and this manual.
Table of Contents
About Warnings, Cautions, and Notes ··················································· S-2
Warnings and Cautions Regarding Maintenance Work ························ S-3
Warnings and Cautions Regarding Replacement Work ····················· S-5
Warnings and Cautions Regarding Parameters ······································ S-6
Warnings Regarding Regular Maintenance Work ······························· S-7
S-1
For Safe Maintenance
1
About Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
In this manual, matters requiring attention in relation to the safety of the maintenance
worker (Operator) and prevention of Machine damage are marked with Warning
or
Caution
depending on the degree of importance. For supplemental description,
Note is also used. Please read the entries marked with Warning ,
Caution ,
and
Note before using the equipment.
Warning
This is used for cases wherein a dangerous situation may occur and lead to death or
result in serious injury to the operator if such situation is not handled properly.
Caution
This is used for cases wherein a dangerous situation may occur and result in minor
injury to the operator or cause material damage if such situation is not handled
properly.
Note
This is used to provide supplemental description in addition to Warnings and
Cautions.
S-2
For Safe Maintenance
2
Warnings and Cautions Regarding Maintenance Work
Warning
1
When the power magnetic cabinet is checked with the door open
In the power magnetic cabinet is a high-voltage area (part marked with ). Contact
with a high-voltage area may cause electric shock. Check whether the high-voltage
area is equipped with a cover before proceeding with the work. Even if the
high-voltage area has been checked, however, direct contact with a terminal may
cause electric shock.
In the power magnetic cabinet are protrusions such as corners from various units.
Such protrusions may cause injury; hence the need for caution.
2. When Machine operation is checked with the cover opened
Clothing may get caught in the main spindle and cause an accident.
Operate the Machine while maintaining sufficient distance from the Machine to
prevent clothing from getting caught in the main spindle.
Operate the Machine in empty state without engaging in any actual processing. If
actual processing needs to be executed, perform checking from a safe location (the
clamp on the work may come off, or the tip of a tool may break and cause injury
to the operator).
. When work is actually processed, check whether the Machine is being operated
correctly without any tool or work attached using functions such as Single Block,
Traverse Override, and Machine Lock. Otherwise, insufficient checking may result in
damage to the work or Machine or injury of the operator due to an unexpected
movement of the Machine.
. Check whether input data has been entered correctly before proceeding to the next
operation step. In case of error in the input data, either the work or Machine may be
damaged, or the operator may be injured due to an unexpected movement of the
Machine.
S-3
For Safe Maintenance
Warning
5. Check whether a value appropriate for the operation has been set for the transfer speed.
Normally, there is a limit to the maximum transfer speed for each Machine. For best
results, follow the instructions in the manual (optimum speed also varies by operation).
6. When using the tool compensation function, make sure the compensation direction and
amount are checked sufficiently. If the Machine is operated with incorrect data, either
the work or Machine may be damaged, or the operator may be injured due to an
unexpected movement of the Machine.
S-4
For Safe Maintenance
3
Warnings and Cautions Regarding Replacement Work
Warning
. Be sure to turn OFF both the power on the CNC equipment and the main power
switch in the power magnetic cabinet. If only the CNC power is turned OFF, power
may still be ON for the Servo part; thus causing damage to the unit during
replacement as well as electric shock.
2. For the Servo Amp and Spindle Amp, some voltage may occur for a short while after
power has been turned OFF; thus possibly causing electric shock in case of contact.
3. When replacing a heavy item, make sure that work is carried out by more than two
operators (unit may be dropped, or injury may result if work is carried out by a single
person).
. When replacing a
of the unit being
Otherwise, either
injured due to an
unit, make sure the setup for the replacement unit is identical to that
replaced (refer to the manual of the corresponding device for details).
the work or Machine may be damaged, or the operator may be
unexpected movement of the Machine during operation.
S-5
For Safe Maintenance
4
Warnings and Cautions Regarding Parameters
Warning
1. When processing a work for the first time after changing a parameter, do so with the
Machine cover closed. For automatic operation, use functions such as Single Block,
Traverse Override, and Machine Lock or check for the correct operation of the Machine
without any tool or work attached. Otherwise, insufficient checking may result in
damage to the work or Machine or injury of the operator due to an unexpected
movement of the Machine.
Caution
2. The parameters for CNC or internal PLC are set up as optimum values. As such, they
need not be changed as a rule. If a parameter needs to be changed, however, do so
only after sufficiently understanding the effect of the parameter.
If a parameter is not set up correctly, either the work or Machine may be damaged, or
the operator may be injured due to an unexpected movement of the Machine.
S-6
For Safe Maintenance
5
Warnings Regarding Regular Maintenance Work
Warning
1. Replacing the Backplane for the Memory Backup Battery
Only personnel with sufficient training on maintenance and safety should perform this
work.When the power magnetic cabinet is opened, and the CNC backplane is replaced,
be sure to avoid contact with the high-voltage circuit part ( mark or shock prevention
cover attached). In case of contact with an exposed part, electric shock may occur.
Note
Since a CNC must maintain data such as program compensation amount and parameters,
a battery is used even when power is turned OFF.
If the battery voltage drops, a Battery Voltage Drop Alarm will be displayed on the
Machine control panel or LCD screen.
If the Battery Voltage Drop Alarm is displayed, please contact us for the replacement of
the Backplane Unit where the battery is attached. Otherwise, the CNC will not operate
normally.
S-7
For Safe Maintenance
Warning
2. Replacing the Battery for the Absolute Encoder
Only personnel with sufficient training on maintenance and safety should perform this
work.
When the power magnetic cabinet is opened, and the Battery is replaced, be sure to
avoid contact with the high-voltage circuit part ( mark or shock prevention cover
attached). In case of contact with an exposed part, electric shock may occur.
Note
A battery is used to enable the Absolute Encoder to maintain the absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a Battery Voltage Drop Alarm will be displayed on the
LCD screen or AC Servo Drive.
If the Battery Voltage Drop Alarm is displayed, replace the battery immediately.
If the battery is not replaced, the absolute position data in the Absolute Encoder will be
lost. Refer to the manual of each AC Servo Motor maker for battery replacement.
S-8
For Safe Maintenance
Warning
3. Replacing the Fuse
Fuses shall be replaced only after the reason for the fuse blowing up has been
ascertained and the cause remedied.
Only personnel with sufficient training on maintenance and safety should perform this
work.
When the power magnetic cabinet is opened, and the fuse is replaced, be sure to avoid
contact with the high-voltage circuit part ( mark or shock prevention cover attached). In
case of contact with an exposed part, electric shock may occur.
S-9
1. Troubleshooting and Treatment
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
1. How to troubleshoot
Problems are classified depending on the categories below. Based on the classification, perform troubleshooting and
treatment appropriately.
(1) When ALARM MESSAGE is displayed on the screen
1) NO. 714 SERVO ALARM is displayed .................................................. Chapter 2 1 (page 2-7)
2) SPINDLE ALARM is displayed. ............................................................... Chapter 3 (page 3-1)
3) NC-related ALARM is displayed. .........................................................................2.1 (page 1-2)
(2) Problems with NC function and malfunction
1) Cannot operate with Manual Pulse Generator (MPG) .............................................4 (page 1-26)
2) Cannot operate asynchronous move (threading) .....................................................4 (page 1-27)
3) Cannot operate automatically ..................................................................................4 (page 1-28)
4) Home location incorrect ..........................................................................................4 (page 1-29)
(3) Communication breakdown .......................................................................................5 (page 1-36)
※ For A/S request, refer to “3. Things to consider when requesting for A/S in Chapter 8” (page 8-2). For
ALARM NOS. 1000 ~ 2999 and those with no number, however, request the Machine Maker for after-sales
service.
Contact: TEL. (02) 869-5595
(Ext.) 126
1 -1
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
2. ALARM MESSAGE and Treatment
2.1 ALARM numbers`
ALARM Numbers
0 ~ 299
Message
Reference
(1) Program miss (PS ALARM)
Page 1-3 ~
300 ~ 399
(2) Communication ALARM (SR SEND/
RECEIVE)
Page 1-12 ~
400 ~
(3) ALARM related to temperature and power
Page 1-14 ~
500 ~
(4) Out-of-area ALARM (OT ALARM)
Page 1-15 ~
550 ~
(5) ALARM related to external data input
Page 1-16 ~
580 ~
(6) ALARM related to RIGID TAPPING
Page 1-17 ~
700 ~
(7) ALARM related to SERVO
Page 1-18 ~
9000 ~
(11) SYSTEM ALARM
Page 1-20 ~
1000 ~ 2999
* ALARM related to machine and sequence
Page 1-22 ~
No number
* MESSAGE related to machine manipulation
Page 1-22 ~
Note) Definitions of terms
1) “L line” stands for SENTROL2-L (for lathe).
2) “M line” stands for SENTROL2-M (for machining center, milling).
3) “L-Pro” stands for “SENTROL2-L manual’s Programming.”
4) “M-Pro” stands for “SENTROL2-M manual’s Programming.”
5) “L-Manipulation” stands for “SENTROL2-L manual’s Manipulation.”
6) “M-Manipulation” stands for “SENTROL2-M manual’s Manipulation.”
1 -2
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
2.2 ALARM LIST
1) PROGRAM MISS (P/S ALARM)
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
001
TOO MANY DIGITS OR OVERLIMIT
Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits, or
allowable limit inputted
002
003
004
LL USE OF NEGATIVE VALUE
Sign “-“inputted after an address with which it cannot be
used, or two or more “-“ signs inputted
Reference
“L-Pro” Chapter 2 1. NC Program outline
「Basic address and reference scope」
“M-Pro” Chapter 2 6. Programming practice
「Basic address and reference scope」
ILL USE OF DECIMAL POINT
Decimal point inputted after an address with which it cannot
be used, or two decimal points inputted
“L-Pro” Chapter 2 2. Programming and function
「SENTROL2-L table for prepared function」
“M-Pro” Chapter 2 6. Programming practice
IMPROPER G CODE
Unusable G code commanded
「SENTROL2-M table for prepared
function」
005
IMPROPER NC ADDRESS
Unusable character inputted in significant area
006
INVALID BREAK POINT OF WORD
Address not followed by appropriate data but by another
address or EOB code
009
TOO MANY WORDS IN 1 BLOCK
Block exceeding 128 characters commanded
011
ILL MODE GOTO/WHILE DO
GOTO statement or WHILE DO statement contained in a
main program in TAPE mode
012
TOO LARGE OFFSET NO.
Commanded offset number too large (allowable maximum
number set by parameter #6002 DO1 and OD2)
013
“L-Pro” Chapter 2 2. Programming
「WORD」
“M-Pro” Chapter 2 6. Programming practice
「Basic address and reference scope」
“L-Manipulation” Chapter 5 2.
「SENTROL2-L parameter view」
“M-Manipulation” Chapter 5 2.
「SENTROL2-M parameter view」
“L-Pro” Chapter 2 1.NC Program outline
「Basic address and reference scope」
“M-Pro” Chapter 2 6. Programming practice
ILL TOOL NO.
Commanded tool number too large
「Basic address and reference scope」
020
S CODE OUT OF RANGE
Spindle speed exceeding the maximum speed while rigid
tapping (parameter #5766???) was commanded
021
SQ NO. NOT FOUND
Specified sequence number not found at the jump destination
specified by GOTO-n or M99 Pn
1 -3
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
Number
023
Message Displayed on the Screen
Reference
NO P,Q COMMAND AT G70~G73
Neither P nor Q specified in canned cycle G71,G71,G72 blocks for
multiple repetitive cycles
Only L line
024
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1. Prepared
function
「Multiple fixed cycle
(G70~G76)」
ILL COMMAND IN G70~G76
Illegal command in canned cycle G70~G76 block
Only L line
025
P,Q BLOCK NOT FOUND
P or Q sequence number block specified in canned cycle G70,G71, or
G72 blocks not found
Only L line
026
ILL COMMAND IN P-BLOCK
Illegal command in P sequence number block specified in canned cycle
G70,G71, or G72 blocks
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1. Prepared
function
「Multiple fixed cycle
(G70~G76)」
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1. Prepared
function
「Multiple fixed cycle
(G70~G76)」
Only L line
027
ILL COMMAND IN PROG
G code in group 01 other than G00,G01,G02, and G03, one shot G code
other than G04, or G65,G66,G67,M98, or M99 specified in sequence
number blocks designated by P and Q of G70,G71, or G72
Only L line
028
G70~G73 IN FORBIDDEN MODE
Canned cycles G70~G73 specified in mode other than AUTO operating
mode
Only L line
029
ILL COMMAND IN Q-BLOCK
Chamfering or corner R specified in a Q sequence number block
specified in canned cycle G70~G73
Only L line
030
PROG NOT FOUND
Program whose program number is called by M98,G65,G66, or G/M/T
code not found, or program to return to by M99 code
031
PROG IN USE
Program being edited in the background called for execution in the
foreground
NO RADIUS COMMAND IN G02 G03
032
CUSTOM MACRO
1 -4
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1. Prepared
function
「Other things to consider regarding
fixed cycle」
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
040
DUPLICATE NC, MACRO STATEMENT
NC statement and macro statement specified in the same
block
Reference
CUSTOM MACRO
042
DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD
Macro call command specified twice or more in the
same block
CUSTOM MACRO
043
044
DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99
Address other than O,N,P or L specified in the same
block as M99 under the macro modal call condition
(G67)
USE G AS ARGUMENT
Address G serving as macro argument
CUSTOM MACRO
045
TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT
Arguments specified in more than 11 sets in custom
macro argument specification
CUSTOM MACRO
046
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1. Prepared function
1)「MACRO BY G65」
“M-Pro” Chapter 3 20.Custom macro
20.1.1「Simple call」
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1.Prepared function
1)「MACRO BY G65」
“M-Pro” Chapter 320. Custom macro
「Simple call」B.「Acceptance
designation Ⅱ」
CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL
Call mode cancel (G67) specified in mode other than
macro modal call mode (G66)
CUSTOM MACRO
049
ZERO DIVIDED
Division specified with zero divisor
CUSTOM MACRO
VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE
Illegal variable number specified
050
CUSTOM MACRO
051
WRITE PROTECT VARIABLE
Variable employable on the left member side of an
expression employed on the left number side of the
expression
CUSTOM MACRO
052
053
READ PROTECT VARIABLE
Variable employable on the left member side of an
expression employed on the right member side of the
expression
CUSTOM MACRO
TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING
Multiplicity of brackets “()” exceeding the allowable
range (5 level)
CUSTOM MACRO
054
ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGE
Argument of function exceeding the allowable range
CUSTOM MACRO
1 -5
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1.Prepared function
5) Program macro body
④「Type of variables」
“M-Pro” Chapter 3 Prepared function
20.2.3「Type of variables」
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
055
TOO MANY SUB, MACRO NESTING
Total multiplicity of subprogram call and macro call exceeding
the allowable range (7level)
CUSTOM MACRO
056
TOO MANY MACRO NESTING
Multiplicity of macro call exceeding the allowable range
(2level)
CUSTOM MACRO
057
MISSING END STATEMENT
END command corresponding to DO command missing
CUSTOM MACRO
058
MISSING GO STATEMENT
DO command corresponding to END command missing
CUSTOM MACRO
059
ILL EXPRESSION FORMAT
Illegal macro expression format
CUSTOM MACRO
060
ILL LOOP NO.
DO, END number exceeding the allowable range
CUSTOM MACRO
061
TOO LONG MACRO SENTENCE
Macro statement too long
070
SQ NO. OUT OF RANGE
Sequence number other than 1~99999
CUSTOM MACRO
CUSTOM MACRO
071
MISSING OPEN BRACKET
Number in open brackets “[“ smaller than the number in closed
bracket “]”
CUSTOM MACRO
072
MISSING CLOSE BRACKET
Number in closed brackets “]”smaller than the number in open
bracket “[
CUSTOM MACRO
073
MISSING “ = “
Command “=”missing
CUSTOM MACRO
074
MISSING “/“
Command “/” missing
CUSTOM MACRO
075
MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR
Error in macro statement format
CUSTOM MACRO
1 -6
Reference
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
077
IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR
Error in macro IF statement format
078
WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR
Error in macro WHILE statement format
Reference
CUSTOM MACRO
CUSTOM MACRO
“M-Pro” Chapter 3
3. Set data (G10)
090
G10 FORMAT ERROR
Error in format of G10 statement
101
ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED
After turning on power, move command specified for axes where the
reference point return has not been finished
In the case of G02 and G03, the
program requires correction.
In the case of G90 and G94, alarm
occurs when parameters 1034 and
1035 have the same value. They
require correction as different values
each.
103
TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL AXES
More than the required simultaneous control axes commanded
105
G27 ERROR
Axis specified by G27 (zero return check) not yet returning to zero
point
106
ILL PLANE SELECT
Error in plane select command (parallel axes specified simultaneously
or error in parameter #1032 set error.)
107
FEED ZERO (COMMAND)
Cutting feed rate command (F code) as 0
109
RPR IN TOOL OFFSET
Reference point return commanded (G28,G30) specified in tool nose R
compensation mode
110
OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS
Arc where the difference of radius value at start point and end point is
larger than the parameter (#2410) set value specified
111
ILL LEAD COMMAND
In variable lead thread cutting, K value (lead increase/decrease amount)
higher than the maximum command value, a minus value, or higher
than the maximum lead
Only L line On
112
ILL AXIS SELECTED
Error in parameter #5640 set value
113
ILL DRILLING AXIS SELECT
Selection of drilling axes not correctly specified in drilling canned
cycle
Only M line
1 -7
“M-Pro” Chapter 3 22. Drilling cycle
22.1「Table for fixed cycle」
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
Reference
114
ILLEGAL USE OF G12.1/G13.1
Error in condition to start or end polar coordinate interpolation
115
ILLEGAL USE OF G-CODE
G code that cannot be commanded in G12.1 mode specified in
G12.1 mode
116
ILLEGAL G07.1 AXIS
Cylindrical interpolation specified on an axis where cylindrical
interpolation cannot perform
117
ILLEGAL G-CODE USE (G07.1 MODE)
G code that cannot be commanded in cylindrical interpolation
mode specified in cylindrical interpolation mode
118
LEAD *S OUT OF RANGE
Feed rate per revolution exceeding the allowable maximum
speed (parameter #1422)
120
RPR ERROR
When grid type reference point return using digital type position
detector is performed, one revolution signal not inputting to
define the grid position while the deceleration limit switch is
turned ON
Refer to page 1-29 of this manual.
121
OFFSET C START UP CANCEL BY CIR
Tool nose R compensation being started or canceled in arc mode
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1.Prepared
function
.「Edge correction」
122
OFFSET C ILL PLANE
Plane selection being changed in tool nose R compensation
mode
123
OFFSET C INTERFERENCE
Cutter interference detected in tool nose R compensation mode
124
OFFSET C NO SOLUTION
No intersection point calculated in tool nose R compensation
mode
125
ILL COMMAND G45~G48 IN OFFSET C
Tool offset command (G45~G48) specified in tool diameter
compensation mode
Only M line
126
ILL COMMAND IN G41, G42
In tool nose R compensation mode, chamfering or corner
rounding specified in start up block, cancel block, or block
where G42,G41 code is commanded in G41,G42 mode,
respectively, or cutter interference detected when chamfering or
corner rounding is performed
1 -8
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1.Prepared
function
「Edge correction」
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
130
ILL ADDRESS
Illegal address specified when loading parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape
131
MISSING ADDRESS
Necessary address not specified when loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape
132
ILL DATA NUMBER
Error in specified data number at parameter setting
133
ILL AXIS NUMBER
Error in specified axis number at parameter setting
134
TOO MANY DIGITS
Number of digits of data exceeding the allowable value when
loading parameters or pitch error compensation data from a tape
135
DATA OUT OF RANGE
Data value exceeding the allowable value range when loading
parameters or pitch error compensation data from a tape
136
MISSING AXIS NUMBER
No axis number specified when loading parameters requiring
axis specification from a tape
137
ILL USE OF MINUS SIGN
Illegal use of data sign when loading parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape
138
MISSING DATA
Address not followed by numeric when loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape
140
PROG NOT MATCH
Tape program not matching a program in the memory
141
G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND
Axis not specified, or two or more axes specified in the block
commanded with tool measurement
142
G37 SPECIFIED WITH T-CODE
T code not commanded before the tool measurement command
block
143
G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED
T code not commanded before the tool measurement command
block
1 -9
Reference
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
144
G37 ARRIVAL SGNL NOT ASSERTED
In tool measurement, command measurement position arrival signal
“ON” before reaching the area specified by parameter (#7331~7333) or
not “ON” before coming out of the area
150
TOO MANY ADDRESS
Two or more of I,(J),K,R commanded in the same block where
chamfering or corner rounding is specified
151
Reference
Only L line
NOT ONE AXIS MOVE WITH-I~R
Move command of the block where chamfering or corner rounding is
specified not one axis command
Only L line
152
MISMATCH AXIS WITH I~R
I(K) commanded in X,Z axis move command block, respectively,
where chamfering or corner rounding is specified
Only L line
153
MISSING VALUE AT I~R
Move distance in the block where chamfering or corner rounding is
specified less than the specified chamfering or corner radius amount
Only L line
154
NOT G01 AFTER I~R
Command after the block where chamfering or corner rounding is
specified not G01
Only L line
155
MISSING MOVE AFTER I~R
Incorrect direction or move distance of the command of the next block
to the block where chamfering or corner rounding is specified
Only L line
158
ILL FORMAT IN FREE CHAMFERING
Error in format of chamfering or corner rounding at any angle
1) “,C” and “,R” commanded in the same block
2) ,C(,R) and “C”, “R” commanded in the same block.
3) ,C(,R) and “I”,”J”,”K” commanded in the same block
4) Character other than “C” and “R” following “,”
159
MISSING VALUE ATR (FRCHMF)
Arc inserted by ??? function cannot be tangent to two lines (radius too
large)
160
ILL LIFE GROUP NO.
Tool group number exceeding the maximum value
161
NOT FOUND GROUP AT LIFE DATA
Tool data of tool group specified in a program not specified
1 -10
“L-Pro” Chapter 3 1.Prepared
function
「Automatic chamfering and corner
R」
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
Reference
162
OVER MAX TOOL TIMES
Data of tool group specified in a program not specified
163
NOT FOUND T COMMAND
Number of tools registered in a tool group exceeding the maximum
registerable number
164
NOT USE TOOL IN LIFE GROUP
H99 command or D99 command is specified when no tool is used
belonging to any tool group.
Only M line
165
ILL T COMMAND AT M06
T command following M06 command in a program not matching the
currently used tool group number
Only M line
166
NOT FOUND P, L COMMAND
P or L command missed at the head of a tool group setting program
167
OVER MAX LIFE GROUP TIMES
Number of tool group to be set exceeding the allowable maximum
number
168
ILL L COMMAND
L command in tool group setting program is 0, or allowable maximum
life count exceeded
169
ILL H D T COMMAND
H, D, T command in tool group setting program exceeding the
maximum value
170
ILL TYPE OF TOOL CHANGE
Error in setting of tool change method
171
ILL FORMAT AT LIFE DATA
Illegal command specified in a tool group setting program
172
NO TOOL LIFE DATA
Tool group specified in a program before setting the tool group data
175
SPINDLE OTHER AXIS MOVE
Other axis move instructions in the same block as spindle positioning
command
176
SPINDLE NOT ZERO RETURN
Spindle positioning commanded without spindle orientation (zero
return)
1 -11
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
Treatment
180
G68 FORMAT ERROR
Error in format of G68 statement
190
DUPLICATE COMMAND NC&PLC
PLC command specified to control an axis moving as the NC axis as
the PLC axis or vice versa
197
OTHER AXES ARE COMMANDED
Other controlled axes and indexing axis of index table simultaneously
commanded
Check the optional function that is
valid for the NC in use.
200
NO OPTION
Option functions unavailable in the currently used NC attempted
Check the optional function that is
valid for the NC in use.
Only M line
When commanding using absolute
value, it must be 2 axes.
2) Communication alarm (SR SEND/RECEIVE)
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
Treatment
300
TH ERROR
TH ALARM (character with parity error specified in significant
information section)
BAUD RATE must be small.
Check CABLE’s EARTH and
SHIELD.
301
TV ERROR
TV ALARM (number of characters in one block not even)
Same
If odd numbers are not set,
NO.0<TVC>=0.
302
END OF RECORD
EOR code specified halfway in a block
303
PARAMETER OF RESTART ERROR
Setting error in the parameter of program restart
304
DUPLICATE PROG
Program whose program number is already used by other program
being loaded
(only when parameter #2200 REP is set to 0)
PARAMETER NO. 2200<REP>=1
“L,M-Manipulation” Chapter 3
Manipulation in detail
9. Function of input and output
with external devices
B. Program input and output
with RS232C
305
NO O, N GEAD OF PROG
No O or N address at the head of the program (no program number at
the program head)
If the received program has no
number, keys for input and number
change are selected to enter the
program number.
306
PROGRAM IN OPERATION
Same program number specified, with that of the current executing
program loaded from external I/O device
Program number change
1 -12
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
312
PARAMETER SET ERROR
An I/O interface, which is not selected at option, was specified. Or a set
value of setting/parameter related to I/O device.
331
RX TIME OUT (RS232C1)
No data received within 5 seconds at RS232C interface 1
Other machine must be of the DC
CODE control (XON/XOFF) type.
332
OVERRUN ERROR (RS232C1)
Next character received before reading a character received by RS232C
interface 1
Make BAUD RATE and STOP BIT
similar to an external machine.
333
FRAMING ERROR (RS232C1)
Stop bit of character received by RS232C interface 1 not detected
BAUD RATE must be small.
334
BUF OVERFLOW (RS232C1)
Data exceeding 10 characters received after sending out stop code
(DC3) by RS232C interface 1
Other machine must be of the DC
CODE control (XON/XOFF) type.
336
RX TIME OUT (RS232C2)
No data received within 5 seconds at RS232C interface 2
Other machine must be of the DC
CODE control (XON/XOFF) type.
337
OVERRUN ERROR (RS232C2)
Next character received before reading a character received by RS232C
interface 2
BAUD RATE must be small.
338
FRAMING ERROR (RS232C2)
Stop bit of character received by RS232C interface 2 not detected
Make BAUD RATE and STOP BIT
similar to an external machine.
339
BUF OVERFLOW (RS232C2)
Data exceeding 10 characters received after sending stop code (DC3)
by RS232C interface 2
Other machine must be of the DC
CODE control (XON/XOFF) type.
341
CANNOT RESTART BEFORE RPR
Program restart being performed even though reference point return has
not been completed yet (this alarm will occur when a program
including G28 command is restarted after turning on power or after the
emergency stop switch is turned on and off)
1 -13
Treatment
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
3) Heat & Power alarm
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
Treatment
401
THERMAL SENSOR ALARM
Thermal sensor on PCB detected to be higher than 70 centigrade
degrees
Refer to page 1-21 of this manual.
402
24V DOWN
24V voltage of controller lower than the specified voltage
Check power voltage.
Refer to page 4-5.
403
15V DOWN
15V voltage of controller lower than the specified voltage
Check whether power voltage is 24V.
Refer to page 4-5.
420
POWER MUST BE OFF
Parameter requiring power turned off set
Turn power off first and turn it on
again.
1 -14
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
4) Over Travel Alarm
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
Treatment
500
+OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1)
Tool penetrating the forbidden area of stored stroke limit 1 while
moving in the plus direction
Press the cancel key and move it to
the – direction.
Refer to page 1-21 of this manual.
501
-OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1)
Tool penetrating the forbidden area of stored stroke limit 1 while
moving in the minus direction
Press the cancel key and move it to
the + direction.
Refer to page 1-21 of this manual.
502
+OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 2)
Tool penetrating the forbidden area of stored stroke limit 2 while
moving in the plus direction
503
-OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 2)
Tool penetrating the forbidden area of stored stroke limit 2 while
moving in the minus direction
Refer to page 1-21 of this manual.
504
OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3)
Tool penetrating the forbidden area of stored stroke limit 3 while
moving in the plus direction
Only L line
505
-OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3)
Tool penetrating the forbidden area of stored stroke limit 3 while
moving in the minus direction
Only L line
506
+OVERTRABEL (HARD)
Plus stroke limit switch stepped on
507
-OVERTRABEL (HARD)
Minus stroke limit switch stepped on
536
DISCONNECTION POS CODER
Spindle position coder detected to have been disconnected
1-15
If POSITION CODER is not used in
MILLING, PARAMETER
5603 PDC=1.
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
5) External I/O device alarm
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
550
SRCH REQUEST NOT ACCEPTED
Program number search or sequence number search request not
accepted (not in AUTO??? mode or in reset condition)
551
SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND
Program number specified by work number search not found
552
UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (HIGH)
Undefined address (high division) specified for high-order 4 bits
(EIA4~EIA7) of address signal at external data I/O interface
553
UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (LOW)
Undefined address (low division) specified for low-order 4 bits
(EIA0~EIA3) of address signal at external data I/O interface
556
OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR
Output request made again during external data input/output, or output
request made to an address where no output data is present
558
SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND
Program number or sequence number specified by external data input
not found
559
DI. EIDHW OUT OF RANGE
Value entered by external data input signal EID32~EID47 exceeding
the allowable maximum value
560
DI. EIDLL OUT OF RANGE
Value entered by external data input signal EID0~EID31 exceeding the
allowable maximum value
1 -16
Treatment
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
6) Rigid tapping alarm
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
580
SPINDLE EXCESS ERROR (STOP)
Spindle position deviation amount during stop exceeding the limit
value preset by parameter #5752
581
SPINDLE EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)
Spindle position deviation amount while moving exceeding the limit
value preset by parameter #5754
582
RIGID TAPPING MODE G42.2 OFF
When the G84 (G74)command is specified, RIGID MODE DI signal
not ON while M29 command has been issued
583
ILLEGAL USE M29 OR S
Command position??? of M29 or error in S
584
ILL MOVE COMMAND IN RIGID TAPPING
Axis movement specified between M29 and G84 (G74) commanded
blocks
1 -17
Treatment
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
7) Servo alarm
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
Treatment
(ASIX NAME) EXCESS ERROR (STOP)
Position deviation amount during stop exceeding the value preset by
parameter #1804
Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-3
of this manual.
708
(ASIX NAME) EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)
Position deviation amount during stop exceeding the value preset by
parameter #1805
(PARA. NO. 1805)
This occurs in case of clashing or
loaded machine. The alarm is not
canceled even when power is turned
off and on again.
(How to cancel)
After setting 1823ADF1 →0(only
axis with ERROR)
1822DRIFT AMOUNT →0 (only
axis with ERROR) the alarm is
canceled when power is turned off
and on again.
After cancellation, 1823 ADF 0 →1
must be reset.
709
(ASIX NAME) DRIFT OVER
Excessive drift compensation amount (more than 1632 VELO)
Readjust SERVO ZERO.
For detailed information, refer to
Chapter 4 Setting and adjustment -- 5.
How to adjust SERVO (page 4-5).
712
(ASIX NAME) READY ON ERROR
Velocity control ready signal (VRDY) turned off while position control
ready signal (PRDY) is on
Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-6
of this manual.
713
(ASIX NAME) READY ON ERROR
Velocity control ready signal (PRDY) turned on while position control
ready signal (PRDY) is off
Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-7
of this manual.
714
(ASIX NAME) ENCODER DISCONNECT
Encoder detected to have been
disconnected
Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-7
of this manual.
715
(ASIX NAME) EXCESS ERROR (SERVO OFF)
Position deviation amount at servo off exceeding the allowable
maximum value preset by parameter #1806
Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-8
of this manual.
724
EMERGENCY BUTTON ON
Emergency stop applied
725
EMERGENCY L/S ON
Emergency limit switch turned on
726
EMERGENCY STOP BY PLC
Emergency stop applied by PLC
707
1 -18
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
Number
Message Displayed on the Screen
Treatment
730
(ASIX NAME) PULSE COUNT MISS (ENC)
Error detected in the pulse counting of the motor encoder
Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-8
of this manual.
732
(ASIX NAME) UNFIT ENCODER 1REV. ON (ENC)
One revolution signal of the motor encoder turned on at
an abnormal position
(number of pulse per revolution is abnormal)
Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-9
of this manual.
734
(ASIX NAME) AUTO GAIN OVER
Compensation amount exceeding the possible maximum compensation
amount in automatic gain compensation function
Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-9
of this manual.
735
(ASIX NAME) NO F/B PULSE
No encoder feedback pulse
input/detected
736
(ASIX NAME) SERVO ALARM
Alarm detected from the axis control servo unit
(AC SERVO M SERIES)
740
USER DATA ERROR, ABS ENCODER ERR
User data error occurred, or absolute encoder signal disconnected
741
OVER CURRENT
742
POWER LINE PHASE CUT
Power line phase cut, instant power failure error
743
ABNORMAL POWER F/B
744
ABNORMAL VOLTAGE
Abnormal main circuit voltage
745
OVER SPEED
Over speed, pressure detected
747
OVERLOAD
Overload, heat sink overheating
Check which number is indicated on
the LED of the SERVO UNIT in the
power cabinet behind the machine.
ENCODER disconnection
1 -19
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
8) SYSTEM ALARM
Number
9003
Message Displayed on the Screen
COMMON MEMORY INITIAL CHECK ERROR WITH
0xAA
COMMON MEMORY INITIAL CHECK ERROR WITH
0x55
INITIAL COMMUNICATION ERROR
9004
PARAMETER INITIAL TRANSLATION ERROR
9005
COMMON MEMORY INITIALIZE ERROR
9010
ZERO DIVIDE ERROR HOOK
9011
NMI HOOK
9012
INVALID OP CODE INTERRUPT HOOK
9013
CO_PROCESSOR ERROR HOOK
9014
GROUP A INTERRUPT HOOK
9015
GROUP B INTERRUPT HOOK
9016
GROUP C INTERRUPT HOOK
9050
INTERRUPT COUNTER CHECK ERROR
9051
BACKGROUND COUNTER CHECK ERROR
9052
COMMUNICATION ERROR (MMI TIME OUT)
9053
COMMUNICATION ERROR (MMI UPDATE ERROR)
9054
AXIS CONTROLLER STATE ERROR
9055
NC NORMAL RESTART
9200
COMMUNICATION ERROR (NC TIME OUT)
9201
COMMUNICATION ERROR (NC UPDATE ERROR)
COMMUNICATION ERROR
(DIAGNOSIS DATA CHECK SUM ERROR)
COMMUNICATION ERROR (UPDATE CHECK SUM
ERROR)
COMMUNICATION ERROR
(NC MODIFICATION REQUEST ERROR)
COMMUNICATION ERROR (NC REFERENCE RETURN
ERROR)
NC RESET BY WATCH DOG TIMER
9001
9002
9202
9203
9204
9205
9206
※ If an ALARM other than the examples above occurs, please contact us.
1 -20
Treatment
Turn off power and
then turn it on
again.
If the problem
persists, please
contact us.
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2. 3 THERMAL ALARM
2.3 Details of the “401 THERMAL SENSOR ALARM”
When the internal temperature of the SENTROL2 main unit exceeds 70℃, this alarm will be displayed.
(How to Release)
When the temperature drops to less than 70℃, the alarm will be automatically released.
Cause of Trouble
1
2
3
Trouble occurs in the cooling fan in the SENTROL2 main unit
Trouble occurs in the cooling fan in machine power electric
cabinet (cabinet).
The air filter of the cooling fan in the machine power electric
cabinet (cabinet) is clogged.
Measures
Replace the fan (refer to page 52).
Replace the fan.
Clean the air filter.
2.4 Details of the “500 ~ 505 STORED STROKE LIMIT ALARM”
When the machine reaches the stored stroke limit, this message will be displayed.
In case of automatic mode when this alarm is displayed, all axes stop transport. For the manual mode, only
the alarmed axis stops transport.
(Cause)
(a) The program was modified.
(b) Set the stored stroke limit correctly.
(How to Release)
(a) The machine can be moved in the reverse direction of its previous moving direction.
(b) If you cannot leave the restricted area, press the Emergency Stop button to release the alarm and move the
machine to jog transport by entering G23 (STORED STROKE LIMIT FUNCTION OFF) with MDI.
1 -21
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
2.5 Details of the “1000 ~ 2099 Sequence-related Alarms & Numberless Alarms”
In an NC machine, various controls are needed according to the machine structure including moving an axis to a
certain position, controlling the spindle for cutting, etc., as well as rotating the spindle and supplying lubricants. This
alarm warns the operator of abnormalities related to machine operation.
In general, the details of the alarms and their numbers vary by machine due to the different structures of each
machine. For more information, refer to the user's manual or contact the machine maker. This section describes some
common release methods when an alarm occurs.
(How to Release)
When an alarm related to sequences 1000~2099 or a numberless alarm occurs, the operator should find out
where the alarm occurs first.
(a) Enter data in the order of DIAG PLC PLC DIAG Address Being Searched = A 0
. The following are
shown:
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A000
00000010
A001
00000000
A002
00000000
|
|
A006
Addresses being searched
(b) Afterward, when entering
LADDER
PLC
DIAG
When A000~A024 are displayed, the alarm
is generated in the case of "1." In this
example, the alarm occurs at A000.1.
followed by data in the order of
Search SYMBOL/ADDRESS A
WRITE
0
.
1
, for example, data will
be displayed as follows:
where part ① is the conditional part and part ② is the result.
The cause of the alarm should be removed after reviewing part ①, because it is due to the part ①.
1 -22
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions
제1장 장해추적 및 처리
3. Function and Operation of Alarm History
3.1 Functions
Up to 120 alarms generated in the past and 400 keys that have been entered are memorized..
The operation mode, the program number (automatic operation time), and the alarm number time (month,
day, hour, and minute) when an alarm occurs are memorized. The time (month, day, hour, and minute)
when the power is on is also memorized.
3.2 Displays
1) Select the “Alarm” menu in the “Diagnosis.”
DISPLAY
*
Position JOG/O.R Command Program
instruction
OFFSET
DIAG
PARAM
ETER
Alarm
*
RUN
HOUR
Special
PLC
TIME
SET
*
)
*
MISC
DATA
RUN
HOUR
TIME
SET
Twice
ALRM
*
2) The operation mode, program number, alarm number, alarm description, time, and the order of
alarms when alarms occur are displayed.
1-23
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
MDI
DIAG
NO ALARM
1
0708
Alarm Machine
MODE
PROGRAM
DATE
SVON
TIME
11/05 14:33
X EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)
100
No.
KEY
Selection
Fig. 1-1
Alarm display
PLC
3) Press the Selection key to display the P/S alarm (see page 1-3) and press the key again to display
the alarms other than the P/S alarm. When the alarm is P/S alarm, “20” is displayed at the right
bottom of the screen; when any alarm other than P/S alarm, “100” is displayed at the right bottom
of the screen. “20” and “100” mean the maximum amount of alarms that can be displayed,
respectively.
4) Pressing the “KEY” key will display the entered key and the power-on time as shown in Fig. 1-2.
The display appears in the time order of the alarm keys displayed. Also, “KEY” is displayed at the
right bottom of the screen.
MDI
DIAG
NO ALARM
Alarm
MODE
PROGRAM
POWER ON
DATE
TIME
12/19 11:30
F4, F9, F7, F0, F6,
1
0005
AUTO
12/11 11:05
KEY 20
No.
KEY Selection
PLC
Fig. 1-2
Alarms
and
key display
5) The following screen appears by selecting the “No.” menu, and entering the alarm number for
which a user wants to search displays the alarm number from that designated number.
Alarm = ■
If there is no alarm that is searched for, the following message will be displayed:
“None”
6) Selecting the “PLC” menu will display the PLC screen.
1-24
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions
3.3 Symbols
1) Modes
Display
2) Keys
Description
MPG
MDI operation
MDI
MDI mode
JOG
Manual operation
Display
_
OPRT
;
‘Space’ key
‘Operator’s panel’ key
‘END OF BLOCK
‘ ’
key
AUTO
Automatic operation
EDIT
Editing
Cancel
‘Cancel’ key
REF
Ref. point return
RSET
‘Reset’ key
Within 5 seconds after power
on
STRT
‘CYCLE START’ key
PWON
DNC
BS
Description
DNC operation
Stop
‘FEED HOLD’ key
CRT
‘DISP’ key
F1~F8
F1~F8 keys
MODE
‘Select’ key
PWON
Power ON
LF
1-25
‘ (ENTER)’ key
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
장해추적 및 처리 장해추적 및 처리
4. NC Functions & Malfunction
1) Incapable of Operating with Manual Pulse Generator
Items
Cause of Trouble
How to Verify
Measures
1
Trouble analysis
1. The machine does not work while the
current position display moves.
To the item 2.
2. Neither the current position display nor
the machine does not move.
2
The machine lock
MLK is on.
Confirm the operation panel.
3
The servo off signal
is on.
Verify the PLC diagnosis.
Check the G64.6, G84.6, and G74.6.
4
Abnormality of servo
system
To the item 5.
ITX G64.4
ITY G74.4
ITZ G84.4
5
Interlock signal
Check the ITX, ITY, and ITZ.
6
The mode signal is
not entered yet.
Verify if the 「handle」 is marked on the
PLC diagnosis, F3.1
status indication of the screen.
7
The direction signal
of feed axis is not
entered yet.
Make sure the axis selecting signal is entered
in the handle screen.
8
Inferior manual pulse Check if the contents of the MPA and MPB
generator (MPG)
(page 11/11 No.18) in the diagnosis (general)
Inferior cables
screen change.
9
Turn the power off and
turn on again. When the
trouble frequently
occurs, do not hesitate
to contact us.
The red LED on the
printed board lights
up.
1-26
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions
2) Incapable of Synchronized Feed (Thread Cutting) Operation
Items
Cause of Trouble
How to Verify
1
Confirm the number
of spindle
revolutions.
Verify the trouble by viewing the feed rate
screen.
2
Cable connection
error
Confirm the connection between the NC and
the position coder.
3
Inferior position
coder
Verify if the contents of the spindle position
Replace
coder (page 10/11 No.15) in the diagnosis
coder.
(general) vary.
Inferior position
coder rotation
When the zero signal of the position coder is
incoming, verify if the position at that time is
Check the position coder
same as that after high-speed rotation of the
timing belt, etc.
spindle chuck. (Is the general diagnosis page
11/11 No.20 PCZ 1?)
4
1-27
Measures
the
position
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
3) Incapable of Automatic Operation
Items
Cause of Trouble
How to Verify
Measures
Try to turn the start-up button on/off in auto
mode.
1
Trouble analysis
1. The STL lamp does not light up.
To the item 2.
2. The spindle does not work while the STL
To the item 7.
lamp lights up.
2
The mode signal Confirm if the 「 Automation 」 mark is
cannot be input.
displayed in the screen status indication.
3
The start signal was Check the ST signal (G5.0) in the PLC
not input.
diagnosis.
4
Quiescence signal of
automatic operation
(*SP)
5
The reset signal was
input.
6
1. The override is
0%.
2. The start lock and
the interlock are
on.
3. Perform the
inposition check.
4. Wait for spindle
rotation by means
of feed per
revolution
5. Wait for signal
indicating arrival
at the spindle
speed
Check the *SP signal (G5.0) in the PLC
diagnosis.
Check the speed screen.
In the case of 0.0 bit INP=0
Check it out in the spindle speed screen.
F44.7
1-28
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions
4) Wrong Location of Ref. Point Return
① Deviated by 1 grid.
Items
Cause of Trouble
How to Verify
Measures
The distance from the
departure point of the
deceleration DOG to
the reference point
position shall be
equal to
approximately 1/2
revolution of the
motor.
1
After moving the machine from the reference
point position to the deceleration DOG direction,
The position of the observe the deceleration signal using the
deceleration DOG is diagnosis function to read the reference point
position and the deceleration DOG position, and
not good.
the distance between the two positions, at the
NC position.
2
Refer to the
combination manual
The length of the
Read the length of the deceleration DOG as set
to change the length
deceleration DOG is
forth in the above item 1.
of the DOG as
short.
needed.
② The stop position was irregularly deviated.
Items
Cause of Trouble
How to Verify
Measures
Earth
the
cable
shield.
Install a spark killer.
Remove the cable.
1
Noise
Make sure the cable shield is grounded and a
spark killer is mounted to the solenoid coil.
Also, make sure the encoder cable is separated
from the cabinet cables.
2
The power supply
voltage of the
encoder is low.
Make sure the power supply voltage of the Add the power cable
encoder is 4.75V or higher.
of (5V)/0V.
3
The connection
between the servo
motor and the
mechanical coupling
is loose.
Check the machine position and the match by
attaching marks to the motor axis.
4
Inferior encoder
Replace the encoder.
Replace the encoder.
5
Inferior EPS3 board
Replace the printed board.
Replace
board.
1-29
Firmly tighten the
coupling.
the
EPS3
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
<How to Adjust the Location of Ref. Point Return>
1) Overview
During ref. point return, the relationship between the deceleration DOG and the location of ref. point
return is critical.
If the ref. point return is incorrectly done, the stop position will be deviated by one revolution of the
motor and it will be impossible to return to the origin exactly. In this section, we will review how to
setup the DOG or parameters exactly.
2) How to Confirm the Reference Point Position
For example, the following is how to check the X axis (PARAMETER 1823 DIA=0):
A) Select the X axis in handle mode at the reference point position, press the relative value X0, and
then transport the handle in the negative (–) direction until the diagnosis No. 0000 7BIT DEC
becomes 0.
B) When DEC becomes 1 by transporting the handle in the positive (+) direction gradually after
performing A), check the relative value of the X axis at that position. Optionally, put the value
as A (mm).
C) If A (mm) is nearly 0 or same as one revolution of the motor, there must be a problem.
Deceleration
DOG
a
b
Reference Position
3) Two Methods of Adjusting Zero Position
A) Move the deceleration DOG to make A approximately a half of the transport distance per one
revolution of the motor (mm).
B) Increase or decrease the value of the reference point shift parameter, and adjust it to
approximately a half of the transport distance per one revolution of the motor (mm). → The
reference point position varies depending on the setting value of the parameter. (For more
details, refer to “5) How to Shift the Reference Point Position.”)
1-30
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions
Motor speed
Deceleration
DOG
DEC
Diagnosis
00000000
Encoder Z
ENZ
When the reference
point shift is 0
Stop position of
Diagnosis
Designated
mechanical
origin
0006
Stop position of the
machine
Shift of the
deceleration DOG
position
Correspondence of the set mechanical origin
and the stop position of actual machine
Fig. 1-3 Timing chart of ref. point return
1-31
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
4) Operation Sequence of Ref. Point Return
The ref. point return of the SENTROL2 is the grid shift type.
In the case of the parameter No. 1823 DIA=0, ENCODER PULSE 6000PPR, and 10 mm pitch per
revolution:
A) When the parameter No. 1801 RAC of the ref. point return signal becomes 1, the spindle turns
towards the rapid G00 speed in the origin direction.
B) The spindle begins to decelerate when the deceleration DOG is on, and it moves at full speed after
the acceleration is finished.
C) If the reference point shift is 0 and the deceleration DOG is off, the spindle stops when the ENZ
becomes 1.
5) How to Shift the Reference Point Position
A) When attempting to adjust the origin point at the designated origin as shown in Fig. 1-3 ①, use the
parameter No. 1810 (RP. SHIFT AMOUNT).
In the case of ①, the setting value of the parameter should be calculated by the unit of pulse because
the distance to the designated origin is 4300 ㎛ (operated by the MPG handle).
RP.SHIFT AMOUNT(PULSE) = 4300 (㎛) ×
6000 ×4 (PULSE)
10000 (㎛)
= 10320
B) When performing ref. point return as it is, the ENZ is grid-shifted as shown in Fig. 1-3 ②, making
the spindle stop at the position of -5700, which is different from the targeted value. That is because
the deceleration DOG was off at that position in advance.
C) Thus, move the deceleration DOG to the right as sh0wn in Fig. 1-3 ③, in order to match the
designated origin with the machine stop position, as shown in Fig. 1-3 ④.
D) At this moment, the distance between ⓐ and ⓑ should be equal to approximately a half revolution
of the motor. When the positions of ⓐ and ⓑ are approached each other, there must be an error of
the reference point position as much as one revolution of the motor.
Note) When giving a diameter instruction to the X axis at an NC lathe (SENTROL2-L), the value
displayed on the screen (1823, DIA=1) becomes twice as long as the actual distance of the
machine movement. Thus, set the DIA of the parameter No. 1823 to 0 only when it is
necessary, and be sure to return the value to 1 after the adjustment.
1-32
5. Abnormalities on Screen
5.1 Screen Inactivated when..
제1장 장해추적 및 처리
5. Abnormalities on Screen
: Present state
5.1 Screen Inactivated When Turning Power Switch On
Verify the displayed contents of the LED indicating the
status of the main unit. (Refer to page 5-2.)
: Cause
Screen
inactivated
when
turning the power switch on.
Status displayed one minute later
after power on. LED indicates “0.”
+12V LED of the
main unit lights
up.
CPU card is
inferior.
Status displayed one minute later after
power on. LED indicates “1” ~ “9.”
The LED does
not light up.
The color of the
screen seems slightly
brighter
3
to
4
seconds later after
+12V LED of the
main unit does
not light up.
12V AVR in
main unit is
inferior.
LCD panel is
inferior.
Cable connection is
improper.
DKU RGB unit ~
LCD panel
See page 5-5.
RGB UNT is
inferior.
See page 5-5.
+12V LED and 12V LED of the
main unit do not
light up.
12V AVR in the
main unit is
inferior.
All LEDs in the
main unit do
not light up.
The fan in the
main unit does
not make any
sound.
CABLE
CONNECTION IS
IMPROPER.
MAIN UNIT
~DKU RGB UNIT
(CABLE CND1)
See page 5-5.
Unable to
turn on the
power.
+12V
LED
Back light is
inferior.
Back light
inverter is
inferior.
See page 1-35
RGB unit is
inferior.
See page 5-5.
Note) DKU: Display Keyboard Unit
1-33
The color of the screen is
continuously dark after
power on.
of
+12V
LED
Cable connection
is improper.
Main unit ~ DKU
power unit
(CABLE ACOUT)
See page 5-5.
DKU power unit
is inferior.
See page 5-5.
of
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
: Present state
5.2 Screen Disappears
Screen disappears
during NC operation.
: Cause
제1장
Cable connection is
improper.
Main unit ~ DKU
RGB unit
(CABLE CND1)
See page 5-5.
RGB unit is
inferior.
See page 5-5.
Cable
connection is
improper.
DKU RGB unit ~
LCD panel
Noise problem
Noise counterplan
Cable CND1
Main unit ~ DKU RGB unit
1. Attach ferrite cores at the both ends
of the cable.
MAKER: TDK
ZCAT2132-1130-M
2. Connect shields to the metal part of
the connector at the both ends of
the cable.
3. Change the connector case at the
DKU side of the cable to anti-noise
type (silver color).
Noises of the inverter motor
1.
Lengthen
acceleration
deceleration times.
Static electricity
counterplan
1 For a spindle running saw
(woodworking machine)
Broaden the gap between the
DKU (display keyboard unit)
and PVC hose (sawdust
collector).
the
/
2. Disconnect the motor
power cables from other
wirings.
Relay
1. Attach diodes to the relay coil that
switches between on and off at high
5.3 Stripes on the Screen
Stripes on the screen
Cable connection is
improper.
DKU RGB unit ~
LCD panel
See page 5-5.
RGB unit is
inferior.
See page 5-5.
Note) DKU: Display Keyboard Unit
1-34
Static
electricity
problem
LCD panel is
inferior.
5. Abnormalities on Screen
5.1 Screen Inactivated when..
6. Power ON Malfunction
: Present state
Una
: Cause
The LED in the main unit does not
light up when pressing down the
power ON switch.
After unplugging the
CNACIN connector in
the main unit, make
sure AC220V is supplied
properly.
AC220V is
not being
supplied.
AC220V is
supplied.
All LEDs in the main
unit do not light up.
PSP7 board
is inferior.
+5V LED in the
main unit does
not light up.
+12V and -12V LED
in the main unit do
not light up.
12V AVR in
the main unit
is inferior.
5V AVR in
the main unit
is inferior.
Disconnection
of fuse in the
main unit
F1, F2
Power On/Off
switch is inferior.
1-35
+24V LED in the
main unit does not
light up.
24V AVR in
the main unit
is inferior.
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment
7. Communication Troubles
Present state: ① In spite of trying to enter the program in edit mode from an external device, the
length of entered tape is not displayed while the message “being entered” is
flickering on the screen.
② The operator tried to operate the DNC, but the number indicating the length of
entered tape remains as ‘0.00 m’ and does not change, while the message
“being entered” is flickering on the screen.
③ In spite of trying to output the program in edit mode from an external device, it
is impossible to input the program into the PC, while the message “being
output” and the length of the tape are displayed on the NC screen.
Items
Cause of Trouble
How to Verify
Measures
1
Improper cable
wiring
Check the cable wiring.
2
Parameter setting
error
Make adjustment between the
communication device and the parameters
of the SENTROL2.
No ‘%’ signal at
the head of the
program.
1) Is there the ‘%’ signal at the head of the
program?
Refer to Appendix
2) Is the software one to whose head the ‘%’ 14 of this manual
signal is attached during communication, (pages 9-18).
even when the signal does not exist at
the head of the program?
3
4
Telecommunicatio
n ICs in trouble
Refer to Appendix
14 of this manual
(pages 9-19).
Check the connector voltage of the
SENTROL2 side
(25PIN connector
/9PIN connector) (Normal voltage)
SD (2PIN/3PIN)
Possibility of IC
- 8 ~ - 12V
trouble when the
SG (7PIN/5PIN)
voltage is not
normal.
RD (3PIN/2PIN)
(Needs to replace
0V ~ 0.5V
the CPU card.)
SG (7PIN/5PIN)
↓
RS (4PIN/7PIN)
- 8 ~ - 12V
SG (7PIN/5PIN)
Please contact us.
CS (5PIN/8PIN)
0V ~ 0.5V
SG (7PIN/5PIN)
제1장장해추적 및 처리
1-36
1.Servo-related nc alarm
(1)Display Format of Alarm
Chapter 2 Servo
1.Servo-related NC Alarms (Details)
(1) Display Format of Alarms
0120
X RPR ERROR
Alarm No.
Alarm message
Designation of the axis where an alarm occurs
The designation of an axis can be configured by the parameter “1020 NAME OF EACH
AXIS.” However, the setting range is marked as “ □ ” for the axis designation in the 65 ~
90 (A ~ Z) manual.
2-1
Chapter 2 SERVO
0120
□ RPR ERROR
When one revolution signal (ENZ) has been never detected for the deceleration
switch (diagnosis No.0000 DEC) from ON to OFF during returning to the
origin (for diagnosis No.0000 RAC = 1), this alarm will be displayed.
DEC
OFF
ON
OFF
Speed
Detection delay
Approx. 30msec
FL
ENZ
This alarm will occur when ENZ is not
detected during this period.
Items Cause of Trouble
1
Too high speed
How to Verify
Measures
When an alarm occurs at the rapid
traverse rate, RT0
When the ref. point return is done
at RT1 and RT2 to result in a
normal status
Reduce the speed.
Lengthen the
deceleration DOG.
Check the distance between the
location of return start and the
origin.
Execute the return at
the position away
more than the
distance as long as 2
revolutions of the
motor from the origin.
2
Location of
return start is
too close.
3
The power
supply voltage of
pulse coder is
too low.
The voltage of the pulse coder
should be 4.75V or higher.
Have the sum of the
voltage drop
introduced by the
cable less than 0.2V
for both 5V and 0V
4
Pulse coder
inferiority
Replace the pulse coder.
Replace
5
Inferiority of
EPS3 board
Replace the EPS3 board.
Replace
2-2
1.Servo-related nc alarm
NO.0709 DRIFT OVER
ENZ is found at the diagnosis “0006 ENZ.”
When using a linear scale, the origin signal should be adjusted so that it can be
detected for the deceleration switch from ON to OFF. The origin signal of the linear
scale can be seen at the diagnosis “0006 ENZ.”
It is possible to see if a one revolution signal and origin signal of the linear scale are
entered via the diagnosis “0005 ENCODER CTR SKIP.” That is because the latched
value of the position counter by the signal is displayed. The time when the display is
changed is when the signal is input.
To release the alarm, switch on the reset key.
0707
□ EXCESS ERROR (STOP)
Position variation amount upon stop was too large.
Comparing the values of the position variation amount upon stop (diagnosis
“0002 POSITION ERR”) and the parameter “1804 STOP POS ERR LIMIT,” when
the position variation amount exceeds the set value, the alarm occurs.
To release this alarm, turn the emergency stop switch on or off. However, the
parameter “1823 ERC = 1” or the position variation amount should be lower
than the set value.
Items
Cause of Trouble
How to Verify
Measures
1
Setting error of
Make sure the content of the parameter
position
1804 accords with the parameter table
variation amount attached to the NC.
2
Undershoot
If the current needed to accelerate or
decelerate the motor at the acceleration
or deceleration time of the NC does not
flow, the amount of position control
circuit errors is temporarily increased.
Lengthen the
time constant of
NC acceleration
or deceleration.
3
Abnormal power
supply voltage
Verify the voltage of control part.
Put any inferior
parts in order.
4
Poor connection
Check the connections including the
encoder cord, motor power cord, etc.
Especially, check if there is any bad
contact of the encoder signal lines or the
signal lines on A and B are not reversely
connected. (Check the attachment
direction for encoder separately
mounted.
Put any inferior
parts in order.
5
Troubles of EPS3
board and servo
AMP printed
board, the
position control
parts
Replace a spare printed board if available
to verify. At this time, make sure to
adjust and set anything correctly.
Replace the
printed board.
2-3
Set the
parameter
correctly.
Chapter 2 SERVO
0708
□ EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)
Position variation amount upon movement was too large.
Comparing the values of the position variation amount upon movement
(diagnosis “0002 POSITION ERR”) and the parameter “1805 MOVING POS ERR
LIMIT,” when the position variation amount exceeds the set value, the alarm
occurs.
To release this alarm, turn the emergency stop switch on or off. However, the
parameter “1823 ERC = 1” or the position variation amount should be lower
than the set value.
Items
Cause of Trouble
How to Verify
1
Setting error of
position variation
amount
Make sure the content of the
parameter 1805 accords with the
parameter table attached to the NC.
Set the parameter
correctly.
2
Overshoot
If the current needed to accelerate or
decelerate the motor at the
acceleration or deceleration time of the
NC does not flow, the amount of
position control circuit errors is
temporarily increased.
Lengthen the time
constant of NC
acceleration or
deceleration (set at
the control part).
3
Abnormal power
supply voltage
Verify the voltage of control part.
Put any inferior
parts in order.
4
Poor connection
Check the connections including the
encoder cord, motor power cord, etc.
Put any inferior
parts in order.
5
Troubles of EPS3
board and servo
AMP printed
board, the
position control
parts
Replace a spare printed board if
available to verify. At this time, make
sure to adjust and set anything
correctly.
Replace the
printed board.
2-4
Measures
1.Servo-related nc alarm
NO.0709 DRIFT OVER
0709
□ DRIFT OVER
When the amount of drift compensation (parameter 1822) or the value of the
diagnosis “0013 DRIFT” for automatic drift compensation (parameter “1823
ADF = 1”) is more than ±1632, the alarm occurs.
To release this alarm, turn the emergency stop switch on or off.
Items
Cause of Trouble
How to Verify
Measures
1
Bad servo
adjustment
Make sure the servo adjustment has
been properly performed.
Adjust the servo
correctly.
2
Conflict between
machines
Verify via the alarm history, etc.
Turn off the power,
and then turn on.
3
Drift accumulated
Uptime of machines, etc.
for a long time
Readjust the servo.
4
Bad servo unit
Replace the servo
unit.
5
Inferior EPS3
printed board
Replace the EPS3
board.
2-5
Chapter 2 SERVO
0712
□ READY OFF ERROR
The V-READY is still off (diagnosis “0007 bit2=1”) even though the P-READY
(diagnosis “0007 PRD”) is on.
Turn on the reset key to release the alarm after eliminating the cause.
If the parameter “1815 VOC = 1,” the alarm is cancelled.
Items
1
2
Cause of Trouble
AC 220V power
supply failure or
undervoltage to
the servo unit.
Power supply
failure or
undervoltage to
the coils of the
magnet contactor
and relay for the
servo unit.
How to Verify
Make sure that the magnet contactor
and the relay for the servo unit are
ON, and then measure the voltages
between R, S, and T and between r
and t of the servo unit.
Measures
Eliminate a root
cause including
connection error,
etc.
Eliminate a root
cause including
Make sure that the magnet contactor
connection error,
and the relay for the servo unit are not
etc.
ON, and then check the coil voltage.
3
Inferior magnet
contactor and
relay
Replace the
magnet contactor
and the relay
4
Problems on the
sequences
5
The servo unit is
inferior.
Replace the servo
unit.
6
The EPS3 board
is inferior.
Replace the EPS3
board.
Check the sequences
2-6
Eliminate a root
cause.
1.Servo-related nc alarm
NO.0713 READY ON
0713
□ READY ON ERROR
V-READY is still ON (diagnosis “0007 bit2 = 1”) even though the P-READY is
OFF (diagnosis “0007 PRD”).
To release the alarm, make the reset key ON by eliminating the cause.
When the parameter “1815 VOC = 1,” the alarm will be cancelled.
※ This alarm rarely occurs; however if it is the case, the cause may be the
troubles of the magnet contactor or the relay.
0714
□ ENCODER DISCONNECT
Disconnection of the encoder signal, phase A and phase B, and the ZERO
signal line
To release the alarm, make the reset key ON by eliminating the cause.
The encoder signal can be seen in a general diagnosis.
Diagnosis No. 0006 ENA: Phase A signal
ENB: Phase B signal
ENZ: ZERO signal
Items
Cause of Trouble
1: ON
How to Verify
Verify the connection and wiring of
the encoder return cables.
Measures
Correct the cable
connection and
wiring.
1
Improper cable
connection
2
Inferior EPS3
board
Replace the EPS3
board.
3
Inferior encoder
of the servo
motor
Replace the motor
or the encoder.
2-7
Chapter 2 SERVO
0715
□ EXCESS ERROR (SERVO OFF)
Position variation amount upon servo off was too large.
Comparing the values of the position variation amount upon servo off
(diagnosis “0007 PRD = 1, EBL = 0”) and the parameter “1806 SERVO OFF
POS ERR LIMIT,” when the position variation amount exceeds the set value,
the alarm occurs.
To release this alarm, turn the emergency stop switch on or off. However, the
parameter “1823 ERC = 1” or the position variation amount should be lower
than the set value.
The alarm can be cancelled by setting the parameter to “1815 SOC = 1.”
※ The cause of this alarm is a big movement of the spindle by an external
force or collision in servo off condition.
0730
□ PULSE COUNT MISS (ENC)
A count error occurred at the counter for position feedback of the encoder.
The amount of count error is displayed on the diagnosis “0012 PULSE COUNT
MISS.”
The alarm check function will be in effect after the completion of ref. point
return. The alarm check is overridden by setting the parameter to “1815 F1C =
1.”
To release the alarm, make the reset key ON.
Items
Cause of Trouble
1
Parameter setting
error
2
The encoder of the
servo motor is
inferior.
3
Count error by
noise
How to Verify
Is the parameter No. 1824 zero pulse
with a correct value?
(Yaskawa servo: Standard 4)
Measures
Reset
Replace the motor
or encoder.
Verify the earth cable of the motor,
the shield of the encoder cable, etc.
2-8
Eliminate a root
cause.
1.Servo-related nc alarm
NO.0732 UNFIT ENC
0732
□ UNFIT ENCODER 1REV. ON (ENC)
The number of generated pulses per revolution of the encoder 1 is incorrect.
The number that is determined as abnormal will be displayed on the diagnosis
“0013 ENC 1REV PULSE.” The display will not disappear until the reset key is
on.
When the parameter is set to “1815 F1C = 1,” this function will be cancelled.
Items Cause of Trouble
1
Parameter
setting error
2
The encoder of
the servo motor
is inferior.
3
Count error by
noise
0734
How to Verify
Is the parameter No. 1801 encoder type
a correct value?
(Yaskawa servo: Standard 4)
Measures
Reset
Replace the motor
or encoder.
Verify the earth cable of the motor, the
shield of the encoder cable, etc.
Eliminate a root
cause.
□ AUTO GAIN OVER
The amount of automatic gain compensation was too large. To release the
alarm, make the reset key ON.
Items
Cause of
Trouble
How to Verify
Measures
1
Servo
adjustment is
bad.
2
Servo unit is
inferior.
Replace the servo
unit.
3
EPS3 board is
inferior.
Replace the EPS3
board.
0736
Was the servo adjusted in a proper
way?
Make the
adjustment of the
servo.
□ SERVO ALARM
Check to see which number is displayed on the LED of the servo unit.
Refer to the subsequent pages of this manual to verify alarms and take
appropriate measures.
2-9
1.How to Troubleshoot
1.1 Checkpoint for Troubles
Chapter 3 Spindle
1. How to Troubleshoot
1.1 Checkpoints for Troubles
When any troubles occur in the control unit, check the following items first:
① Verify which alarm is indicated by the controller alarm. Also, check the past
alarms in alarm mode of the indicator.
② For fusing, which phase is it out of R, S, or T phase?
(Control circuit input FUSE F1, F2, F3)
③ Is there any possibility for reoccurrence of breakdown or abnormality?
④ Are the ambient temperature and the temperature in the power electric
cabinet normal?
⑤ Accelerating or decelerating? Or is the machine being driven at normal speed?
What about the speed at that moment?
⑥ Is there any difference between forward rotation and reverse rotation?
⑦ Has been there any instantaneous electricity failure?
⑧ Does the trouble occur during a certain operation or instruction?
⑨ How often the trouble occurs?
⑩ Does this trouble occur when the load is weighted or reduced?
⑪ Have you ever tried to replace the troubled parts or take an appropriate
emergency measure?
⑫ How many years have passed since beginning the operation?
⑬ Is the power supply voltage normal? Or is it changed largely according to
time?
1.2 Step 1
Check the following items as the first step of troubleshooting:
(1) Power supply voltage: 200V + 10% -15%, 50/60Hz, 210V, 220V +10% -15%,
60Hz.
Especially, make sure not to lower the power supply voltage below 200V –15%
for just a moment.
Ex) ① The voltage drops at a certain time every day.
② The voltage drops when a certain machine is being operated.
3-1
Chapter 3
SPINDLE
(2) Is the control function around the controller normal?
Ex) ① Are the NC and the sequence circuit normal?
② Is there any abnormalities in the parts, wirings, etc. by examining with the
unaided eye?
(3) Is the ambient temperature of the controller (in-plate temperature) 55℃ or less?
(4) Is there any abnormality in the external appearance of the controller?
Ex) ① Damage by a fire or abnormality of card parts and pattern
② Loose wiring, damages, intermixture of foreign substances, etc.
(5) Are all of the DC power supply outputs of SF-PW rated voltage?
When verifying the conditions described above enough, it is possible to
determine how much abnormalities have occurred in which parts.
The following shows a rough classification of the troubles of FR-SF:
Fixed
classification
A
z The controller does not work normally even when providing the
power supply to the controller for the first time. (Ⅰ)
z The operation was suddenly stopped although it has shown normal
status until now. (Ⅱ)
z Sometimes it does not work normally. The stop position of the orient
is deviated.
An alarm is displayed. (Ⅲ)
z Controller trouble
z
Fixed
classification
B
z
z
z
z
Abnormality in the main circuitry
Abnormality in the control circuit
Abnormality in detector
Abnormality in the encoder for detecting
speed
Abnormality in the encoder for multipoint
orient
1 Abnormality in the magnet sensor for
point orient
Abnormality in the parameters from the NC and transferred data
Abnormality in the power supply
Abnormality in the motor
Other abnormalities (Shortage of input signal conditions, cable
disconnection, etc.
3-2
1. Inspection & Adjustment When Installing nc
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
1. Inspection & Adjustment When Installing NC
When mounting an NC, perform inspection and adjustment according to the following
procedures. For more information, refer to the remarks in the table below:
No.
Description
Remarks
1
Inspect the appearance of the NC main unit, DKU, and servo unit.
Refer to (1).
2
Make sure the terminal fixed by screws is completely connected.
Refer to (2).
3
Connect external cables.
Refer to (3).
4
With turning the power supply for NC off, connect the power
supply input cable.
Refer to (4).
5
Make sure the connection position of the connector is correct.
Refer to (5).
6
Verify the settings.
Refer to (6).
7
Verify the input power supply voltage and frequency.
Refer to (7).
8
Check to see if the output voltage is short with the earth.
Refer to (8).
9
Supply the power to the system and check the output voltage.
Refer to (9).
10
Verify the interface signal between the NC and the machine.
Refer to (10).
11
Verify various parameters and setting data.
Refer to (11).
12
Turn the power off.
Refer to (12).
13
Connect the motor power cable.
Refer to (13).
14
Turn the power on.
Refer to (14).
15
Examine the movement of each spindle by means of manual
Refer to (15).
transport.
16
Adjust the servo system.
Refer to (16).
17
Make sure all of the NC functions work normally.
Refer to (17).
4-1
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
(1) Inspect the appearances of the NC main unit, DKU, and servo unit.
① Whether there is any dirt or damage on the manual operator’s panel within the
operator’s panel box;
② Whether the attachment of the printed board, the servo unit, etc. in the power
electric cabinet is loose or missed; and
③ Whether the cables in the power electric cabinet are damaged (e.g., wire coat
peeled off)
(2) Make sure the terminal fixed by screws is completely connected.
① Terminal block of transformer (primary and secondary sides)
② Inspect the status of attachment and damage for the cover part (acryl plate) of
each terminal block.
(3) Connect external cables.
Make sure that:
① A protective earth cable with enough thickness not less than 14 ㎟ between the
NC and the power electric cabinet of the machine side is connected;
② The protective earth is a single point earth type which is connected from the
power electric cabinet of the machine side to the grounding;
③ All of the signal cables are collectively shielded; and
④ The cable specification complies to the applied manuals for:
ⓐ the motor signals; ⓑ the motor power;
ⓒ the servo unit interface;
ⓓ the position coder; ⓔ the spindle analog output; ⓕ the manual pulse generator;
ⓖ the DKU;
ⓗ the RS232C interface; and ⓘ the PLC DI/DO
(4) With the NC power supply off, connect the power input cable.
① On this occasion, make sure to unplug the motor power cord.
(5) Make sure the connection positions of the connectors are correct:
① Whether the Dsub connector is fixed using clamping screws, and
② Whether the MOLEX connectors (CNACIN, CNACOUT) are firmly fixed.
(6) Verify the settings.
① Setting up the power supply transformer terminal
② Setting up the AC servo unit on the printed board
③ Setting up the AC spindle servo unit on the printed board
4-2
1. Inspection & Adjustment When Installing nc
(7) Verify the input power supply voltage and frequency.
① Make sure the input power supply voltage meets the following specification:
AC 220V ±10%
50/60Hz ±Hz
1Ø
② Make sure the capacity of the input power supply for the power consumption of
the NC main unit and the servo unit is sufficient.
(8) Make sure the output voltage is not short with the earth.
① Make sure each output voltage of the power supply unit is not short with 0V:
ⓐ +5V and 0V
ⓑ +24V and 0V
ⓒ +12V and 0V
ⓓ -12V and 0V
(9) Verify the output voltage after supplying power.
① Make sure each power supply output at the corresponding check pin of the DIO3
board falls within the range described in the table below:
Designation
of voltage
output
Allowable
voltage range
Measuring location
+5V
+5.0~+5.1V
The P5V check pin of the DIO3
board and screws of the main unit
P12V
+12V
+12.0~+12.5V
The P12V check pin of the DIO3
board and screws of the main unit
N12V
-12V
-12.0~-12.5V
The N12V check pin of the DIO3
board and screws of the main unit
P5V
(10)
Rated
voltage
Verify the interface signals between the NC and the machine side.
① Refer to the summary table of diagnosis functions.
(11)
Verify various parameters and setting data.
① Refer to the parameter summary table.
(12)
(13)
Turn the power off.
Connect the motor power cord.
4-3
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
(14)
Turn the power on.
① In the case of alarm occurred, handle the alarm according to the alarm summary
table.
② After repeating power on/off and emergency stop function several times, make
sure the motor does not rotate.
(15)
Examine the movement of each spindle by manual transport.
① Move the spindle 10 ㎛ by 10 ㎛ by means of manual pulse transport or
incremental transport. At this moment, verify if the machine moves accurately.
② Verify if the machine stops accurately when detecting the emergency L/S on
alarm by moving to low override in manual jog transport and intentionally
operating the limit switch installed to the machine.
③ Make sure alarms indicating excessive error even at the highest transport speed
appear, by means of varying and moving the manual jog transport and manual
transport override.
(16)
Check the servo system.
① While automatically operating a simple program, verify if the value of the position
loop gain displayed in the general diagnosis (diagnosis number 014) falls within
0.5% of the set value (parameter No.1803).
(17)
Verify if all of the NC functions are normally operated.
① Perform ref. point return.
② Set the amount of grid shift. It will be in effect only when turning the power off
once after the setting and turning the power on again.
③ Conduct continuous operation test according to the test program suitable for the
machine.
4-4
2. Validation & Adjustment of Power Supply Voltage
2.1 Validation of Input Voltage
2. Validation & Adjustment of Power Supply Voltage
2.1 Validation of Input Voltage
Verify if the input voltage meets the specification below.
(Check the voltage between the CNACIN pin 1 and pin 3 of the main unit connector.)
AC 220V ±10 %
50/60Hz ±1 %
1Φ
2.2 Fuse
There exist three fuses in the SENTROL2 main unit.
F1, F2 Fuses for AC220V power supply input (DAITO HP50 AC250V 5A)
F3
Fuse for +24V power supply (DAITO MP20 2A)
Check the condition of the above fuses and replace any that is short.
Be sure to replace an equivalent fuse.
How to determine whether a fuse is short
Space is seen.
A white mark is seen.
Normal
Short
2.3 Validation of DC Voltage
The followings show how to measure the DC power supply voltage in the SENTROL2 main
unit:
Designation
of voltage
output
P5V
Rated
voltage
Allowable
voltage range
+5V
+5.0~+5.1V
P12V
+12V
+12.0~+12.5V
N12V
-12V
-12.0~-12.5V
P24V
+24V
+23.5~+25.5V
4-5
Measuring location
The P5V check pin of the DIO3
board and screws of the main
unit
The P12V check pin of the DIO3
board and screws of the main
unit
The N12V check pin of the DIO3
board and screws of the main
unit
The No. 15 pin of the CNA1
connector on the EPS3 board
and screws of the main unit
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
Measuring points for DC power supply voltage
No. 15 pin (+24V)
Fuses
+5V check pin
+12V check pin
Screw of the main unit
-12V check pin
3. Volume of Each Printed Board
3.1 Overview of Volume Deployment of SENTROL2
The SENTROL2 has volumes as follows:
Board name
Volume name
Function of volume
BKP4
VR2
Set the voltage at which an alarm
occurs when the power supply voltage
drops.
EPS3
VR1
D/A output offset (common in 4 axes)
RIO1
VR1
Set the power supply voltage (+5V)
RIO2
VR1
Set the power supply voltage (+5V)
VR1
A/D 0V adjust
VR2
A/D gain
VR3
Set the power supply voltage (+5V)
RAD1
Adjusting after shipping is prohibited since the factory-settings are
appropriately fixed when shipping.
4-6
4. How to Adjust Screen
4. 1
TFT
LCD
4. How to Adjust Screen
4.1 TFT LCD
A. Location of Screen Adjustment Switches
KEY SCAN BOARD
M4 THREAD
POWER UNIT
Rear panel of DKU (Display/Keyboard Unit)
B. Functions of Screen Adjustment Switches
Switch
name
Functions of switch
MENU
SELECT
DOWN
UP
POWER
Button to show the screen adjustment menu
on the screen
Button to select a menu and move to the
previous screen
(Automatic screen adjustment)
Button to move downwards
Decrease the adjustment value.
Button to move upwards
Increase the adjustment value.
Power (screen) ON/OFF button
C. Shortcut Button
Automatic screen
adjustment
DOWN button
Pressing the DOWN button once will adjust the screen indication
location automatically.
4-7
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
5. How to Adjust Servo
5.1 Parameter Setting
A) Parameter Setting
Refer to the following table to set the maintenance parameters of the SENTROL2 setup screen and
the servo unit:
Example of Setting Parameters
YASKAWA SIGMA
Rated RPM
Maximum RPM
SENTROL2
parameters
Servo unit
parameters
1000 rpm
2000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
5000 (mV)
CN-03
200 (rpm)
1500 rpm
3000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
3334 (mV)
CN-03
300 (rpm)
LG FDA-5000
3000 rpm
4500 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
2223 (mV)
CN-03
450 (rpm)
1000 rpm
2000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
5000 (mV)
P3-13
2000(rpm)
PANASONIC MINAS
Rated RPM
Maximum RPM
SENTROL2
parameters
Servo unit
parameters
1000 rpm
2000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
5000 (mV)
Pr-50
200 (rpm)
2000 rpm
3000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
3334 (mV)
Pr-50
300 (rpm)
2000 rpm
3000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
3334 (mV)
P3-13
3000(rpm)
MITSUBISHI MR-J2
3000 rpm
5000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
2000 (mV)
Pr-50
500 (rpm)
2000 rpm
3000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
3334 (mV)
P-25
3000(rpm)
3000 rpm
4000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
2500 (mV)
P-25
4000(rpm)
DAEWOO AC SERVO
Rated RPM
Maximum RPM
SENTROL2
parameters
Servo unit
parameters
3000 rpm
5000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
2000 (mV)
P3-13
5000(rpm)
1000 rpm
2000 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
5000 (mV)
P-28
3750 (x2 mV)
1500 rpm
2500 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
4000 (mV)
P-28
3000 (x2 mV)
3000 rpm
4500 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
2223 (mV)
P-28
1667 (x2 mV)
For more details, refer to pages 7-16 and 17 of this manual and the servo unit manual.
4-8
3000 rpm
4500 rpm
NO.1803
3000
NO.1807
2223 (mV)
P-25
4500(rpm)
5.How to Adjust Servo
5.2 ,Zero Setting
5.2 Zero Setting
A) Release of Automatic Drift Compensation Function
Set the maintenance parameters of the SENTROL2 setup screen as follows:
7 bits of NO.1823 ADF
X: 1 Æ 0
Y: 1 Æ 0
Z: 1 Æ 0
NO.1822
DRIFT AMOUNT
X: * Æ 0
Y: * Æ 0
Z: * Æ 0
B) Turn off an on the power of the SENTROL2.
C) Zero Setting of the X-, Y-, and Z-axis Servo
1) Adjust the parameters of the X-axis servo unit so that the position error [pulse] of the general
diagnosis No. 0002 X axis of the SENTROL2 diagnosis screen may become “0.”
Parameters
YASKAWA
SIGMA
CN00
00-03
A-
LG
FDA-5000
PANASONIC
MINAS
MITSUBISHI
MR-J2
DAEWOO
AC SERVO
P3-14
Pr52
P-29
P-09
2) Likewise 1), adjust the parameters of the Y-axis servo unit while observing the No.0002 Y-axis
value.
3) Likewise 1), adjust the parameters of the Z-axis servo unit while observing the No.0002 Z-axis
value.
D) Activating the Automatic Drift Compensation Function
Set the maintenance parameter of the SENTROL2 setup screen as follows:
7 bits of NO.1823 ADF
X: 0 Æ 1
Y: 0 Æ 1
Z: 0 Æ 1
E) Turn off an on the power of the SENTROL2.
F) Verifying the Zero Setting
Make sure the position error [pulse] of the general diagnosis No. 0002 X-, Y-, and Z-axis of the
diagnosis screen is nearly “0,” and the drifts of the NO.0010 X-, Y-, and Z-axis falls within the
range of “-5 ~ +5.”
4-9
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
5.3 Adjustment of Position Loop Gain
A) Release of Automatic Position Loop Gain Compensation
Change the maintenance parameter of the SENTROL2 setup screen as follows:
5 bits of NO.1823 AUG
X: 1 Æ 0
Y: 1 Æ 0
Z: 1 Æ 0
B) Turn off an on the power of the SENTROL2.
C) Position Loop Gain Setting of X-, Y-, and Z-axis Servo
1) Adjust the No. 1807 gain constant of the X-axis servo unit parameters and the SENTROL2
maintenance parameters so that, when moving the X axis up to 2000 to 3000 mm/min. by
means of jog or rapid feed, the position loop gain of the general diagnosis No. 0011 X axis of
the SENTROL2 diagnosis screen may fall within the range of “2985 ~ 3015.”
Parameters
YASKAWA
SIGMA
LG
FDA-5000
PANASONIC
MINAS
CN04
CN05
P2-03
P2-04
Pr11
Pr12
MITSUBISHI
MR-J2
P-6, P-34,
P-35,P-36
P-37,P-38
DAEWOO
AC SERVO
P-07
P-08
2) Same as 1) for the Y axis.
3) Same as 1) for the Z axis.
D) Activating the Automatic Position Loop Gain Compensation
Set the maintenance parameter of the SENTROL2 setup screen as follows:
5 bits of NO.1823 AUG
X: 0 Æ 1
Y: 0 Æ 1
Z: 0 Æ 1
E) Turn off an on the power of the SENTROL2.
F) Verifying the Adjustment of Position Loop Gain
1) Verify how many times the X axis should be moved to + and - directions at the speed of 2000 ~
3000 mm/min. by means of rapid feed so that the average of the position loop gains of general
NO.0011 X axis displayed on the SENTROL2 diagnosis screen, for both of + and – directions
may fall within the range of “2985 ~ 3015.”
2) Same as 1) for the Y axis.
3) Same as 1) for the Z axis.
4-10
5.How to Adjust Servo
5.4 ,Zero Setting
5.4 Adjustment of Overshoot and Undershoot
Notice) If there are no special problems such as vibration and abnormal noise, it is not necessary
to adjust the below items:
A) Adjustment of Loop Gain
1) Make sure that, when moving the X axis at the highest/lowest speed by automatic operation, there
is no overshoot or undershoot for the waveform during acceleration or deceleration as shown in
the figure below through observing the real speed of the X axis using the servo waveform display
function (see page 4-25). Adjust the servo unit parameter if any overshoot or undershoot exists.
S
p
e
e
d
(Decelerating)
(Accelerating)
Time
Parameters
YASKAWA
SIGMA
CN04
CN05
CN1A
Auto Tuning
CN00
00-05
C-
LG
FDA-5000
PANASONIC
MINAS
P2-03
P2-04
Pr11
Pr12
Auto Tuning
P2-22
P2-23
P2-24
Auto Tuning
Pr20
Pr21
Pr22
2) Same as 1) for the Y axis.
3) Same as 1) for the Z axis.
4-11
MITSUBISHI
MR-J2
P-6, P-34
P-35,P-36
P-37,P-38
Auto Tuning
P-2
DAEWOO
AC SERVO
P-07
P-08
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
5.5 Load Torque Check
A) Load Torque Check
1) When moving the X axis at the speed of 50 mm/min., use the display function of the servo unit
to check the load torque. Verify if the load torque becomes 33% or less.
YASKAW
A
SIGMA
Parameters
LG
FDA-5000
PANASONIC
MINAS
MITSUBISHI
MR-J2
DAEWOO
AC SERVO
dP_oL
J
(LoadRate%)
b
(MaxLoad%)
P-32 8
(LoadRate%)
P-32 9
(MaxLoad%)
St-08
(LoadRate%)
St-09
(MaxLoad%)
2) Same as 1) for the Y axis.
3) Same as 1) for the Z axis.
B) If the load torque is higher than 50%, it is deemed the load is heavy.
4-12
5.SERVO
5.6 Display Function of Servo Waveforms
제4장
5.6 Display Function of Servo Waveforms
A) Function Overview
Graphically displays the speed waveforms for adjusting the servo.
(Capable of displaying the waveforms such as the instruction value for spindle control, spindle
location, and spindle speed)
B) Use Condition
Set the parameter to 2001<SWD>=1.
C) How to Operate
1) Select the servo waveform display screen.
The following menu appears by selecting the diagnosis screen.
VELO
CITY
RUNHOUR
Press down the “VELOCITY” menu to show the servo waveform display screen as follows:
MDI
Mode
DIAG
DRAW
Servo
DRAW
Setup
STRT
Servo
Setup
VELO
CITY
MACHINE
COT
INVE
Fig. 5.6-1 Initial screen displaying the servo waveforms
4-13
GENDIAG
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
2) Servo Waveform Setup Screen
Press down the “SET GRPH” menu in the servo waveform display screen to show the servo
waveform setup screen.
MDI
Mode
DIAG
SET
GRPH
MACH
INE
VELO
CITY
NEXT SEL
Fig. 5.6-2 Servo waveform setup screen
In this screen, setup any necessary items to display the servo waveforms.
Place the cursor at the corresponding position using the arrow menu and refer to the
description below, and then setup the items by pressing “NEXT SEL” or entering appropriate
values.
(DATA SELECT / DATA SCALE / TRIGGER CHANNELL / TRIGGER LEVEL
/ TRIGGER SLOPE / TIME SCALE / DATA OFFSET)
After confirming the setup configuration, go back to the servo waveform display screen by
pressing the “VELOCITY.”
*) Save function for servo data (manual operation mode excluded.)
1. Press the “BuffSave” to display ‘INPUT FILE NO.’
2. Enter the program number that is empty within the range of 1~9999.
3. The servo data lastly buffered as Oxxxx is saved.
4-14
5.SERVO
5.6 Display Function of Servo Waveforms
A) DATA SELECT
It is possible to display the screens up to 4 channels simultaneously, and select each item
for each channel.
X: [AXIS SPEED] Actual speed of the spindle
X1: [COMMAND1] Instruction value before acceleration/deceleration
X2: [COMMAND2] Instruction value after acceleration/deceleration
X3: [DA-CNV] Value of DA-CONVERTER
X4: [POS ERR] Value of POSITION ERROR
X5: [POSITION] Spindle location
P: [POSITION CORDER] Spindle speed
B) DATA SCALE
Speed range of waveform display – applicable to display the speed (X, X1, X2)
(mm/min)
Select out of [100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 50000 100000].
C) TRIGGER CHANNELL
Select the targeted channel for trigger or select OFF.
*) The targets for trigger are X [AXIS SPEED] and X5 [POSITION].
D) TRIGGER LEVEL
When selecting axis speed: Select out of [0 +25 +50 +75 100 -100 -75 -50 -25 (%)],
based on the selected value from the data scale.
When selecting position: Enter the corresponding number for the trigger position.
E) TRIGGER SLOPE
Select either [+] or [-] according to the triggering direction. “+” means being accelerated,
while “-” being decelerated.
*) Example of trigger (in the case of selecting the axis speed trigger channel)
For DATA SCALE=1000, TRIGGER LEVEL=+50, and TRIGGER SLOPE=“+,”
start the measurement from the point of time when the data falls between 499 and 500.
(It is possible to display the waveform 2 to 3 seconds prior to the measurement
commencement.)
F) TIME SCALE
Select out of the time intervals of data display, [250 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 (msec)].
G) DATA OFFSET
Compensate this value for the value set at the data scale and display the waveform by
entering an appropriate number.
4-15
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
3) Servo Waveform Display Screen
When pressing the “DRAW STRT”/“CONTINUE” and the buffering is completed (approx.
10 seconds), the waveform is displayed.
①
②
MDI
Mode
DIAG
DRAW
STRT
SET
GRPH
VELO
CITY
③
MACH
INE
④
CON
INUE
LEFT
SHFT
RGHT
SHFT
0SET
GENDIAG
Fig. 5.6-3 Servo waveform display screen ⑤
Zero position (zero setting)
Location of the current cursor
① Display the relative time to make the zero position (the basic is time to start measurement)
“0.”
② Show the data and cursor positions that are currently displayed for the entire data.
③ Show the selected items, data values, and data unit for each channel.
④ Show the set speed range. (DATA SCALE + DATA OFFSET)
⑤ Show the current display time. (TIME SCALE)
“DRAW STRT”: Display the waveform after buffering. (Repressing the menu during
measurement will stop the operation.)
“SET GRPH”: Go to the servo waveform setup screen.
“CONTINUE”: Continuously display the waveform after buffering. (Repressing the menu
during continuous display will stop the operation.)
“LEFT SHFT”: Move the cursor position to the left.
“RGHT SHFT”: Move the cursor position to the right.
“0 SET”: Set the current cursor position to “0.”
“GEN-DIAG”: Go to the general diagnosis menu.
4-16
1. System Configuration
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
1. System Configuration
User PC
Operator's Box
DKU
(Display and
Keyboard Unit)
Operator's Panel
(OP. Panel)
Machine
Power Electric
Cabinet
Main Unit
I/O Device
Servo Unit
Servo Motor
Spindle Unit
Spindle Motor
Operator's Panel = OP. Panel
Power Electric Cabinet = Cabinet
I/O Device = FDD unit (floppy disk drive, etc.)
5-1
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
2. Configuration of Main Unit
Status Indicating LED
Cooling Fan of Main
Unit
Power Status Indicating LED
+5V,+12V,-12V,+24V
Sentrol2
Make sure to fix
to the cabinet
using 4 screws.
Floppy Drive
+24V Fuse 2A
AC220V Fuse 5A
5-2
3. Connector Layouts
3.1 Connectors of Main Unit
3. Connector Layouts
3.1 Connectors of Main Unit
1) 4-axis (spindle included) specification
Sentrol2
Make sure to fix
to the cabinet
using 4 screws.
CNIN1 (Input DIO3 NO.1)
CNIN2 (Input DIO3 NO.2)
CNA1
CNIN3 (Input DIO3 NO.3)
(1st axis EPS3 NO.1)
CNACOUT
CNA2
CNOUT1 (Output DIO3 NO.1)
(2nd axis EPS3 NO.1)
CNOUT2 (Output DIO3 NO.2)
CNA3
CNOUT3 (Output DIO3 NO.3)
CNMPG1 (MPG NO.1)
CNACIN
(EPS3 NO.1)
CNMPG2 (MPG NO.2)
CNR1 (EPS3 NO.1)
CND1 (LCD)
CNIO1 (I/O DIO3 NO.1)
CNCOM2 (RS232C #2)
CNLAN
CNIO2 (I/O DIO3 NO.2)
CNCOM1 (RS232C #1)
CND2 (KEY)
CNIO3 (I/O DIO3 NO.3)
CNMPG3 (MPG NO.3)
CNS1 (EPS3 NO.1)
(SPINDLE I/F)
5-3
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
2) 8-axis (spindle included) specification
Make sure to fix
to the cabinet
Sentrol2
using 4 screws.
CNA1 (1st axis EPS3/4 NO.1)
CNIN1 (Input DIO3 NO.1)
CNA4 (4th axis EPS3/4 NO.2)
CNIN2 (Input DIO3 NO.2)
CNA2 (2nd axis EPS3/4 NO.1)
CNACOUT
CNA5 (5th axis EPS3/4 NO.2)
CNOUT1 (Output DIO3 NO.1)
CNA3 (3rd axis EPS3/4 NO.1)
CNOUT2 (Output DIO3 NO.2)
CNA6 (6th axis EPS3/4 NO.2)
CNMPG1 (MPG NO.1)
((EPS3/4
/ NO.1))
CNACIN
CNR2 (EPS3/4 NO.2)
CNMPG2 (MPG NO.2)
CNR1 (EPS3 NO.1)
CND1 (LCD)
CNIO1 (I/O DIO3 NO.1)
CNCOM2 (RS232C #2)
CNLAN
CNIO2 (I/O DIO3 NO.2)
CNCOM1 (RS232C #1)
CND2 (KEY)
CNS1 (EPS3/4 NO.1)
(SPINDLE I/F)
CNMPG3 (MPG NO.3)
CNS2 (EPS3/4 NO.2)
(SPINDLE I/F)
5-4
3. Connector Layouts
3.2 Connectors of DKU
3.2 Connectors of DKU (Display Keyboard Unit)
External Keyboard Connector
Screen Adjustment Switch Board
CND2 (KEY)
(Rear View)
SCA3 UNIT
RGB Unit
(Key Scan Board)
~ LCD Panel
Connecting
RGB UNIT
Cable
LCD PANEL
(Back Light
Incorporated)
KEY16/18 UNIT
(SHEET KEYBOARD)
Power Supply Unit
M4 Thread
Connecting
AC220V
BACK LIGHT INVERTER
Connecting to the earth
CND1 (LCD)
plate of the cabinet
Connectors
Connectors of DKU Side
CND1
Dsub Connector 15 Pin Female
CND2
Dsub Connector 9 Pin Female
5-5
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
3.3 Connectors of EPS4 Board
1) In case that the item No. of the printed board is
after E371-18602
A) EPS4 board NO.1
CN24V
CNA1
CNA2
CNA3
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
CNMPG1
Dsub9S
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
PC13,14,15
EPS4 board NO.1
CNR1
Dsub9S
CNS1
E371-18602
Item No. of Printed Board
Dsub25S
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
B) EPS4 board NO.2
CN24V
CNA4
CNA5
CNA6
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub9S
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
PC13,14,15
EPS4 board NO.2
CNR2
Insert a
short pin.
Item No. of Printed Board
Dsub9S
CNS2
Dsub25S
E371-18602
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
The output of spindle
DO is Emitter Common.
Insert photo coupler
into the PC13, 14, and 15
Insert photo coupler
The output of spindle
DO is Collector Common. into the PC16, 17, and 18.
Use CNS1 as the
interface of the servo
spindle
spindle.
Insert photo coupler
into the PC20 and 21.
21
5-6
FUJI 5000M3
FUJI 5000MS5
MITSUBISHI
SG-J,SF,
MDS-A-SPA,SPJA
YASKAWA VS626VM3
3. Connector Layouts
3.3 Connectors of EPS4 BOARD
C) EPS4 board NO.3
CN24V
CNA7
CNA8
CNA9
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub9S
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
PC13,14,15
EPS4 board NO.3
CNR3
Insert a
short pin.
Dsub9S
CNS3
E371-18602
Item No. of Printed Board
Dsub25S
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
D) EPS3 board NO.4
CN24V
CNA10
CNA11
CNA12
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub9S
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
PC13,14,15
EPS4 board NO.4
CNR4
Insert a
short pin.
Item No. of Printed Board
Dsub9S
CNS4
Dsub25S
E371-18602
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
The output of spindle
Insert photo coupler
FUJI 5000M3
DO is Emitter Common. into the PC13, 14, and 15.
FUJI 5000MS5
The output of spindle
Insert photo coupler
DO is Collector Common. into the PC16, 17, and 18.
MITSUBISHI
SG-J,SF,
MDS-A-SPA,SPJA
YASKAWA VS626VM3
Use CNS1 as the
interface
of the servo spindle.
Insert photo coupler
into the PC20 and 21.
5-7
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
3.4 Connectors of EPS3 Board
1) In case that the item No. of the printed board is E371-17002
or E371-17004 (new version)
A) EPS3 board NO.1
E371-17002
or E371-17004
CN24V
CNA1
CNA2
CNA3
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
CNMPG1
Dsub9S
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP8:BOARD NO. SELECT
PC13,14,15
EPS3 board NO.1
CNR1
Dsub9S
CNS1
Dsub25S
Item No. of Printed Board
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
B) EPS3 board NO.2
CNA4
CNA5
CNA6
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
E371-17002
or E371-17004
CN24V
Dsub9S
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP8:BOARD NO. SELECT
PC13,14,15
EPS3 board NO.2
CNR2
Insert a
short pin.
Dsub9S
CNS2
Dsub25S
Item No. of Printed Board
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
The output of spindle
DO is Emitter Common.
Insert photo coupler
into the PC13, 14, and 15
Insert photo coupler
The output of spindle
DO is Collector Common. into the PC16, 17, and 18.
Use CNS1 as the
interface of the servo
spindle
spindle.
Insert photo coupler
into the PC20 and 21.
21
5-8
FUJI 5000M3
FUJI 5000MS5
MITSUBISHI
SG-J,SF,
MDS-A-SPA,SPJA
YASKAWA VS626VM3
3. Connector Layouts
3.4 Connectors of EPS3 BOARD
C) EPS3 board NO.3
E371-17002
or E371-17004
CN24V
CNA7
CNA8
CNA9
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub9S
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP8:BOARD NO. SELECT
PC13,14,15
EPS3 board NO.3
CNR3
Insert a
short pin.
Dsub9S
CNS3
Dsub25S
Item No. of Printed Board
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
D) EPS3 board NO.4
E371-17002
or E371-17004
CN24V
CNA10
CNA11
CNA12
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub9S
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP8:BOARD NO. SELECT
PC13,14,15
EPS3 board NO.4
CNR4
Insert a
short pin.
Dsub9S
CNS4
Dsub25S
Item No. of Printed Board
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
The output of spindle
Insert photo coupler
FUJI 5000M3
DO is Emitter Common. into the PC13, 14, and 15.
FUJI 5000MS5
The output of spindle
Insert photo coupler
DO is Collector Common. into the PC16, 17, and 18.
MITSUBISHI
SG-J,SF,
MDS-A-SPA,SPJA
YASKAWA VS626VM3
Use CNS1 as the
interface
of the servo spindle.
Insert photo coupler
into the PC20 and 21.
5-9
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
2) In case that the item No. of the printed board is E371-17001 (old version)
A) EPS3 board NO.1
CN24V
CNA1
CNA2
CNA3
CNMPG1
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub9S
E371-17001
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP8:BOARD NO. SELECT
PC50~55
EPS3 board NO.1
PC60~65
CNR1
Dsub9S
CNS1
Dsub25S
Item No. of Printed Board
PC70,71,72,48
B) EPS3 board NO.2
CN24V
CNA4
CNA5
CNA6
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub25S
Dsub9S
E371-17001
(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP8:BOARD NO. SELECT
EPS3 board NO.2
PC50~55
PC60~65
Insert a short
pin.
CNR2
Dsub9S
CNS2
Dsub25S
Item No. of Printed Board
PC70,71,72,48
The output of spindle
Insert photo coupler
FUJI 5000M3
DO is Emitter Common.
into the PC50 ~ 55.
FUJI 5000MS5
The output of spindle
DO is Collector Common.
Insert photo coupler
into the PC60~65.
MITSUBISHI
SG-J,SF,
MDS-A-SPA,SPJA
YASKAWA VS626VM3
Use CNS1 as the
interface
of the servo spindle.
Insert photo coupler
into the PC70, 71,
72 and 48
72,
48.
5-10
3. Connector Layouts
3.5 Connectors of DIO3 BOARD
3.5 Connectors of DIO3 Board
1) In case that the item No. of the printed board is
after E371-17105
E371-17105
A) DIO3 board NO.1
CNIN1
CNOUT1
Dsub37S
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE) (Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
DIO3 board NO.1
CNIO1
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
Item No. of Printed Board
B) DIO3 board NO.2
CNIN2
CNOUT2
E371-17105
Dsub37S
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
DIO3 board NO.2
Insert a
short pin.
CNIO2
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
Item No. of Printed Board
E371-17105
C) DIO3 board NO.3
CNIN3
CNOUT3
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
DIO3 board NO.3
Insert a
short pin.
CNIO3
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
Item No
No. of Printed Board
5-11
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
2) In case that the item No. of the printed board is
E371-17101, E371-17102, and E371-17104
E371-17101
or E371-17102, 4
A) DIO3 board NO.1
CNIN1
CNOUT1
Dsub37S
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE) (Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
DIO3 board NO.1
CNIO1
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
Item No. of Printed Board
E371-17101
or E371-17102,4
B) DIO3 board NO.2
CNIN2
CNOUT2
Dsub37S
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE) (Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
DIO3 board NO.2
CNIO2
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
Item No. of Printed Board
E371-17101
or E371-17102,4
C) DIO3 board NO.3
CNIN3
CNOUT3
Dsub37S
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE) (Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
DIO3 board NO.3
CNIO3
Dsub37S
(Dsub
37PIN FEMALE))
(
Item No.
No of Printed Board
5-12
3. Connector Layouts
3.5 Connectors of DIO3 BOARD
3) In case that the item No. of the printed board is E371-17100
A) DIO3 board NO.1
CNIN1
CNOUT1
Dsub37S
Dsub37S
E371-17100
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
DIO3 board NO.1 : OPEN
Item No. of Printed Board
Dsub37S
CNIO1
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
B) DIO3 board NO.2
CNIN2
CNOUT2
Dsub37S
Dsub37S
E371-17100
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT
DIO3 board NO.2 : CLOSE
Item No. of Printed Board
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
5-13
CNIO2
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
4. Installation
4.1 Enviromental Requirements for Installation
1) Ambient Temperature
Operation: 0℃ ~ 45℃
Storage: -20℃ ~ 60℃
2) Humidity: 75% or less
3) Vibration: 0.5G or less during operation
4) Power supply: AC220V ±10% , 50/60Hz ±1Hz
4.2 Power Supply Capacity
Capacity of 0.4KVA + Servo Unit
Refer to the specification of each servo motor because the capacity of
the servo unit depends on the motor type.
4.3 Design Requirements for Cabinet
1) Completely enclosed structure
2) Designed to have the internal temperature rise of the cabinet 10 ℃ or less,
compared with the external temperature.
3) Designed to make air flow at the degree of 0.5m/sec through the surface of
each unit using a fan.
However, be sure not to have each unit face the air flow directly.
4) As a noise countermeasure, make sure to mount each unit with a gap more
than 100 mm at the cable of DC50V or higher, or AC power supply.
5) There should exist at least 100 mm of space at the top and bottom of the main
unit.
100 mm
or more
FAN
FAN
FAN
MAIN UNIT
100 mm
or more
Cabinet
4.4 Heating Value of
Each Unit
UNIT
MAIN UNIT
DKU (for SENTROL2)
DKU (for PNC2)
Heating Value
150W
30W
125W
4.5 About Use of Indirect Cooler
An indirect cooler efficiently discharges the internal heat to the outside while
completely blocking the outside and the inside of the cabinet, even under the
the worst environmental conditions including dusts, oils, and
moisture, further enhancing the controller's stable operation and reliability.
Therefore, it is highly recommended to use an indirect cooler.
4.6 Dust Protection Countermeasure
There is a high possibility for insulation deterioration in the main unit or the
DKU (Display Keyboard Unit) due to dusty environment, thus make sure to block
the cabinet door and the cable inlet using a packing.
packing
5-14
4. Installation
4.7 Noise Countermeasure
4.7 Noise Countermeasure
1) Separation of Signal Cables
The mechanical wiring is grouped shown as the table below.
The Group A shall be separated from the Group B and C by 100 mm or more.
GROUP
A
B
Wirings
AC line at the primary side
AC line at the secondary side
Power cable
Power cable of AC, DC motor, and
servo/spindle motor
AC solenoid
AC relay
DC solenoid (24V)
DC relay (24V)
Main unit ~ switch, lamp, and relay
Measures
Make sure to separate from the
Group B and C by 100 mm or more.
Attach a spark killer or
a diode to the solenoid and relay.
Make sure to separate from the Group
A by 100 mm or more.
Attach a spark killer or a diode to the
solenoid and relay.
Make sure to separate from the Group
A by 100 mm or more.
It is recommended to use a shielded
cable.
Make sure to separate from the Group
A by 100 mm or more.
Use a shielded cable and
connect the shield of the shielded
cable to the ground.
RIO1/RIO2 board ~ switch and LEDs
Main unit ~ 24V AVR
RIO1/RIO2 board ~ 24V AVR
C
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
~
~
~
~
~
servo unit
MPG
DKU
RS232C
RIO1/RIO2 board
2) Ground
A) Unit Ground
Cabinet
DKU
(For SENTROL2)
(For PNC2)
MAIN UNIT
FG
CNACIN-2 CNACOUT-4
SERVO
AC220V
UNIT
Power
supply input
RIO1 board
RIO2 board
SPINDLE
UNIT
SERVO MOTOR
Above 1.25 (SQ)
EARTH PLATE
SPINDLE MOTOR
Factory Ground
5-15
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2
B) Make sure to fix the main unit to the cabinet.
M4 Thread
M4 Thread
C) Shielding a shielded cable
Connector
Connector
Shielded cable
Signal
Signal
0V
0V
MAIN UNIT
SERVO UNIT
SPINDLE UNIT, etc.
EARTH PLATE
3) Spark Killer/Diode
As noise countermeasure, be sure to connect spark killers / diodes
to the both ends of the coils of relay, MC (Magnetic Contactor), solenoid, etc.
Connect a spark killer for AC, while a diode for DC.
A) Spark Killer
AC RELAY
AC SOLENOID
MC
Resistance (R): Corresponds to the DC
resistance of the coil.
CAPACITANCE(C) :
I²
I²
~
(㎌)
10
20
I: Ampere (A) for a normal coil
SPARK KILLER
B) Diode
DC RELAY
0V
24V
DIODE
1A, 2000V
5-16
1.How to View “Diagnosis” Sereen
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
1. How to View “Diagnosis” Screen
The diagnosis screen shows I/O signals of a machine and the status of internal data. This screen includes 4
menus as followings:
MISC DATA : Displays each data value in the NC and the status of signal on/off.
RUN HOUR : Displays the total result of the NC uptime.
TIMER: Displays and configures the set value of the timer in PLC.
COUNTER: Displays and configures the set value and the current value of the counter in PLC.
KEEP RELAY: Displays and configures the keep relay data in PLC.
DATA TABLE: Displays and configures the data in the data table.
PLC DIAG : Displays the state of on/off for each signal in PLC.
LADDER: Displays ladders and shows and retrieve dynamics of each relay and coil.
MONITOR: Used to check the states of machine I/O signals.
The menus of the diagnosis screen are composed of:
① Menus of NC
diagnosis screen
MISC
RUN
PLC
DATA HOUR
Function menus are displayed
according to each NC diagnosis
Select each NC diagnosis screen.
screen.
Select the PLC screen.
② Menus of PLC
screen selected
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
)
LADD
ER
MONI
TOR
)
SEQ
RUN
SEQ
IN
)
Function menus are displayed
according to each PLC screen.
③ Menus to select
PLC screen
TIMER
COU
NTER
KEEP
RELY
DATA
TABL
PLC
DIAG
② To the menu
④ Menus to select
NC diagnosis
screen
MISC
RUN
DATA HOUR
Used to operate PLC RAM
① To the menu
(Displayed in the case of the parameter 2001 RAM=1,
SQC=1)자기진단
6-1
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1 (in the order of addresses)
ADDRESS
G00
G01
G02
G03
G04
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
*IT
*CSL
UINT
SKIP1
*ESP
*SP
RRW
ERS
*AIT
*BSL
AE1
AE2
AE3
SKIP2
SKIP3
SKIP4
DESCRIPTION
Interlock signal for total axes
Interlock signal to start the cutting block
Macro interrupt signal
Skip signal 1
Emergency stop
Quiescence signal for automatic operation
Reset & rewind signals
External reset signal
Interlock signal for total axes of automatic operation
Interlock signal to start a block
Signal 1 indicating arrival at the measuring
Signal 2 indicating arrival at the measuring
Signal 3 indicating arrival at the measuring
Skip signal 2
Skip signal 3
Skip signal 4
ZRN
H
J
D
T
MEM
EDT
Selecting signal for ref. point return mode
Selecting signal for manual handle feed
Selecting signal for continuous manual feed
Selecting signal for manual data input
Selecting signal for tape instruction
Selecting signal for memory instruction
Selecting signal for editing tape memory
AFL
DRN
BDTI
SBK
OVC
ABS
Lock signal for auxiliary functions
Dryrun signal
Optional block skip signal
Single block signal
Override cancel signal
Absolute conversion signal
MLK
Machine lock signal
6-2
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
G05
G06
G07
G08
G09
G10
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
ST
FIN
DESCRIPTION
Startup signal for automatic operation
Completion signal
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
SCMP
M01
MP1
Memory protection key 1
Memory protection key 2
Memory protection key 3
Memory protection key 4
Spindle clamp
M01 valid/invalid
Selection of the movement amount by
manual handle feed 1
Selection of the movement amount by
manual handle feed 2
MP2
ROV1
ROV2
RT
BDI2
BDI3
BDI4
BDI5
BDI6
BDI7
BDI8
BDI9
*CHF
Rapid traverse rate 1
Rapid traverse rate 2
Selecting signal for manual dispatch
Optional block skip 2 signal
Optional block skip 3 signal
Optional block skip 4 signal
Optional block skip 5 signal
Optional block skip 6 signal
Optional block skip 7 signal
Optional block skip 8 signal
Optional block skip 9 signal
Chamferring signal
TLMI
MRET
Input signal for measuring the tool lengths
Input signal for measuring the tool lengths
RVS
Reverse movement signal (SENTROL2-C)
TL01
TL02
TL04
TL08
TL16
TL32
TL64
TLSKP
HS3A
HS3B
HS3C
HS3D
Signal for tool group number
Signal for tool group number
Signal for tool group number
Signal for tool group number
Signal for tool group number
Signal for tool group number
Signal for tool group number
Tool skip signal
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
TLRST
Reset signal for tool replacement
6-3
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
G11
G12
G15
G16
G17
G18
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
HS1A
HS1B
HS1C
HS1D
HS2A
HS2B
HS2C
HS2D
*FV0
*FV1
*FV2
*FV3
*FV4
*FV5
*FV6
*FV7
*JV0
*JV1
*JV2
*JV3
*JV4
*JV5
*JV6
*JV7
SYNC9
SYNC10
SYNC11
SYNC12
SYNC13
SYNC14
SYNC15
SYNC16
SYNC1
SYNC2
SYNC3
SYNC4
SYNC5
SYNC6
SYNC7
SYNC8
SOVR0
SOVR1
SOVR2
SOVR3
SOVR4
SOVR5
SOVR6
SOVR7
DESCRIPTION
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Selection of the manual handle feed axis
Feed rate override
Feed rate override
Feed rate override
Feed rate override
Feed rate override
Feed rate override
Feed rate override
Feed rate override
Manual feed rate override
Manual feed rate override
Manual feed rate override
Manual feed rate override
Manual feed rate override
Manual feed rate override
Manual feed rate override
Manual feed rate override
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Asynchronous control selecting signal
Spindle override input
Spindle override input
Spindle override input
Spindle override input
Spindle override input
Spindle override input
Spindle override input
Spindle override input
6-4
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
G19
G20
G21
G22
G23
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
WN1
WN2
WN4
WN8
WN16
WN32
WN64
WN128
RI300
RI301
RI302
RI303
RI304
RI305
RI306
RI307
RI308
RI309
RI310
RI311
DESCRIPTION
Search for external work numbers
Search for external work numbers
Search for external work numbers
Search for external work numbers
Search for external work numbers
Search for external work numbers
Search for external work numbers
Search for external work numbers
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
RISGN3
RI400
RI401
RI402
RI403
RI404
RI405
RI406
RI407
RI408
RI409
RI410
RI411
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
RISGN4
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
6-5
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
G24
G25
G26
G27
G28
G29
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
RI100
RI101
RI102
RI103
RI104
RI105
RI106
RI107
RI108
RI109
RI110
RI111
DESCRIPTION
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
RISGN1
RI200
RI201
RI202
RI203
RI204
RI205
RI206
RI207
RI208
RI209
RI210
RI211
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
RISGN2
Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
RGTMD3
Completion signal of rigid selection
RDY3
ALMR3
All set.
Alarm reset
HSP3
High-speed tap signal
*ESP3
CRSRV3
CRSFR3
ORCM3
Emergence stop
Instruction for reverse rotation
Instruction for forward rotation
Orient instruction
6-6
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
G30
G31
G32
G33
G34
G35
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
RGTMD4
Completion signal of rigid selection
RDY4
ALMR4
All set.
Alarm reset
HSP4
High-speed tap signal
*ESP4
CRSRV4
CRSFR4
ORCM4
EXPUN
EXRD
EXSTP
Emergency stop
Instruction for reverse rotation
Instruction for forward rotation
Orient instruction
Start signal of external punch
Start signal of external read
Stop signal of external read/punch
EOREND
Read
R d completion
l i signal
i l ffor externall ddata
output
Request signal for external data output
Strobe signal for external data input
Address signal for external data input
Address signal for external data input
Address signal for external data input
Address signal for external data input
Address signal for external data input
Address signal for external data input
Address signal for external data input
Address signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal for external data input
Data signal
g for external data input
p
Data signal for external data input
ERDRQ
EISTB
EIA0
EIA1
EIA2
EIA3
EIA4
EIA5
EIA6
EIA7
EID0
EID1
EID2
EID3
EID4
EID5
EID6
EID7
EID8
EID9
EID10
EID11
EID12
EID13
EID14
EID15
6-7
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
G36
G37
G38
G39
G40
G41
BIT
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
0
EID16
Data signal for external data input
1
EID17
Data signal for external data input
2
EID18
Data signal for external data input
3
EID19
Data signal for external data input
4
EID20
Data signal for external data input
5
EID21
Data signal for external data input
6
EID22
Data signal for external data input
7
EID23
Data signal for external data input
0
EID24
Data signal for external data input
1
EID25
Data signal for external data input
2
EID26
Data signal for external data input
3
EID27
Data signal for external data input
4
EID28
Data signal for external data input
5
EID29
Data signal for external data input
6
EID30
Data signal for external data input
7
EID31
Data signal for external data input
0
EID32
Data signal for external data input
1
EID33
Data signal for external data input
2
EID34
Data signal for external data input
3
EID35
Data signal for external data input
4
EID36
Data signal for external data input
5
EID37
Data signal for external data input
6
EID38
Data signal for external data input
7
EID39
Data signal for external data input
0
EID40
Data signal for external data input
1
EID41
Data signal for external data input
2
EID42
Data signal for external data input
3
EID43
Data signal for external data input
4
EID44
Data signal for external data input
5
EID45
Data signal for external data input
6
EID46
Data signal for external data input
7
EID47
Data signal for external data input
0
RPB8
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
1
RPB9
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
2
RPB10
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
3
RPB11
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
4
RPB12
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
5
RPB13
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
6
RPB14
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
7
RPB15
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
0
RPB0
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
1
RPB1
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
2
RPB2
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
3
RPB3
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
4
RPB4
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
5
RPB5
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
6
RPB6
Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
7
RPB7
p
g for universal switches of software operator's
p
ppanel
Response
signal
6-8
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
G42
G43
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
SIGNAL
RIGTMD1
Completion signal of rigid selection
RDY1
ALMR1
All set.
Alarm reset
HSP1
High-speed tap signal
*ESP1
CRSRV1
CRSFR1
ORCM1
RPB16
1
RPB17
2
RPB18
3
RPB19
4
RPB20
5
RPB21
6
RPB22
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RPB23
Emergency stop
Instruction for reverse rotation
Instruction for forward rotation
Orient instruction
Response signal for universal switches of software
operator's panel
Response signal for universal switches of software
operator's panel
Response signal for universal switches of software
operator's panel
Response signal for universal switches of software
operator's panel
Response signal for universal switches of software
operator's panel
Response signal for universal switches of software
operator's panel
Response signal for universal switches of software
operator's panel
Response signal for universal switches of software
RIGTMD2
Completion signal of rigid selection
RDY2
ALMR2
All set.
Alarm reset
HSP2
High-speed tap signal
*ESP2
CRSRV2
CRSFR2
ORCM2
TRMOD
NOMCL2
NOMCL3
Emergency stop
Instruction for reverse rotation
Instruction for forward rotation
Orient instruction
Starting tracing function
Setting nominal clearance
Setting nominal clearance
G44
G45
G46
G47
DESCRIPTION
6-9
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
G48
G49
G50
G51
G52
G53
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
UI000
UI001
UI002
UI003
UI004
UI005
UI006
UI007
UI008
UI009
UI010
UI011
UI012
UI013
UI014
UI015
UI016
UI017
UI018
UI019
UI020
UI021
UI022
UI023
UI024
UI025
UI026
UI027
UI028
UI029
UI030
UI031
UI100
UI101
UI102
UI103
UI104
UI105
UI106
UI107
UI108
UI109
UI110
UI111
UI112
UI113
UI114
UI115
DESCRIPTION
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
6-10
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
UI116
UI117
UI118
UI119
UI120
UI121
UI122
UI123
UI124
UI125
UI126
UI127
UI128
UI129
UI130
UI131
UI200
UI201
UI202
UI203
UI204
UI205
UI206
UI207
UI208
UI209
UI210
UI211
UI212
UI213
UI214
UI215
UI216
UI217
UI218
UI219
UI220
UI221
UI222
UI223
UI224
UI225
UI226
UI227
UI228
UI229
UI230
UI231
DESCRIPTION
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input
p signal
g for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
6-11
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
G60
G61
G62
G63
G64
G65
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
UI300
UI301
UI302
UI303
UI304
UI305
UI306
UI307
UI308
UI309
UI310
UI311
UI312
UI313
UI314
UI315
UI316
UI317
UI318
UI319
UI320
UI321
UI322
UI323
UI324
UI325
UI326
UI027
UI328
UI329
UI330
UI331
*+L1
*-L1
DESCRIPTION
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Input signal for custom macro
Over travel signal
Over travel signal
*IT1
HINT1
*SVF1
Interlock signal by axis
Interrupt permission for the 1st axis handle
Servo off signal
+J1
-J1
MI1
MLK1
ADEC1
PCAX1
+MIT1
-MIT1
Selection signal for feed axis and its direction
Selection signal for feed axis and its direction
Mirror image signal
Machine lock signal
Automatic ref. point return
Input signal for PLC control axis
Measurement value for offset amount
Measurement value for offset amount
6-12
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
G66
G67
G68
G69
G70
G71
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
EOR00
EOR01
EOR02
EOR03
EOR04
EOR05
EOR06
EOR07
EC00
EC01
EC02
EMSBK1
ESBK1
ESTP1
ECLR1
EBUF1
EIF000
EIF001
EIF002
EIF003
EIF004
EIF005
EIF006
EIF007
EIF008
EIF009
EIF010
EIF011
EIF012
EIF013
EIF014
EIF015
ED000
ED001
ED002
ED003
ED004
ED005
ED006
ED007
ED008
ED009
ED010
ED011
ED012
ED013
ED014
ED015
DESCRIPTION
Overriding the cutting feed rate of the PC control axis
Overriding the cutting feed rate of the PC control axis
Overriding the cutting feed rate of the PC control axis
Overriding the cutting feed rate of the PC control axis
Overriding the cutting feed rate of the PC control axis
Overriding the cutting feed rate of the PC control axis
Overriding the cutting feed rate of the PC control axis
Overriding the cutting feed rate of the PC control axis
Axis control instruction
Axis control instruction
Axis control instruction
Prohibition signal against block stop
Block stop signal
Break signal for axis control
Reset signal
Delivery signal for axis control instruction
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting
speed
g feed rate, spindle
p
p
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel
travel, dwell time,
time direction of spindle
6-13
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
G72
G73
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
ED016
ED017
ED018
ED019
ED020
ED021
ED022
ED023
ED024
ED025
ED026
ED027
ED028
ED029
ED030
ED031
DESCRIPTION
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
Same as G64~G73 (1st axis) to the rest.
(G74~G83)
2nd axis
(G144~G153) 9th axis
(G84~G93)
3rd axis
(G154~G163) 10th axis
(G94~G103) 4th axis
(G164~G173) 11th axis
(G104~G113) 5th axis
(G174~G183) 12th axis
(G114~G123) 6th axis
(G184~G193) 13th axis
(G124~G133) 7th axis
(G194~G203) 14th axis
(G134~G143) 8th axis
(G204~G213) 15th axis
(G214~G223) 16th axis
ADDRESS
G224
G225
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
HSF00
HSF01
HSF02
HSF03
HSF04
HSF05
HSF06
HSF07
HSF08
HSF09
HSF10
HSF11
HSF12
HSF13
HSF14
HSF15
DESCRIPTION
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
6-14
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
G226
G227
G228
G229
G230
G231
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
HSF16
HSF17
HSF18
HSF19
HSF20
HSF21
HSF22
HSF23
HSF24
HSF25
HSF26
HSF27
HSF28
HSF29
HSF30
HSFON
ZRN11
ZRN12
ZRN13
ZRN14
ZRN21
ZRN22
ZRN23
ZRN24
ZRN31
ZRN32
ZRN33
ZRN34
ZRN41
ZRN42
ZRN43
ZRN44
ZRN51
ZRN52
ZRN53
ZRN54
ZRN61
ZRN62
ZRN63
ZRN64
ZRN71
ZRN72
ZRN73
ZRN74
ZRN81
ZRN82
ZRN83
ZRN84
DESCRIPTION
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Handle Feed Step Data
Effective Handle Feed Step
1st axis
1st ref. point return
1st axis
2nd ref. point return
1st axis
3rd ref. point return
1st axis
4th ref. point return
2nd axis
1st ref. ppoint return
2nd axis
2nd ref. point return
2nd axis
3rd ref. point return
2nd axis
4th ref. point return
3rd axis
1st ref. point return
3rd axis
2nd ref. point return
3rd axis
3rd ref. point return
3rd axis
4th ref. point return
4th axis
1st ref. point return
4th axis
2nd ref. point return
4th axis
3rd ref. point return
4th axis
4th ref. point return
5th axis
1st ref. point return
5th axis
2nd ref. point return
5th axis
3rd ref. point return
5th axis
4th ref. point return
6th axis
1st ref. point return
6th axis
2nd ref. point return
6th axis
3rd ref. point return
6th axis
4th ref. point return
7th axis
1st ref. point return
7th axis
2nd ref. point return
7th axis
3rd ref. point return
7th axis
4th ref. point return
8th axis
1st ref. point return
8th axis
2nd ref. point return
8th axis
3rd ref. point return
8th axis
4th ref.
ref point return
6-15
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
G232
G233
G234
G235
G236
G237
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
ZRN91
ZRN92
ZRN93
ZRN94
ZRNA1
ZRNA2
ZRNA3
ZRNA4
ZRNB1
ZRNB2
ZRNB3
ZRNB4
ZRNC1
ZRNC2
ZRNC3
ZRNC4
ZRND1
ZRND2
ZRND3
ZRND4
ZRNE1
ZRNE2
ZRNE3
ZRNE4
ZRNF1
ZRNF2
ZRNF3
ZRNF4
ZRNG1
ZRNG2
ZRNG3
ZRNG4
PATCR
PATUP
PATDWN
ASET
MSET
PAT*1
PAT*2
PAT*4
PAT*8
PAT*16
PAT*32
PAT*64
DESCRIPTION
9th axis
1st ref. point return
9th axis
2nd ref. point return
9th axis
3rd ref. point return
9th axis
4th ref. point return
10th axis
1st ref. point return
10th axis
2nd ref. point return
10th axis
3rd ref. point return
10th axis
4th ref. point return
11th axis
1st ref. point return
11th axis
2nd ref. point return
11th axis
3rd ref. point return
11th axis
4th ref. point return
12th axis
1st ref. point return
12th axis
2nd ref. point return
12th axis
3rd ref. point return
12th axis
4th ref. point return
13th axis
1st ref. point return
13th axis
2nd ref. point return
13th axis
3rd ref. point return
13th axis
4th ref. point return
14th axis
1st ref. point return
14th axis
2nd ref.
ref point return
14th axis
3rd ref. point return
14th axis
4th ref. point return
15th axis
1st ref. point return
15th axis
2nd ref. point return
15th axis
3rd ref. point return
15th axis
4th ref. point return
16th axis
1st ref. point return
16th axis
2nd ref. point return
16th axis
3rd ref. point return
16th axis
4th ref. point return
External return key for working setup
External cursor up key for working setup
External cursor down key for working setup
Indication number setting for working setup in automatic
system mode
Indication number setting for working setup in manual
system mode
Indication number setting for working setup *1
Indication number setting for working setup *2
Indication number setting for working setup *4
Indication number setting for working setup *8
Indication number setting for working setup *16
Indication number setting for working setup *32
Indication number setting for working setup *64
6-16
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
G238
G239
G240
G241
G242
G243
BIT
SIGNAL
0
JGPS01
1
JGPS02
2
JGPS03
3
JGPS04
4
JGPS05
5
JGPS06
6
JGPS07
7
JGPS08
0
JGPS09
1
JGPS10
2
JGPS11
3
JGPS12
4
JGPS13
5
JGPS14
6
JGPS15
7
JGPS16
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CAL101
CAL102
CAL103
CAL104
CAL105
CAL106
CAL107
CAL108
CAL109
CAL110
CAL111
CAL112
CAL113
CAL114
CAL115
CAL116
CAL201
CAL202
CAL203
CAL204
CAL205
CAL206
CAL207
CAL208
CAL209
CAL210
CAL211
CAL212
CAL213
CAL214
CAL215
CAL216
DESCRIPTION
1st axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
2nd axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
3rd axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
4th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
5th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
6th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
7th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
8th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
9th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
10th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated
by value of machine coordinates
11th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated
by value of machine coordinates
12th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated
by value of machine coordinates
13th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated
by value of machine coordinates
14th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated
by value of machine coordinates
15th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated
by value of machine coordinates
16th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated
by value of machine coordinates
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 1 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 2 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 3 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 4 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 5 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 6 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 7 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 8 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 9 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 10 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 11 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 12 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 13 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 14 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 15 text
O9700
Executing calculation of the line 16 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 1 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 2 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 3 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 4 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 5 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 6 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 7 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 8 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 9 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 10 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 11 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 12 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 13 text
O9701
Executing
E
i calculation
l l i off the
h li
line 14 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 15 text
O9701
Executing calculation of the line 16 text
6-17
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
Same as G240.0~G241.7 (CAL101~116 O9700) and
G242.0~G243.7 (CAL201~216 O9701) to the rest.
G244.0~G245.7 (CAL301~316 O9702)
G246.0~G247.7 (CAL401~416 O9703)
G248.0~G249.7 (CAL501~516 O9704)
G250.0~G251.7 (CAL601~616 O9705)
G252.0~G253.7 (CAL701~716 O9706)
G254.0~G255.7 (CAL801~816 O9707)
6-18
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
F00
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
AL
RST
SPL
STL
OP
SA
MA
DEN
IPEN
DST
INCH
TAP
RPD
THRD
CSS
Singal during alarming
Signal during reset
Signal during quiescence of automatic operation
Signal during startup of automatic operation
Signal during automatic operation
Completion signal for servo ready
Completion signal for control unit ready
Completion signal for distribution
Completion signal for distribution
Startup signal for manual data input
Input signal for inch
Signal during tapping
Signal during rapid feed
Signal during threading screws
Signal during constant primary speed
CUT
*ESPM
DSP
TLMO
ROTMV
Signal during cutting
Emergency stop
Feed hold key
Output
p signal
g for measuring
g tool length
g
Status output signal during movement of rotatation axis
MZRN
MH
MJ
MD
MT
MMEM
MEDT
Notification signal for ref. point return mode
Validation signal for selecting manual handle feed
Validation signal for selecting manual continuous feed
Validation signal for selecting manual data input
Validation signal for selecting tape instruction
Validation signal for selecting memory instruction
Validation signal for selecting tape memory edit
MAFL
MDRN
MBDT1
MSBK
MM01
MABS
Validation signal for locking auxiliary functions
Validation signal for dryrun
Validation signal for optional block skip 1
Validation signal for single block
M01 switch of software operator's panel
Validation signal for converting to absolute
MMLK
MBDI2
MBDI3
MBDI4
MBDI5
MBDI6
MBDI7
MBDI8
MBDI9
Validation signal for machine lock
Validation signal for optional block skip 2
Validation signal for optional block skip 3
Validation signal for optional block skip 4
Validation signal for optional block skip 5
Validation signal for optional block skip 6
Validation signal for optional block skip 7
Validation signal for optional block skip 8
Validation signal for optional block skip 9
6-19
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
PSALM
SVALM
OHALM
OTALM
SYALM
MFOC
MSOC
MKEY
EMGLS
EDTCHK
SMPON
RTAP
RPBSY
ESEND
TLCHA
TLCHB
MF
SF
TF
BF
DESCRIPTION
Alarm for program operation error
Servo alarm
Over heat alarm
Over travel alarm
Alarm for abnormality of control unit
Feed override cancel
Spindle override cancel
Protection key switch for software operator's panel
Emergency L/S signal
Check signal for automatic operation (edit mode)
Signal for servo main power on
Status signal of rigid mode
Signal during read/punch
Completion signal for external search
Signal for tool replacement
Signal for tool replacement
Strobe signal for auxiliary functions
Strobe signal for spindle function
Stroble signal for tool function
Strobe signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
DM00
DM01
DM02
DM30
RO00
RO01
RO02
RO03
RO04
RO05
RO06
RO07
RO08
RO09
RO10
RO11
RO12
RO13
RO14
RO15
Decode M signal
Decode M signal
Decode M signal
Decode M signal
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
Speed signal of instructing spindle
6-20
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
AR00
AR01
AR02
AR03
AR04
AR05
AR06
AR07
AR08
AR09
AR10
AR11
AR12
AR13
AR14
AR15
MR00
MR01
MR02
MR03
MR04
MR05
MR06
MR07
MR08
MR09
MR10
MR11
MR12
MR13
MR14
MR15
M00
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
DESCRIPTION
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Actual speed signal of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal
of spindle
g for maximum speed
p
p
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Signal for maximum speed of spindle
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
6-21
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
S00
S01
S02
S03
S04
S05
S06
S07
S08
S09
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
DESCRIPTION
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for auxiliary functions
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
Code signal for spindle function
6-22
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
T00
T01
T02
T03
T04
T05
T06
T07
T08
T09
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
T17
T18
T19
T20
T21
T22
T23
T24
T25
T26
T27
T28
T29
T30
T31
B00
B01
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
DESCRIPTION
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal
g for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for tool function
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
6-23
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
PRECH
FAR
COLLIS
DESCRIPTION
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
Nominal clearance state
Far state
Collision state
EIREND
Read completion signal for external data input
EOSTB
EOA0
EOA1
EOA2
EOA3
EOA4
EOA5
EOA6
EOA7
EOD00
EOD01
EOD02
EOD03
EOD04
EOD05
EOD06
EOD07
EOD08
EOD09
EOD10
EOD11
EOD12
EOD13
EOD14
EOD15
Strobe signal for external data output
Address signal for external data output
Address signal for external data output
Address signal for external data output
Address signal for external data output
Address signal for external data output
Address signal for external data output
Address signal for external data output
Address signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
6-24
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F41
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
EOD16
EOD17
EOD18
EOD19
EOD20
EOD21
EOD22
EOD23
EOD24
EOD25
EOD26
EOD27
EOD28
EOD29
EOD30
EOD31
EOD32
EOD33
EOD34
EOD35
EOD36
EOD37
EOD38
EOD39
EOD40
EOD41
EOD42
EOD43
EOD44
EOD45
EOD46
EOD47
SOR0
SOR1
SOR2
SOR3
SOR4
SOR5
SOR6
SOR7
DESCRIPTION
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Data signal for external data output
Spindle override
Spindle override
Spindle override
Spindle override
Spindle override
Spindle override
Spindle override
Spindle override
ORAR2
*SPAL2
SST2
SARM2
Orient completion signal
Spindle trouble signal
Zero speed signal
Signal for indicating access to a designated speed
6-25
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
F42
F43
F44
F45
F46
F47
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
PB8
PB9
PB10
PB11
PB12
PB13
PB14
PB15
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
DESCRIPTION
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
ORAR1
*SPAL1
SST1
SARM1
PB16
PB17
PB18
PB19
PB20
PB21
PB22
PB23
RAFL
RDRN
RBDT1
RSBK
RM01
RABS
ROVC
RMLK
RCLMA
SUCLP
SCLP
Orient completion signal
Spindle trouble signal
Zero speed signal
Signal for indicating access to a designated speed
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Universal switches of software operator's panel
Request for auxiliary function lock
Request for dryrun
Request for optional block skip
Request for single block
Request for M01
Request for manual absolute
Request for feed override cancel
Request for machine lock
Requesting output signal for software operator's panel
Request signal for unclamping the spindle
Request signal for clamping the spindle
RCHIP
Requesting output signal for software operator's panel
RCLCA
Requesting output signal for software operator
operator'ss panel
6-26
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
F48
F49
F50
F51
F52
F53
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
UO000
UO001
UO002
UO003
UO004
UO005
UO006
UO007
UO008
UO009
UO010
UO011
UO012
UO013
UO014
UO015
UO016
UO017
UO018
UO019
UO020
UO021
UO022
UO023
UO024
UO025
UO026
UO027
UO028
UO029
UO030
UO031
UO100
UO101
UO102
UO103
UO104
UO105
UO106
UO107
UO108
UO109
UO110
UO111
UO112
UO113
UO114
UO115
DESCRIPTION
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output
p signal
g for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
6-27
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
F54
F55
F56
F57
F58
F59
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
UO116
UO117
UO118
UO119
UO120
UO121
UO122
UO123
UO124
UO125
UO126
UO127
UO128
UO129
UO130
UO131
UO200
UO201
UO202
UO203
UO204
UO205
UO206
UO207
UO208
UO209
UO210
UO211
UO212
UO213
UO214
UO215
UO216
UO217
UO218
UO219
UO220
UO221
UO222
UO223
UO224
UO225
UO226
UO227
UO228
UO229
UO230
UO231
DESCRIPTION
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
6-28
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
F60
F61
F62
F63
F64
F65
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
UO300
UO301
UO302
UO303
UO304
UO305
UO306
UO307
UO308
UO309
UO310
UO311
UO312
UO313
UO314
UO315
UO316
UO317
UO318
UO319
UO320
UO321
UO322
UO323
UO324
UO325
UO326
UO327
UO328
UO329
UO330
UO331
ZP1
ZP21
MV1
MD1
ZP31
ZP41
INP1
*ENB1
MMI1
DESCRIPTION
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output
p signal
g for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Output signal for custom macro
Signal of completing return to the reference point
Signal of completing return to the 2nd reference point
Signal during axis travel
Travel direction signal
Signal of completing return to the 3rd reference point
Signal of completing return to the 4th reference point
Inposition signal
Validation signal for servo off
Validation signal for mirror image
RPRF1
Signal of completing return to the reference point
6-29
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
F66
F68
F69
F70
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
EIAL1
Alarm signal
EOTP1
EOTN1
EBSY1
ZP2
ZP22
MV2
MD2
ZP32
ZP42
INP2
*ENB2
MMI2
Signal for over travel plus direction
Signal for over travel minus direction
Import signal of instructing axis control
Signal of completing return to the reference point
Signal of completing return to the 2nd reference point
Signal during axis travel
Travel direction signal
Signal of completing return to the 3rd reference point
Signal of completing return to the 4th reference point
Inposition signal
Validation signal for servo off
Validation signal for mirror image
RPRF2
Signal of completing return to the reference point
EIAL2
Alarm signal
EOTP2
EOTN2
EBSY2
Signal for over travel plus direction
Signal for over travel minus direction
Import signal of instructing axis control
Same as F64~F67 (1st axis) and F68~F71 (2nd axis) to the rest.
(F72~F75) 3rd axis,
(F76~F79) 4th axis,
(F80~F83) 5th axis, (F84~F87) 6th axis
(F88~F91) 7th axis,
(F92~F95) 8th axis,
(F96~F99) 9th axis, (F100~F103) 10th axis
(F104~F107) 11th axis, (F108~F111) 12th axis, (F112~F115) 13th axis,
(F116~F119) 14th axis (F120~F123) 15th axis, (F124~F127) 16th axis
6-30
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
F128
F129
F130
F131
BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
ORAR3
*SPAL3
SST3
SARM3
Orient completion signal
Spindle trouble signal
Zero speed signal
Signal for indicating access to a designated speed
ORAR4
*SPAL4
SST4
SARM4
ANLG10
ANLG11
ANLG12
ANLG13
ANLG14
ANLG15
ANLG16
ANLG17
ANLG18
ANLG19
ANLG1A
ANLG1B
Orient completion signal
Spindle trouble signal
Zero speed signal
Signal for indicating access to a designated speed
Analog data input signal
Analog data input signal
Analog data input signal
Analog data input signal
Analogg data input
p signal
g
Analog data input signal
Analog data input signal
Analog data input signal
Analog data input signal
Analog data input signal
Analog data input signal
Analog data input signal
F132.0 ~ F133.3 (ALNG20~2B
F134.0 ~ F135.3 (ALNG30~3B
F136.0 ~ F137.3 (ALNG40~4B
F138.0 ~ F139.3 (ALNG50~5B
F140.0 ~ F141.3 (ALNG60~6B
F142.0 ~ F143.3 (ALNG70~7B
F144.0 ~ F145.3 (ALNG80~8B
CHANNEL2)
CHANNEL3)
CHANNEL4)
CHANNEL5)
CHANNEL6)
CHANNEL7)
CHANNEL8)
6-31
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
F146
F147
F148
F149
F150
BIT
SIGNAL
0
JGFN01
1
JGFN02
2
JGFN03
3
JGFN04
4
JGFN05
5
JGFN06
6
JGFN07
7
JGFN08
0
JGFN09
1
JGFN10
2
JGFN11
3
JGFN12
4
JGFN13
5
JGFN14
6
JGFN15
7
JGFN16
0
PT_A1
1
PT_A2
2
PT_A3
3
PT_A4
4
PT_A5
5
PT_A6
6
PT_A7
7
PT_A8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PT_M1
PT_M2
PT_M3
PT_M4
PT_M5
PT_M6
PT_M7
PT_M8
KEYF01
KEYF02
KEYF03
KEYF04
KEYF05
KEYF06
KEYF07
KEYF08
DESCRIPTION
Completion of 1st axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 2nd axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 3rd axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 4th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 5th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 6th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 7th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 8th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 9th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 10th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 11th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 12th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 13th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 14th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 15th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Completion of 16th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
Currently indicated working setup number in automatic system
mode
Currently indicated working setup number in automatic system
mode
Currently indicated working setup number in automatic system
mode
Currently indicated working setup number in automatic system
mode
Currently indicated working setup number in automatic system
mode
Currently indicated working setup number in automatic system
mode
Currently indicated working setup number in automatic system
mode
Currently indicated working setup number in automatic system
mode
Currently indicated working setup number in manual system mode
Currently indicated working setup number in manual system mode
Currently indicated working setup number in manual system mode
Currently indicated working setup number in manual system mode
Currently indicated working setup number in manual system mode
Currently indicated working setup number in manual system mode
Currently indicated working setup number in manual system mode
Currently indicated working setup number in manual system mode
Validation of F1 key input
Validation of F2 key input
Validation of F3 key input
Validation of F4 key input
Validation of F5 key input
p
Validation of F6 keyy input
Validation of F7 key input
Validation of F8 key input
6-32
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
F151
BIT
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
0
KEYF09
Validation of F9 key input
1
KEYF10
Validation of F10 key input
2
KEYF11
Validation of F11 key input
3
KEYF12
Validation of F12 key input
7
PDATLD
Validation signal for data load
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RPRV
RXYCHG
RMIRY
RMIRX
RPHCAN
RPRHT
Origin reverse PB on
X and Y axes replacement PB on
Request PB on for mirror image of Y axis
Request PB on for mirror image of X axis
Request PB on for canceling preheating
Request PB on for extending preheating
4
5
6
F152
6-33
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS
X0~X4
X114
X300
~ X305
X306
~ X311
X400
~ X403
X404
~ X407
X408
~ X411
X413
~ X416
X417
~ X420
X421
~ X424
X425
~ X428
X429
~ X432
X100
~ X107
X108
~ X113
X200
~ X201
BIT
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
Machine → PLC input signal of the DIO3 board
No. 1 made by the user
Machine → PLC input signal of the DIO3 board
No. 2 made by the user
Machine → PLC input signal of the DIO3 board
No. 3 made by the user
Machine → PLC input signal of the RIO2 board
No. 1 made by the user
Machine → PLC input signal of the RIO2 board
No. 2 made by the user
Machine → PLC input signal of the RIO2 board
No. 3 made by the user
Machine → PLC input signal of the RIO2 board
No. 4 made by the user
Machine → PLC input signal of the RIO2 board
No 5 made by the user
No.
Machine → PLC input signal of the RIO2 board
No. 6 made by the user
Machine → PLC input signal of the RIO2 board
No. 7 made by the user
Machine → PLC input signal of the RIO2 board
No. 8 made by the user
Operation panel → PLC input signal of the RIO1 board
No. 1 made by the user
Operation panel → PLC input signal of the RIO1 board
No. 2 made by the user
6-34
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1
ADDRESS
Y0~Y4
Y412
Y300
~ Y305
Y306
~ Y311
Y400
~ Y403
Y404
~ Y407
Y408
~ Y411
Y413
~ Y416
Y417
~ Y420
Y421
~ Y424
Y425
~ Y428
Y429
~ Y432
Y100
~ Y107
Y108
~ Y112
Y200
~ Y202
BIT
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~77
0
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
Machine → PLC output signal of the DIO3 board
No. 1 made by the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the DIO3 board
No. 2 made by the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the DIO3 board
No. 3 made by the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the RIO2 board
No. 1 made by the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the RIO2 board
No. 2 made by the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the RIO2 board
No. 3 made by the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the RIO2 board
No. 4 made by the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the RIO2 board
N 5 made
No.
d bby th
the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the RIO2 board
No. 6 made by the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the RIO2 board
No. 7 made by the user
Machine → PLC output signal of the RIO2 board
No. 8 made by the user
Operator's panel → PLC output signal of the RIO1 board
No. 1 made by the user
Operator's panel → PLC output signal of the RIO1 board
No. 2 made by the user
6-35
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
ADDRESS BIT
R0
~
0~7
R519
A0
~
A24
0~7
K0
~
K15
0~7
C0
~
C79
D0
~
D511
Data
without
address
Data
without
address
0~7
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
Internal relay
(Read only data for R500~R519)
Each point = 0 : Request for eliminating message
1 : Request for displaying message
Each point (bit) becomes a flag to request for displaying
a corresponding message. One message can be up to
128 characters.
Keep relay
Ring counter
Count range: 0 ~ 32767
One counter occupies 4 bytes (2 bytes: preset value,
2 bytes: accumulated value).
Assign counter numbers (1~20)
for sequence programming.
Data table
0~7
0~7
0~7
Variable timer
1 sec. long timer (No.1 ~ 8)
(Range: 1 sec. ~ 32767 sec.)
10 msec. short timer (No.9 ~ 40)
(Range: 10 msec. ~ 32767 msec.)
Fixed timer (up to 100)
(Range: 10 msec. ~ 327.67 sec.)
6-36
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.2 PLC Signal List 2
2.2 PLC Signal List 2 (in the order of functions)
NO
Function
1 Preliminary
functions
2
3
Reset
Emergency
stop
Emergency
L/S
Interlock
NC → PLC Signal
SMPON (F07.2)
MA (F00.7)
SA (F00.6)
PLC → NC Signal
*RST (F00.2)
Description
Servo main power on
All control units set.
Servo setting finished.
Request for external reset
Emergency at the NC side
Request for emergency stop
Request for reset & rewind
Status of reset key
EMGLS (F07.0)
Status of EMG. L/S on
ERS(G00.7)
*ESPM (F02.2)
*ESP (G00.4)
RRW (G00.6)
*IT (G00.0)
*AIT (G01.0)
*CSL (G00.1)
*BSL (G01.1)
4
*IT1 (G64.4)
*IT2 (G74.4)
*IT3 (G84.4)
*SVF1 (G64.6)
SVF2 (G74.6)
*SVF2
*SVF3 (G84.6)
Servo off
*ENB1 (F64.7)
*ENB2 (F68.7)
*ENB (F72.7)
5
Over travel
(Hard)
6
Automatic
start
*-L1 (G64.1)
*+L1 (G64.0)
*-L2 (G74.1)
*+L2 (G74.0)
*-L3 (G84.1)
*+L3 (G84.0)
DST (F01.2)
ST (G05.0)
Feed/hold
*SP (G00.5)
DSP (F02.3)
7
Automatic
OP (F00.5)
operation
STL (F00.4)
condition
SPL (F00.3)
Alarm
AL (F00.1)
PSALM (F06.0)
SVALM (F06.1)
OHALM (F06.2)
OTALM (F06.3)
SYALM (F06
(F06.4)
4)
(Automatic/Manual) request for
interlocking all axes
(Automatic) request for
interlocking all axes
Cutting block start interlock
Block start interlock
Interlocking the 1st axis
Interlocking the 2nd axis
Interlocking the 3rd axis
Request for servo off of the 1st axis
Servo off of the 2nd axis
Servo off of the 3rd axis
Notification of the state of the 1st
axis servo off
Notification of the state of the 2nd
axis servo off
Notification of the state of the 3rd
axis servo off
1st axis-over travel
1st axis+over travel
2nd axis-over travel
2nd axis+over travel
3rd axis-over travel
3rd axis+over travel
Input of DKU automatic start key
Request for starting automatic
operation
Request for stopping automatic
operation
Input of DKU feed hold key
Indication under automatic
operation
Indication under starting
automatic operation
Indication under stopping
automatic operation
Under alarm generation
Under program alarm generation
Servo alarm
Over heat alarm
over travel alarm
System alarm
6-37
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
NO
Function
8 Auxiliary
functions
Spindle
functions
Tool
functions
Distribution
DEN (F01.0)
completed
IPEN (F01.1)
Description
M code output (4 bytes)
M flag strobe signal
S code output (4 bytes)
S flag strobe signal
T00~T31
(F24.0~F27.7)
TF (F08.2)
B00~B31
(F28.0~F31.7)
BF (F08.3)
Spindle
control
(for the first
spindle)
PLC → NC Signal
S00~S31
(F20.0~F23.7)
SF (F08.1)
Secondary
auxiliary
functions
Completion
signal
Decode M
i l
signal
9
NC → PLC Signal
M00~M31
(F16.0~F19.7)
MF (F08.0)
T code output (4 bytes)
T flag strobe signal
B code output (4 bytes)
B flag strobe signal
Distribution completed and
inposition
Distribution completed
FIN (G05.1)
DM00 (F09.4)
DM01 (F09
5)
(F09.5)
DM02 (F09.6)
DM30 (F09.7)
RO00~RO15
(F10.0~F11.7)
M, S, T, and B codes completion
signal
M00 execution
i
M01 execution
M02 execution
M30 execution
Instructed number of spindle
revolutions (2 bytes)
AR00~AR15
(F12.0~F13.7)
revolutions
MR00~MR15
(F14.0~15.7)
(2 bytes from position coder)
Number of clamp revolutions
(2 bytes)
MSOC (F06.6)
SOR0~7 (F40)
Spindle override cancel
Spindle override 50%~150%
SARM1 (F44.7)
SST1 (F44.6)
*SPAL1 (F44.5)
ORAR1 (F44.4)
SCMP (G06.0)
SOVR0~7 (G18)
RIGN1 (G25.7)
RI100~RI111
(G24.0~G25.3)
Access signal to spindle speed
0 speed signal
Spindle trouble
Orientation completed
Spindle clamped
Spindle override input
0 instruction voltage +
Instruction voltage
Instruction (12 bits)
ALMR1 (G42.5)
RDY1 (G42.4)
ORCM1 (G43.7)
CRSFR1 (G43.6)
CRSRV1 (G43
(G43.5)
5)
*ESP1 (G43.4)
Alarm reset
Ready for spindle
Orientation instruction
Forward rotation of spindle
Reverse rotation of spindle
Emergency stop of spindle
Actual number of spindle
6-38
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.2 PLC Signal List 2
NO
Function
9 Rigid tapping
NC → PLC Signal
RTAP(F07.3)
PLC → NC Signal
RGTMD1 (G42.2)
HSP1 (G43.1)
Decision
function for
spindle
position
SPSTP(G26.0)
SUCLP(F47.1)
*SEUCL(G26.2)
SCLP(F47.2)
*SECLP(G26.3)
10
Soft operator
Panel input
signal
PB8~15 (F42)
PB0~7 (F43)
PB16~23 (F45)
Program
screen Key
RMLK(F46.7)
ROVC(F46.6)
RABS(F46.5)
RM01(F46.4)
01( 46 4)
RSBK(F46.3)
RBDT1(F46.2)
RDRN(F46.1)
RAFL(46.0)
RCLMA(F47.0)
RCLCA(F47.7)
RCHIP(47.5)
Description
Notification of instruction for
rigid tapping mode
Signal for rigid mode selection
ready
High speed tapping mode
Validation signal for spindle
stop
Signal requesting for
unclampping spindle
Completion signal for
unclampping spindle
Signal requesting for clampping
spindle
Completion signal for clampping
spindle
Switch input signal for operator's
panel
Machine lock S/W input signal
Override cancel S/W
Manual absolute S/W
M01
01 S/W
S/
Single block S/W
Optional block skip S/W
Dry run S/W
Aux. function lock S/W
Coolant manual S/W
Coolant cancel S/W
Chip conveyor S/W
Soft operator
Panel S/W
state
RPB8~15 (G40)
RPB0~7 (G41)
RPB16~23 (G44)
Request for displaying the
status of operator's panel S/W
Memory
protection
KEY1(G05.4)
KEY2(G05.5)
KEY3(G05.6)
KEY4(G05.7)
Request for memory protection
Request for memory protection
Request for memory protection
Request for memory protection
Memory protection status
MKEY(F06.7)
6-39
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
NO
Function
11 Automatic
operation
test
NC → PLC Signal
PLC → NC Signal
AFL(G04.0)
MAFL(F04.0)
DRN(G04.1)
MDRN(F04.1)
BDTI(G04.2)
MBDT1(F04.2)
SBK(G04.3)
MSBK(F04.3)
OVC(G04.4)
M01(G06.1)
MM01(F04.4)
ABS(G04.5)
MABS(F04.5)
MLK(G04.7)
MLK1 (G65.3)
MLK2 (G75.3)
MLK3 (G85.3)
MMLK(F04.7)
EDTCHK(F07.1)
12
13
14
Description
Request for auxiliary function
lock
State of auxiliary function lock
Request for dry run
State of dry run
Request for optional block skip
State of optional block skip
Request for single block
State of single block
Request for override cancel
Request for M01 selection
State of M01 selection
Request for manual absolute
State of manual absolute
Request for machine lock
Machine lock for the 1st axis
Machine lock for the 2nd axis
Machine lock for the 3rd axis
State of machine lock
( 01 6)
THRD(F01.6)
RPD(F01.5)
TAP(F01.4)
INCH(F01.3)
CUT(F02.1)
MV1(F64.2)
MV2(F68.2)
MV3(F72.2)
Signal under checking operation
in edit mode
Under control of constant driving
speed
Screw tapping
Rapid feeding
Tapping
In inch input mode
Under cutting feed
Moving the 1st axis
Moving the 2nd axis
Moving the 3rd axis
Axis travel
direction
MD1(F64.3)
MD2(F68.3)
MD3(F72.3)
1st axis – direction being moved
2nd axis – direction being moved
3rd axis – direction being moved
Inposition
INP1(F64.6)
INP2(F68.6)
INP3(F72.6)
1st axis is in inposition.
2nd axis is in inposition.
3rd axis is in inposition.
Request for selecting ref. point return
Ref. point return being selected
Request for selecting MPG feed
MPG feed being selected
Request for selecting jog feed
Jog feed being selected
Request for selecting MDI
operation
MDI operation being selected
Request for selecting tape
operation
Tape operation being selected
Request for selecting memory
operation
Memory operation being selected
Request for selecting edit mode
Edit mode being selected
Program
status
Axis travel
status
Mode
selection
CSS(F01.7)
ZRN(G03.0)
MZRN(F03.0)
H(G03.1)
MH(F03.1)
J(G03.2)
MJ(F03.2)
D(G03.3)
MD(F03.3)
T(G03.4)
MT(F03.4)
MEM(G03.5)
MMEM(F03.5)
EDT(G03.6)
(G . )
MEDT(F03.6)
6-40
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.2 PLC Signal List 2
NO
Function
15 Reference
point
return
Direction of
moving axis
NC → PLC Signal
MZRN(F03.0)
+J1(G65.0)
-J1(G65.1)
+J2(G75.0)
-J2(G75.1)
+J3(G85.0)
-J3(G85.1)
Speed
selection
Return
completed
PLC → NC Signal
ZRN(G03.0)
ROV2(G06.6)
ROV1(G06.5)
ZP1(F64.0)
ZP2(F68.0)
0
RT1
1
1
0
ZP3(F72.0)
ZP23(F72.1)
ZP33(F72.4)
ZP43(F72.5)
Completing ref. point return of the 3rd
axis
Completion of the 2nd ref. point return
Completion of the 3rd ref. point return
Completion of the 4th ref. point return
*DEC1(X00.0)
*DEC2(X00.2)
*DEC3(X00.4)
*DEC4(X00.6)
*DEC5(X01.0)
*DEC6(X01.2)
Deceleration signal of the 1st axis
Deceleration signal of the 2nd axis
Deceleration signal of the 3rd axis
Deceleration signal of the 4th axis
Deceleration signal of the 5th axis
Deceleration signal of the 6th axis
Signal for
ADEC1(G65.4)
automatic
ref. point
return
ADEC2(G75.4)
ADEC3(G85.4)
MPG feed
RT2
Completing ref. point return of the 1st
axis
Completion of the 2nd ref. point return
Completion of the 3rd ref. point return
Completion
l i off the
h 4th
h ref.
f point
i return
ZP22(F68.1)
ZP32(F68.4)
ZP42(F68.5)
42( 68 )
16
0
RT0
0
Completing ref. point return of the 1st
axis
Completion of the 2nd ref. point return
Completion of the 3rd ref. point return
Completion of the 4th ref. point return
ZP21(F64.1)
ZP31(F64.4)
ZP41(F64.5)
Deceleration
DOG input
Description
Request for selecting ref. point return
mode
Ref. point return mode
+ direction origin of the 1st axis
- direction
+ direction origin of the 2nd axis
- direction
+ direction origin of the 3rd axis
- direction
H(G03.1)
MH(F03.1)
Signal for automatic ref. point return
of the 1st axis
Signal for automatic ref. point return
of the 2nd axis
Signal for automatic ref. point return
of the 3rd axis
Request for selecting MPG feed
MPG feed being selected
Feed axis
HS1A~D(G11.0~3)
HS1A~D(G11.4~7)
HS3A~D(G10.0~3)
Selection of MPG1 feed axis
Selection of MPG2 feed axis
Selection of MPG3 feed axis
Amount of
movement
MP2(GO6.3)
MP1(G06 2)
MP1(G06.2)
0
0
LIIx1
LIIx10
0
1
(LII= Least input increment)
6-41
1
0
LIIx100
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
Function
NO
17 Manual
continuous
feed
Feed axis
NC → PLC Signal
PLC → NC Signal
J(G03.2)
Description
Request for selecting jog feed
Jog feed being selected
+J1(G65.0)
-J2(G75.1)
Request for feeding the 1st axis
to the + direction
- direction
Request for feeding the 2nd axis
to the + direction
- direction
*JV0~7 (G15)
Jog speed selection
RT(G06.7)
ROV2(G06.6)
ROV1(G06.5)
*FV0~7(G12)
Request for selecting rapid feed
0
0
RT0
RT1
0
1
Feed override %
Request for cancelling feed override
Override 100%
Validation of cancelling feed
override
Request for skip 1
Request for skip 2
Request for skip 3
Request for skip 4
Signal requesting for starting
external read
Signal requesting for starting
external punch
Signal requesting for stopping
external read/punch
Singal during external read/punch
MJ(F03.2)
-J1(G65.1)
+J2(G75.0)
18
Speed
selection
Selection of
rapid feed
Feed rate
Feed override
MFOC(F06.5)
OVC(G04.4)
ROVC(F46.6)
19
Skip function
20
External
input/
output
SKIP1(G00.3)
SKIP2(G01.5)
SKIP3(G01.6)
SKIP4(G01.7)
EXRD(G32.1)
EXPUN(G32.0)
EXSTP(G32.2)
RPBSY(F07.4)
External work
number
Search
External data
input
WN1~128 (G19)
Search for external work number
EIA0~7 (G33)
Address signal for external data
input
Data signal for external data input
EID0~47
(G34~G39)
EISTB(G32.7)
EIREND(F32.5)
ESEND(F07.5)
External data
output
EOA0~7 (F33)
EOD0~47
(F34~F39)
ERDRQ(G32.6)
EOSTB(F32.7)
EOREND(G32.5)
21
Custom macro
I/F for input
signal
UI000~031
(G48~G51)
UI100~131
(G52~G55)
UI200~231
(G56~G59)
UI300~331
(G60~G63)
6-42
1
RT2
0
Strobe signal for external data input
Read completion signal for external
data input
Completion signal for external
search
Address signal for external data
output
Data signal for external data output
Signal requesting for external data
output
Strobe signal for external data
output
Read completion signal for external
data output
Input signal for custom macro
#1032
Input signal for custom macro
#1033
Input signal for custom macro
#1034
Input signal for custom macro
#1035
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.2 PLC Signal List 2
NO
Function
21 I/F for output
signal
22
NC → PLC Signal
UO000~031
(F48~F51)
UO100~131
(F52~F55)
UO200~231
(F56~F59)
UO300~331
(F60~F63)
PLC control
axis
(in the case
of the 1st
axis)
PLC → NC Signal
EOR00~07 (G66)
ECO 0~2
(G67.0~G67.2)
EIF000~015
(G68~G69)
ED000~031
(G70~G73)
EBUF1(G67.7)
EBSY1(F66.7)
ECLR1(G67.6)
ESTP1(G67.5)
ESBK1(G67.4)
EMSBK1(G67.3)
EIAL1(F66.2)
EOTP1(F66.5)
EOTN1(F66.6)
PCAX1(G65.5)
*SVF1(G64.6)
23
Tool lifecycle
management
INP1(F64.6)
MV1(F64.2)
TLCHA(F07.6)
TLCHB(F07.7)
TLRST(G10.7)
TLSKP(G09.7)
TL1~64(G9.0~9.6)
Measuring
value of offset
amount
Input signal
+MIT1(G65.6)
-MIT1(G65.7)
+MIT2(G75.6)
-MIT2(G75.7)
Signal for
measuring
tool
length
TLMI(G08.2)
TLMO(F02.4)
MRET(G08.3)
Tool
measurement
AE1~3
(G01.2~G01.4)
6-43
Description
Input signal for custom macro
#1132
Input signal for custom macro
#1133
Input signal for custom macro
#1134
Input signal for custom macro
#1135
Cutting rate override
Instruction for axis control
Cutting feed rate/spindle
speed
Axis movement amount/dwell
time/spindle direction
Delivery signal of axis control
instruction
Import signal of axis control
instruction
PLC control axis reset
Break signal of PLC control axis
Stop signal of PLC control block
Prohibition signal of block stop
PLC control axis alarm
+ direction signal of overtravel
- direction signal of overtravel
PLC axis control signal
Servo off signal
Inposition signal
Signal under axis movement
Signal requesting for replacing
tools
Completion signal for replacing
tools
Reset signal for replacing tools
Tool skip signal
Tool group signal
X-axis + contact surface of
measuring value of offset amount
X-axis - contact surface of
measuring value of offset amount
Z-axis + contact surface of
measuring value of offset amount
Z-axis - contact surface of
measuring value of offset amount
Signal for selecting a mode to
measure tool length
Status signal of the mode to
measure tool length
Input signal of measuring value
Access signal to measuring position
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
NO
Function
24 Chamfering
signal
NC → PLC Signal
Mirror image
signal
Description
PLC → NC Signal
*CHF (G08.0)
Requesting for chamfering override
MI1 (G65.2)
Request for the mirror image of the
1st axis
Request for the mirror image of the
2nd axis
Request for the mirror image of the
3rd axis
State of the mirror image of the
2nd axis
State of the mirror image of the
2st axis
State of the mirror image of the
3rd axis
Selection signal of synchronous
control
MI2 (G75.2)
MI3 (G85.2)
MMI1 (F65.0)
MMI2 (F69.0)
MMI3 (F73.0)
25
26
Selecting
synchronous
control
Signal under
moving
rotation axis
Handle step
feed
SYNC1~16
(G17,G16)
ROTMV (F02.5)
Ref.
f Point
i
return by PLS
State signal under moving rotation
axis
HSF00~HSF30
(G224.0~G227.6)
HSFON (G227.7)
Travel distance of handle feed step
(pulse)
Handle feed step in effect
ZRN11 ((G228.0))
Ref.
f point
i return to the
h 1st origin
i i off the
h
1st axis
Ref. point return to the 2nd origin of the
1st axis
Ref. point return to the 3rd origin of the
1st axis
Ref. point return to the 4th origin of the
1st axis
Ref. point return to the 1st origin of the
2nd axis
Ref. point return to the 2nd origin of the
2nd axis
Ref. point return to the 3rd origin of the
2nd axis
Ref. point return to the 4th origin of the
2nd axis
ZRN12 (G228.1)
ZRN13 (G228.2)
ZRN14 (G228.3)
ZRN21 (G228.4)
ZRN22 (G228.5)
ZRN23 (G228.6)
ZRN24 (G228.7)
27
ZRN31 (G229.0)
ZRN32 (G229.1)
ZRN33 (G229.2)
ZRN34 (G229.3)
PATCR (G236.0)
PATUP (G236.1)
PATDWN (236.2)
ASET (G236.3)
Work setting
control
MSET (G236.4)
PT*1~PT*64
(G237.0~G237.6)
PT_A1~PT_AT8
(F148)
PT_M1~PT_M7
_
_
(F149)
PDATLD (F151.7)
Ref. point return to the 1st origin of the 3rd axis
Ref. point return to the 2nd origin of the 3rd axis
Ref. point return to the 3rd origin of the 3rd axis
Ref. point return to the 4th origin of the 3rd axis
‘Enter’ key input
Cursor Up input
Cursor Down input
Setting the screen number indicating
automatic operation
Setting the screen number indicating
non-automatic operation
Setup data of indicating screen number
Screen number indicating automatic
operation
Screen number indicating
g non-automatic
operation
Validation signal for data load
6-44
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.2 PLC Signal List 2
NO
Function
28 Analog input
29
NC → PLC Signal
ANLG10
~ANLG1B
(F130.0~F131.3)
ANLG20
~ANLG2B
(F132.0~F133.3)
ANLG30
~ANLG3B
(F134.0~F135.3)
Movement of
the axis
designating
PLC position
PLC → NC Signal
Analog input data for RAD1 board
(Channel 2)
Analog input data for RAD1 board
(Channel 3)
JGPS01 (G238.0)
ED000~ED031
(G70.0~G73.7)
JGPS02 (G238.1)
ED100~ED131
(G80.0~G83.7)
JGPS03 (G238.2)
ED200~ED231
(G90.0~G93.7)
JGFN01 (F146.0)
JGFN02
G 02 (F146.1)
( 146 1)
JGFN03 (F146.2)
30
31
32
Macro
interrupt
Handle
interrupt
UINT (G0.2)
HINT1 (G64.5)
HINT2 (G74.5)
HINT3 (G84.5)
TRMOD (G47.0)
NOMCL2 (G47.1)
NOMCL3 (G47.2)
Tracing
function
PRECH (F32.0)
FAR (F32.1)
COLLIS (F32.2)
33
Text
calculation
function
Description
Analog input data for RAD1 board
(Channel 1)
CAL101~CAL116
(G240.0~G241.7)
CAL201~CAL216
(G242.0~G243.7)
CAL301~CAL316
(G244.0~G245.7)
CAL401~CAL416
(G246.0~G247.7)
CAL501~CAL516
(G248.0~G249.7)
CAL601~CAL616
(G250.0~G251.7)
CAL701~CAL716
(G252.0~G253.7)
CAL801~CAL816
(G254.0~G255.7)
6-45
1st axis - Movement of the axis
designating the position
Data to designate the 1st axis position
2nd axis - Movement of the axis
designating the position
Data to designate the 2nd axis position
3rd axis - Movement of the axis
designating the position
Data to designate the 3rd axis position
1st axis - Movement of the axis
designating the position completed
2nd
2 d axis
i - Movement off the
h axis
i
designating the position completed
3rd axis - Movement of the axis
designating the position completed
Starting macro interrupt
Permission of the 1st handle interrupt
Permission of the 2nd handle interrupt
Permission of the 3rd handle interrupt
Starting tracing function
Setting nominal clearance
Setting nominal clearance
Nominal clearance state
Far state
Collision state
Executing calculation of text program 1
(O9700)
Executing calculation of text program 2
(O9701)
Executing calculation of text program 3
(O9702)
Executing calculation of text program 4
(O9703)
Executing calculation of text program 5
(O9704)
Executing calculation of text program 6
(O9705)
Executing calculation of text program 7
(O9706)
Executing calculation of text program 8
(O9707)
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
NO
Function
34 F key
condition
35
Gas cutting
operation
key condition
NC → PLC Signal
KEYF1 (F150.0)
KEYF2 (F150.1)
KEYF3 (F150.2)
KEYF4 (F150.3)
KEYF5 (F150.4)
KEYF6 (F150.6)
KEYF7 (F150.7)
KEYF8 (F151.0)
KEYF9 (F151.1)
KEYF10 (F151.2)
KEYF11 (F151.3)
KEYF12 (F151.4)
RPRV (F152.1)
PLC → NC Signal
Description
F1 key on
F2 key on
F3 key on
F4 key on
F5 key on
F6 key on
F7 key on
F8 key on
Screen key on
Select key on
Automatic Start key on
Automatic Stop key on
Origin Reverse key on
RXYCHG (F152.2)
X and Y Axes Replace key on
RMIRY (F152.3)
Y Axis Mirror Image key on
RMIRX (F152.4)
X Axis Mirror Image key on
RPHCAN (F152.5)
Preheating Cancel key on
RPRHT (F152.6)
Preheating Extend key on
6-46
3. PLC Monitoring Function
3.1 Overview
3. PLC Monitoring Function (PLC Timing Chart Function)
3.1 Overview
PLC monitoring function is used to check the state of mechanical I/O signals.
Ladder diagram shows a specific condition to bring a machine or an NC unit to a
certain state (alarm generation, feed hold, coolant delivery, magazine rotation, tool
clamping, etc.); however, it is usually impossible to know the mechanical I/O
signal at the moment that a condition is given. With this function, it is possible to
know it.
3.2 How to Start Monitoring Function
Select the ‘Diagnosis’ screen and ‘PLC’ in general diagnosis, and press the F8
(finger) key to show the ‘MONITOR’ menu. Press the menu to start the monitoring
function (Fig. 1).
MDI
Mode
DIAG
DISP POS
DATA NUM
Start
TRIGGER
Sampling
Start
SETT
ING
DISP
SLCT
Cursor
Selection
Fig. 1 Time chart screen
Sampling Start
---- When the trigger condition is set, sampling starts.
DISP SLCT ---- Displays the trigger position in such a way to make the
position being 0/29/59 of the scale.
Changes the display position.
SETTING ---- The menus to perform various setups of the timing chart
appear in the case of the operation modes other than
“Ref. Point Return” and “Manual Operation.”
DISP SLCT ---- Selects reference cursor.
Selects three options of “None Selected,” “Ref 1,” and
“Ref 2.”
§/¨
☞
----
Moves to selected cursor position.
----
Displays other diagnosis menus.
6-47
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
3.3 How to Operate
3.3.1 Condition Setup
MDI
Mode
DIAG
Parameter Setting
Display Position
DATA NUM
Start
TRIGGER
Number of data
Input Range
DATA
NUM
TRIGGER
Fig. 2
SETTING
CANCEL
Condition Setup (Input the number of data)
First, setup any data necessary for the monitoring function such as address
confirming the operation, trigger, etc. Pressing the ‘Condition Setup’ in Fig. 1 will
display the menu for data setup (Fig. 2).
1) Press the ‘DATA NUM’ and input the number of addresses to be checked (1 ~ 8).
When inputting ‘1’ ~ ‘8’ and pressing the Enter key, ch name cursors as many as
specified are generated (Fig. 3).
MDI
Mode
DIAG
Parameter Setting
Display Position
Number of data
Start
TRIG condition
Number of data
DATA
NUM
SETT
ING
TRIGGER
CANCEL
Fig. 3 Screen after entering the number of data
6-48
3. PLC Monitoring Function
3.3 How to Operate
2) Press the ‘Time/Dev’ menu and enter the unit time (0 ~ 4) .
0 : 10 msec 1 : 50 msec 2 : 100 msec 3 : 500 msec 4 : 1000 msec
Press the Enter key to change the time indication of Time/Dev.
MDI
Mode
DIAG
Parameter Setting
Display Position
Number of data
Start
TRIG condition
Number of data
DATA
NUM
SETT
ING
TRIGGER
CANCEL
Fig. 4 Time/Dev setup
3) Move the cursor using F4 (up) and F5 (down) keys to setup the addresses to be
checked, and enter all of them (Fig. 5).
MDI
Mode
Diagnosis
Parameter Setting
Display Position
Number of data
Start
TRIG condition
Number of data
Number
of data
Setting
Setting
Completed Cancelled
Trigger
Condition
Fig. 5 Address input
6-49
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
4) Press the ‘TRIGGER’ menu and setup the trigger conditions.
Set the trigger conditions using the ch numbers out of ‘0’ ~ ‘7’, ‘D’ (Down Edge),
‘U’ (Up Edge), ‘L’ (LOW Level), ‘H’ (High Level), ‘*’ (AND condition), and ‘+’ (OR
condition).
e.g.) 0U: Triggers when the ch0 signal is on
0U+1H: Triggers when the ch0 signal is on or the ch1 is on
0U*1L: Triggers when the ch1 is off and the ch0 signal is on
MDI
Mode
Diagnosis
Parameter Setting
Display Position
DATA NUM
Start
TRIGGER
DATA
NUM
SETT
ING
TRIGGER
CANCEL
Fig. 6 Input the trigger conditions
5) Memorize the setup data with the ‘SETTING’ (F6) and cancel the data operated
using ‘Setup Cancelled’ (F7). Then, when pressing the ‘Finger’ to the previous data,
the menu ‘INITIAL PARAMETER’ appears (Fig. 7). Clear the setup data. The setup
data memorized with the ‘Setup Completed’ (F6) will remain and be continuously
used even when turning the power of the SENTROL2 off.
INITIAL
PARAMETER
Fig. 7 ‘INITIAL PARAMETER’ menu
6-50
3. PLC Monitoring Function
3.3 How to Operate
3.3.2 Sampling
Pressing the ‘SETTING’ menu will display all of the conditions as shown in Fig. 8.
Pressing the ‘Sampling Start’ menu will start the sampling operation and change
the menu to that as shown in Fig. 9 while ‘TRIG’ lights up. It goes on until the
trigger is realized.
When the trigger is realized, the signal as shown in Fig. 10 will be displayed on
the screen.
Press the ‘Stop’ menu to stop sampling.
MDI
Mode
DIAG
Display Position
DATA NUM
Start
TRIGGER
Sampling
Start
SETT
ING
DISP
SLCT
SELECT
Fig. 8 Sampling start
MDI
Mode
Diagnosis
Display Position
DATA NUM
TRIGGER
Stop
Fig. 9 Sampling being executed
6-51
Start
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
MDI
DIAG
Display Position
DATA NUM
Start
TRIGGER
Sampling
Start
SETT
ING
DISP
SLCT
CURSOR
SELECT
Fig. 10 Start to display the change state of addresses
3.3.3 Display Selection
Pressing the ‘Display Selection’ menu will change the display positions in the
order of the start (Fig. 10), the middle (Fig. 11), and the end (Fig. 12).
MDI
Mode
DIAG
Display Position
DATA NUM
Start
TRIGGER
Sampling
Start
SETT
ING
DISP
SLCT
CURSOR
SELECT
Fig. 11 Display of address change state (middle)
6-52
3. PLC Monitoring Function
3.3 How to Operate
MDI
DIAG
Display Position
DATA NUM
Start
TRIGGER
Sampling
Start
SETT
ING
DISP
SLCT
CURSOR
SELECT
Fig. 12 Display of address change state (end)
3.3.4 Time Measurement
With the ‘Cursor Select’ menu, it is possible to select the two horizontal straight
lines indicating the time and move the lines using the F6 (left) and F7 (right) keys.
The time interval of the two lines is displayed on Ref.Time.
MDI
DIAG
Display Position
DATA NUM
TRIGGER
Sampling
Start
SETT
ING
DISP
SLCT
CURSOR
SELECT
Fig. 13 Time measurement
6-53
Start
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
4. General Diagnosis
0000
DEC
7
6
5
DEC
TCS
RPI
4
FED
3
RAC
0 : Turn on the limit switch for ref. point return.
1 : Turn off the limit switch for ref. point return.
TCS
0 : Touch sensor off
1 : Touch sensor on
RPI
1 : Zero position being stopped
FED
0 : Feed direction +
1 : Feed direction -
0001
RAC
1 : Being in ref. point return
REA
1 : Feed active
RPF
1 : Ref. point return completed
INP
1 : Inposition state
MACHINE POSITION
Position of machine coordinates
Unit: Output unit
0002
POSITION ERROR [pulse]
Position variation
Unit: Input unit
0003
COMPENSATION [machine]
Amount of compensation
Unit: Input unit
6-54
2
FEA
1
RPF
0
INP
4.General Diagnosis
0004
ENCODER COUNTER [pulse]
Value of the feedback counter for encoder
Unit: Detection unit
0005
ENCODER CTR SKIP [pulse]
Value of encoder feedback counter latched to skip signal or ENZ
Unit: Detection unit
7
6
5
4
0006
ENT :
Encoder touch sensor 1 : ON
ENZ :
Encoder zero signal 1 : ON
ENB :
Encoder B phase signal
ENA :
Encoder A phase signal
7
6
5
4
0007
2
1
0
ENT
ENZ
ENB
ENA
3
2
1
0
EBL
EBL
1 : Enable on
0 : Enable off
PRD
1 : Power ready on
0 : Power ready off
0008
3
DA CONVERTER O.P.
DA converter output value
6-55
PRD
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
0009
ACTUAL SPEED
Unit: (10mm/min)
0010
DRIFT
Amount of drift compensation
Unit: velo (1velo = 0.31mv)
0011
POSITION LOOP GAIN
Unit: [1/100s]
0012
PULSE COUNTER MISS
Amount of pulse count miss (sign part)
Unit: (PULSE)
0013
ENC 1REV PULSE
Number of pulses generated per one revolution of the encoder (A phase or B phase)
Unit: (PULSE)
0014
SKIP MACHINE POSITION
Machine coordinates when the skip signal is on (unit of internal distribution)
0015
SPINDLE POSITION CODER [pulse]
Value of feedback counter for spindle position coder
Unit: Detection unit
0016
SPINDLE POSITION LOOP GAIN
Unit: [1/100s]
6-56
4.General Diagnosis
0017
SPINDLE POSITION ERROR [pulse]
Position variation of spindle
Unit: Input unit
7
0018
6
5
4
SKP
MPB
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
12D
24D
MPA
SKP :
0 : Skip signal in
MPB :
Phase signal of manual pulse generator B
MPA :
Phase signal of manual pulse generator A
7
0019
THS :
6
5
THS
BAT
EMG
ELS
0 : When the internal temperature sensor of the main unit indicates
70℃
or
higher
BAT :
0 : When the battery voltage of the backup memory is 2.6V or lower
12D :
0 : When ±12V within the main unit is less than ±10V due to
short circuit,
etc.
4D :
0 : When ±24V within the main unit is less than 20V due to short
EMG :
0 : While pressing down the emergency stop switch
ELS :
0 : When the emergency limit switch is on
7
6
5
4
3
0020
2
PCZ
PCZ :
1 : Spindle position coder zero signal is on.
PCB :
1 : Phase signal of the spindle position coder B is on.
PCA :
1 : Phase signal of the spindle position coder A is on.
6-57
1
PCB
circuit, etc.
0
PCA
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
0021
SYNC POSERR DIFF
각축 SLAVE 축의 MASTER 축과의 위치편차 차이 표시. (2BYTE DATA)
단위 : 검출단위(PULSE)
0022
SYNC POS CORRECTION
동기운전제어에서 동기 맞추기를 위한 보정 전압.
SLAVE 축의 DATA 만 표시된다.
(2BYTE DATA)
단위 : 0.305mV
0023
SYNC TORQUE DIFF
각축 SLAVE 축의 MASTER 축과의 TORQUEMONITOR 차이표시.(2BYTE DATA)
단위 : 4.88mV
0024
SYNC SHIFT VALUE
동기운전제어에서 동기 맞추기를 위한 SHIFT 값.
SLAVE 축의 DATA 만 표시된다.
(2BYTE DATA)
단위 : 검출단위(PULSE)
0025
SYNC GRID SHIFT DIFF
동기축간의 GRID SHIFT 차이를 표시한다.
PARAMETER 1817 UR6 = 1 일 경우 유효. .
단위 : 검출단위(PULSE)
6-58
(4BYTE DATA)
1. Parameter Setting
1.1 Parameter Setting Method
Chapter 7 Parameter
1. Parameter Setting
1.1 Parameter setting method
Turn “KEY” on the “OPRT PANL” screen to set the parameters.
The “PARA METR” screen consists of “SETTING” screen (Fig. 7-1) and “SERV
PARA” screen (Fig. 7-2).
MDI
PARA
SET-
RELA
METR
TING
TIVE
O1111
N00000
PAGE 1/23
No.0000
TV CHECK
MDI
PARA
SERV
RELA
-
METR
PARA
TVE
0000
0 0
TVC (CONTROL OUT)
0 (0 : OFF
1 : ON)
0 (0 : OFF
1 : ON)
.....
RT2
O1111
N00000
EIA NCR
0 0
1
ISP CTV
0
0
TVC
0
.....
S.BLK
NO.
Figure 7-1 (Screen Example)
RT2
)
S.BLK
NO.
Figure 7-2 (Screen Example)
)
1) Operational parameter setting method
Turn on the key on the “OPRT PANL” and select “PARAMETR” screen in modes
other than zero return and manual operation. If the “SETTING” screen does not
appear, press the “KEY” and then “SETTING” key.
F-key functions are as below. Move the cursor onto the parameter to set and enter
the set value. The operational parameter is set.
No.
Sets the parameter No.
Moves the cursor up/down.
Moves screen by screen.
)
Displays the NEXT menu.
7-1
Chapter 7 Parameter
2) Service parameter setting method
Turn on the “KEY” on the “OPRT PANL” screen and select the “PARA METR” screen
in MDI mode. If the “SERV PARA” screen does not appear, press the “☞” key and
then “SERV PARA” key. Using F-key shown below, move the cursor onto the
parameter to set and then enter the set value using the number key.
Press “NO.” key and enter the parameter number to search the parameter number
(Temporary input)
If the wrong number is entered, press
Back Space key and enter the number
again. To cancel all the numbers that have been temporarily entered, press the
“CANCEL” key. Press
No.
Key to set the entered number.
Sets the parameter No.
Moves the cursor up/down/left/right.
Moves screen by screen.
)
Displays the NEXT menu.
Note 1) Each setting parameter has the range available to set the value.
Note 2) “NEXT MENU” mentioned above is as shown below. With this menu,
various setting screens can be selected.
SETTING
MAC
RO
SERV
PARA
PTCH
ERR
IN
PUT
OUT
PUT
)
Note 3) Parameters of SENTROL are commonly displayed on the screen for all
models regardless of models for lathe or milling. Therefore, In the following
“2. Parameter List of SENTROL2” section, each parameter is classified as
follows:
1. (L) : Parameter available only for SENTROL2-L (for lathe)
2. (M) : Parameter available only for SENTROL2-M (for milling)
3. No Symbol : Parameter available for entire SENTROL2 models
4. (For Laser Cutter) : Parameter available only for laser cutter
5. (For Laser Scriber) : Parameter available only for laser scriber
For both laser cutter and laser scriber, parameters of SENTROL-M are
used together with such parameters described in 4 and 5.
6. (For Angular grinder) : Parameter available only for angular grinder
These parameters are used together with the parameters of SENTROL2-L.
7-2
1. Parameter setting
1.1 Parameter Setting Method
3) Pitch error compensation parameter setting method
Turn on the “KEY” on the “OPRT PANL” and then select the “PARA METR” screen
in MDI mode.
If the “PITCH ERR” screen does not appear, press the “☞” key and then “PITCH
ERR”.
Using the F-key shown below and move the cursor onto the parameter to set and
enter the setting value with the numeric key.
Press the “NO.” key and enter the parameter number. This enables to search the
parameter number.
(Temporary input)
If the wrong number is entered, press
Back Space key and enter the
number again.
To cancel all the numbers that have been temporarily entered, press the “CANCEL”
key. Press
Key to create the entered number.
Setting Range : -127 ~ 127
No.
Sets the parameter No.
Moves the cursor up/down/left/right.
Moves screen by screen.
)
Displays the NEXT menu.
a) Overview of stored pitch error compensation function
With this function, the pitch error can be compensated for each axis by
minimum distance unit. (Note that it is valid only after zero return is
performed.) After the zero return, set the tool position as compensation basis.
And set the compensation value as parameter in offset interval set for each
axis.
(1) Compensatible axis: all axes (rotational axis is also compensatible.)
(2) Compensation point: maximum total of 640 points for all axes
Maximum 256 points per axis.
(3) Compensation range
Per compensation point : -127 ~ 127
Compensation unit is determined according to diameter or radius setting.
b) Parameter setting
Pitch error parameters are set by the following parameter number.
(1) Pitch error compensation point No. for origin point (each axis) ---------parameter No. 5420
(2) Pitch error compensation point No. for the most (-) side (each axis) ---parameter No. 5421
(3) Pitch error compensation point No. for the most (+) side (each axis) ---parameter No. 5422
(4) Pitch error compensation point interval (each axis) ------------------parameter No. 1813
Pitch error compensation point has the limit for the minimum value, and
is determined by the following formula.
Minimum interval value = Maximum speed / 12000 (unit: mm, deg)
7-3
Chapter 7 Parameter
Ex.) For the maximum speed of 1200mm/min, the minimum value is
1mm.
(5) Pitch error compensation amount is - set by corresponding to each pitch
error compensation point number (parameter No. 3000 ~ 3639).
c) Example of parameter setting
(1) Linear axis
Pitch error (absolute value)
+
-
Origin point
+ direction
0
+2
0
-1
0
+1
+2
3099 3098 3097 3096 3095 3094
-1
3093
-2
3092
- direction
-2
-1
+2
Amount for
3091 3090 3089 3088
each axis
Compensation interval: 10000,
Compensation point: In case of 100, parameter is set as follows:
Pitch error compensation point for origin point NO.5420 = 95
Pitch error compensation point for (-) direction NO.5421 = 0
Pitch error compensation point for (+) direction NO.5422 = 99
Pitch error compensation interval NO.1813 = 10000
For the compensation value, pitch error compensation value (incremental
value) between intervals is set.
Note ) parameter number should be set to increase in (+) direction.
Parameter No.
(2) Rotational axis (parameter 1814REV = 1)
Compensation interval and point should be satisfied with the following
conditions.
360000 = compensation interval ×compensation point
Total of compensation amount per 1 rotation should be set to be 0.
Pitch error (absolute value)
+
+ direction
-
0deg.
Origin point
0
+2
-2
-1
-1
+2
+2
3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305
360deg.
-1
3306
-2
3307
+1
3308
Amount for each axis
3309
Compensation interval: 3600, Compensation point: In case of 10,
parameter is set as follows:
Pitch
Pitch
Pitch
Pitch
error
error
error
error
compensation
compensation
compensation
compensation
point for origin point NO.5420 = 300
point for (-) direction NO.5421 = 300
point for (+) direction NO.5422 = 309
interval NO.1813 = 36000
7-4
Parameter No.
2. SENTROL2
PARAMETER
2. SENTROL2 PARAMETER LIST
0000
DC3
%OF
ARC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DC3
%OF
ARC
EIA
NCR
ISP
CTV
TVC
1: For program output, output the DC3 signal after DATA output is complete.
0: For program output, do not output the DC3 signal after DATA output is complete.
1: For program input, start the input with the CR signal.
0: For program input, start the input with the “%” + CR signal.
1 : Use “C” and “R” for the address in chamfering and corner radius.
0 : Use “I” , “K”
and
“R” for the address in chamfering and corner radius.
Use “,C” and “,R” for any angle chamfering and corner radius.
EIA
1 : Punch code is EIA.
0 : Punch code is ISO.
NCR
1 : In ISO code, end of block code is punched as LF.
0 : In ISO code, end of block code is punched as LF CR CR.
ISP
1 : ISO code contains no parity bit.
0 : ISO code contains a parity bit.
CTV
1 : TV check is not performed during control out.
0 : TV check is performed during control out.
TVC
1 : TV check is performed
0 : TV check is not performed.
0011
SOF
SBO
SBC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SOF
SBO
SBC
SBM
D24
TMR
ND8
NE8
1 : Use FANUC 10/11 tape format.
0 : Use FANUC 0 tape format.
1 : Single block stop is performed in blocks which are automatically generated in NC to
correct tool nose radius compensation.
0 : Single block stop is not performed.
1 : Single block stop is performed in each canned cycle.
0 : Single block stop is not performed in each canned cycle.
SBM
1 : Single block stop is performed in custom macro statement.
0 : Single block stop is not performed in custom macro statement.
D24
1 : DC2 and DC4 code are output when data is output through RS232C port.
0 : DC2 and DC4 code are not output when data is output through RS232C port
TMR
1 : Timer (cycle time) is cleared after execution of M00 or M01.
0 : Timer (cycle time) is not cleared after execution of M00 or M01.
ND8
1 : O8000~O8999 programs are not displayed on the CRT while they are executed
0 : O8000~O8999 programs are displayed on the CRT while they are executed.
7-5
Chapter 7
Parameter
NE8
1 : O8000~O8999 programs can be edited.
0 : O8000~O8999 programs cannot be edited.
7
6
5
4
3
0012
SCL
2
SCL
(M)
1
0
MIR
1 : Scaling is valid (for each axis)
0 : Scaling is not valid (for each axis)
MIR
1 : Mirror image ON (MIRROR)
0 : Mirror image OFF (NORMAL)
0020
FOREGROUNG INPUT
Specify which interface is used for foreground input device.
0 : RS232C INTERFACE 1 (COM1)
1 : RS232C/RS422 INTERFACE 2 (COM2)
0021
FOREGROUND OUTPUT
Specify which interface is used for foreground output device.
0 : RS232C INTERFACE 1 (COM1)
1 : RS232C/RS422 INTERFACE 2 (COM2)
0022
EXTERNAL INPUT
Specify which interface is used for input device to control external I/O device.
0 : RS232C INTERFACE 1
1 : RS232C/RS422 INTERFACE 2
0023
EXTERNAL OUTPUT
Specify which interface is used for external device to control external I/O device.
0 : RS232C INTERFACE 1
1 : RS232C/RS422 INTERFACE 2
0032
AUTO INCREMENT
Specify the increment value of sequence number when using the “Automatic Sequence No. Generation Function.”
Data rang: 1 ~ 127
7
6
1000
RV1
RVM
RV1
1:
0:
1:
0:
RVM
5
4
3
2
1
DRO
RAB
NCE
ROS
CSZ
0
When assigning the rotary axis, return to the origin after making one revolution.
When assigning the rotary axis, return to the origin without making one revolution.
When assigning the rotary axis, move to the - direction.
When assigning the rotary axis, move to the + direction.
7-6
2. SENTROL2
DRO
RAB
NCE
PARAMETER
1: Make the DIGITAL READ OUT valid.
0: Make the DIGITAL READ OUT invalid.
1: When assigning the rotary axis, indicate with absolute coordinates.
0: When assigning the rotary axis, do not indicate with absolute coordinates.
1 : The servo enable signal is not checked at servo ready check. Set”1” when using an axis as
index table or with servo off function.
0 : The servo enable signal is checked at servo ready check (standard)
ROS
0 : The machine coordinate system for stroke check and automatic reference point return is
rotary axis type.
1 : The machine coordinate system for system for stroke check and
automatic reference point return is linear axis type.
CSZ
1004
RV-
Not used
7
6
RV-
RV+
5
4
3
2
1
IRP
0
RVS
1: When designating the rotation axis, always move in the - direction.
0: When designating the rotation axis, do not move in the - direction at all times.
RV+
1: When designating the rotation axis, always move in the + direction.
0: When designating the rotation axis, do not move in the + direction at all times.
IRP
1: The unit to be entered for each axis should be 10-fold.
0: The unit to be entered for each axis should not be 10-fold.
RVS
1: When designating the rotation axis, move to the shortest distance.
0: Follow the values of RV- and RV+.
※ RV- and RV+ are valid if RVS is 0 and invalid if it is set as 1.
1005
RMB
7
6
5
RMB
PLC
PND
4
3
2
1
0
DCI
ZNG
PLZ
ALZ
1 : Controlled axis detach of each axis is available.
0 : Controlled axis detach of each axis is not available.
PLC
1 : Each axis is controlled by PLC.
0 : Each axis is not controlled by PLC.
PND
1 : Position data is not displayed on the screen.
0 : Position data is displayed on the screen.
DCI
1 : Each axis is decelerated when deceleration signal of reference point return changes to 1 (high).
0 : Each axis is decelerated when deceleration signal of reference point return changes to 0 (low).
ZNG
1 : Each axis’s machine lock is valid.
0 : Each axis’s machine lock is invalid.
PLZ
1 : Work coordinate system is always preset when manual reference point return is completed.
0 : Work coordinate system is preset only at the first manual reference point return
7-7
Chapter 7
Parameter
ALZ
1 : Automatic reference point return (G28) uses the same sequence as manual reference point return
0 : Automatic reference point return (G28) is performed by positioning control (rapid traverse)
1020
NAME
OF
EACH AXIS
Assign a program axis name to each control axis according to the next table.
Axis name
X
Y
Z
1030
2 ND
Set value
88
89
90
Axis name
A
B
C
AUXILIARY
Set value
65
66
67
Set value
85
86
87
FUNCTION
Assign an address among A,B,C,U,V and W to be
Address Set value
Used for 2nd auxiliary function according to the
Next table. Note that the address used as a control
Axis name cannot be assigned as the address of the
2nd auxiliary function.
1031
Axis name
U
V
W
A
65
B
66
C
67
STANDARD AXIS
The units of the parameters common to all axes such as dry run rate vary according to the specified
increment systems. This parameter is employed to refer to the units of these parameters as those of an
increment system of the standard axis in case of that the specified increment system is different for
each axis. Specify the sequence number of the axis which is used as the standard axis.
note)Refer to parameter 1020 for the numbers of the control axis.
1032
RELATES AXIS TO BCS
Assign each control axis to basic coordinate system according to the next table.
Set value
Meaning
0
A rotary axis
1
X axis of basic three axes
2
Y axis of basic three axes
3
Z axis of basic three axes
5
An axis parallel to X axis
6
An axis parallel to Y axis
7
An axis parallel to Z axis
7-8
2. SENTROL2
1034
PARAMETER
LINEAR AXIS FOR POLAR
Specify the control axis number of rotary axis for polar coordinate interpolation
Data range : 1~8 note)Refer to parameter 1020 for the numbers of the control axis.
1035
ROTARY AXIS FOR POLAR
Specify the control axis number of rotary for polar coordinate interpolation.
Data range : 1~5. note)Refer to parameter 1020 for the numbers of the control axis.
1040
(ANGULAR
ANGLE OF SLOPE AXIS
GRINDING)
Specify the angle of X axis for the sloped axis control.
Data range : -60000~-20000, 20000~60000
Data unit : 0.001deg
Default set : 30000
1041
RPS
7
6
RPS
OSL
5
SDW
(C)
4
SAD
(C)
3
OSS
(C)
2
QTL
(C)
1
0
AGL
1: At reference point finish and G92 coordinate setting the relative coordinate is established
with the same value as the absolute coordinate.
0: At reference point return finish and G92 coordinate setting the relative coordinate is not
established with the same value as the absolute coordinat.
OSL
SDW
1: The OSCILLATION function (G81.1) is valid.
0: The OSCILLATION function (G81.1) is invalid.
1: Slow up/down (automatic Acceleration/deceleration) function for water jet is valid.
0: Slow up/down (automatic Acceleration/deceleration) function for water jet is invalid.
SAD
1: Spindle Acceleration/deceleration (feed override) function is valid for blanket quilting
machine.
It is used to control spindle override in PLC.
Set acceleration/deceleration section to parameter 613,6616.
Setting unit: 0.1mm
Set low speed clamp value to parameter 6610.
Setting unit: 1%
0: Spindle acceleration/deceleration (feed override) function is invalid for blanket quilting
machine.
OSS
QTL
AGL
1: The OSCILLATION acceleration/deceleration type is Sin Curve.
0: The OSCILLATION acceleration/deceleration type is linear.
1: The embroidery function is valid.
(for G94, start operation at the rising edge of the INTERLOCK signal)
0: The embroidery function is invalid.
1 : Sloped axis control is performed for each axis.
(For angular grinder)
0 : Sloped axis control is not performed for each axis.
7-9
Chapter 7
Parameter
7
1042
SAP
6
5
4
3
2
1
SAP
MPV
SPB
EON
SOV
(SPIN) (SPIN) (SPIN) (SPIN) (SPIN)
0
CPS
1: All Sample Data are saved.
0: To make the Data components (X, Z movement distance) between Samples identical,
combine them into one Data and Count Up the Counter.
MPV
1: Manage the Teaching Data vis-à-vis the Position Data.
0: Manage the Teaching Data vis-à-vis VCmd.
SPB
1: If SAP=0, the Sample Data that was Counted Up is prepared in the number of Blocks equal
to the number counted.
0: If SAP=0, the Sample Data that was Counted Up is prepared in 1 Block.
EON
1: During SERVO OFF, the Enable signal is turned ON.
0: During SERVO OFF, the Enable signal is OFF.
SOV
1: The SERVO OFF function is valid.
0: The SERVO OFF function is invalid.
CPS
1: In chopping MODE, automatic stop is rendered invalid.
0: In chopping MODE, automatic stop is rendered valid.
7
1043
PST
GTF
6
5
4
3
GTF
PST
(SPIN)
Not used (reserved)
1: The GAIN CONSTANT TABLE is valid.
0: The GAIN CONSTANT TABLE is invalid.
1044
2
1
SAMPLING TIMES
0
(SPIN)
The sampling period for the NC Interrupt period is set up.
Sampling period [ms] = NC Interrupt period (10ms) ⅹ SAMPLING TIMES
Setup value: 0 ~ 100
1220
WORK ZERO COMMON
This parameter gives the offset value common to all of the work coordinate system.
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Unit
Linear axis (in millimeter)
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Linear axis (in inches)
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotary axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
Data unit : -99999999~+99999999
7-10
2. SENTROL2
1221
WORK ZERO SFT #1
1222
WORK ZERO SFT #2
1223
WORK ZERO SFT #3
1224
WORK ZERO SFT #4
1225
WORK ZERO SFT #5
1226
WORK ZERO SFT #6
PARAMETER
Work zero point offset values are established for work coordinate system 1 through 6(G54~G59)
according to these parameters.
Linear axis (in millimeters)
Linear axis (in inches)
Rotary axis
IS-A
0.01
0.001
0.01
Increme
IS-B
IS-C
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
Unit
mm
inch
deg
Setup value: -99999999~+99999999
1240
VALUE OF 1 ST R POINT
1241
VALUE OF 2 ST R POINT
1242
VALUE OF 3 RD R POINT
1243
VALUE OF 4 TH R POINT
The coordinate values of the 1st through 4th reference point are established in the machine coordinate
system according to these parameters.
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Linear axis(in
millimeters)
Rotary axis
Unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
Data range : -99999999~+99999999
7-11
Chapter 7
Parameter
1260
MOVEMENT OF ROTARY
Set the movement amount of one rotation of a rotary axis. For use of the axis as a rotary axis establish
this parameter without fail.
IS-A
0.01
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-B
IS-C
0.001
0.0001
Unit
deg
Data range : 0~99999999
1400
COR
7
COR
(M)
6
LAI
5
F05
4
FST
3
SKF
2
LRP
1
TDR
0
RDR
1: Feed clamp function by radius of circular arc is valid.
In this case, automatic corner override function is not available.
0: Feed clamp function by radius of circular arc is invalid.
LAI
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is valid.
0 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interporation is invalid.
The acc./dec. time is set in parameter 1622.
Data range : 10 ~ 100
F05
Unit : msec
1 : In case the feedrate is selected on the soft operator’s panel for speeds.
0 :Override value increases by 5%
Override value increases by 10%
FST
1 : Feed stop function is valid.
0 : Feed stop function is invalid.
SKF
1 : Feedrate of skip function is decided by the parameter(data #1428)
0 : Feedrate of skip function is decided by F code commanded on the program
*Note) This parameter is valid only when the parameter #7200 HSS is set to 0. And the
PLC-NC interface signal (SKIP 1~4) is used as the skip signal.
LRP
1 : Linear interpolation type positiong (G00). Tool path is always straight line.
0 : Non-linear interpolation type positioning (G00). Independent rapid traverse for each axis
is performed.
TDR
1 : Dry run is valid for thread cutting command and tapping command.
0 : Dry run is invalid for thread cutting command and tapping command.
RDR
1 : Dry run speed is valid at rapid traverse in dry run mode.
0 : Dry run speed is not valid at rapid traverse (but rapid traverse speed).
7-12
2. SENTROL2
7
ADC
(C)
1401
ADC
6
ACF
(C)
5
TRA
(C)
4
RP4
3
TR8
(C)
2
1
MR2
PARAMETER
0
CAL
(C)
1 : Automatic acc./dec. function is valid.
0 : Automatic acc./dec. function is valid.
ACF
1 : Actual feedrate output at F12,F13 is valid.
0 : Actual feedrate output at F12,F13 is invalid.
TRA
1 : Tracing function is valid. (LASER CUTTING)
0 : Tracing function is invalid. (LASER CUTTING)
RP4
1 : Manual rapid traverse rate before ref.p.return finish is carried out at set value.
0 : Manual rapid traverse rate before ref.p.return finish is carried out at 1/4 of the set value.
TR8
1: The 8CH TRACING FUNCTION is valid (for the LASER cutter).
0: The 8CH TRACING FUNCTION is invalid (for the LASER cutter).
1 : Manual rapid traverse rate is carried out at 1/2 of the set value.
MR2
0 : Manual rapid traverse rate is carried out at the set value.
CAL
1 : The special hight sensor correction function is valid
0 : The special hight sensor correction function is not valid
1402
JF2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
JF2
CRD
RTF
---
RF0
SMC
ROV
RAT
1: FEED OVERRIDE type JOG feed is used.
0: FEED OVERRIDE type JOG feed is not used.
CRD
1: As for automatic chamfer/corner R, it is possible with no decimal point used in C and R.
0: As for automatic chamfer/corner R, it is impossible with no decimal point used in C and R.
RTF
1: In the RETURN function, move at feed rate.
0: In the RETURN function, move at DRY RUN speed.
RF0
SMC
1: Stop with rapid traverse FEED OVERRIDE 0.
0:
Do not stop with rapid traverse FEED OVERRIDE 0.
1:
Rapid traverse from manual operation – feed conversion (G6.7) is carried out smoothly.
0: Rapid traverse from manual operation – feed conversion (G6.7) is carried out in the existing
manner.
ROV
1: The rapid traverse FEED OVERRIDE is rendered valid (valid only for 1400 LPR=0).
0: The rapid traverse FEED OVERRIDE is rendered invalid.
RAT
1: The rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration TYPE is set to the exponential type.
0:
The rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration TYPE is set to the linear type.
7-13
Chapter 7
Parameter
7
6
5
4
3
2
1403
1
0
RDA
RDA
1: The rapid traverse rate selection count is 4 (RT0~RT3).
0: The rapid traverse rate selection count is 3 (RT0~RT2).
1413
EACH AXIS MAX HANDLE FEED
CLAMP speed for each axis of handle operation
Setup value: 0~32767
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Setup Unit
IS-B
1.0
1.0
IS-A
10.0
10.0
1414
N
OF
HANDLE
FEED 1
1415
N
OF
HANDLE
FEED 2
1416
N
OF
HANDLE
FEED 3
IS-C
0.1
0.1
Unit
mm/min
deg/min
The magnifications are established for the manual pulse generator according to this
Parameter,
Setup value: 1~200
1422
EACH AXIS MAX FEEDRATE
The maximum feedrate is set for each axis according to this parameter.
Data unit : see next table.
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
100.0
10.0
1.0
100.0
10.0
1.0
Setup value: 1~6000
7-14
Unit
mm/min
deg/min
2. SENTROL2
1428
SKIP
FUNCTION
PARAMETER
FEEDRATE
Skip function (G31) feedrate is established according to this parameter.
This parameter is valid only the parameter #1400 SKF is set to 1.
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
100.0
10.0
1.0
100.0
10.0
1.0
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Unit
mm/min
deg/min
Setup value: 1~32767
1494
REVERSE
FEED
RATE
(C)
Set up the feed rate for RETRACE function REVERSE.
Setup Unit
IS-B
1.0
1.0
IS-C
0.1
0.1
Unit
mm/min
deg/min
Specify rapid traverse rate(RT0~RT2) for each axis.
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Linear axis
100.0
10.0
1.0
Rotary axis
100.0
10.0
1.0
unit
mm/min
deg/min
Linear axis
Rotary axis
IS-A
10.0
10.0
Setup value : 1~32767
1500
RAPID
TRAVERSE
RATE 0
1501
RAPID
제5장파라미터
TRAVERSE
RATE 1
TRAVERSE
RATE 2
1502
RAPID
Setup value: 1~9800
(for the I TYPE, 1~12000 distribution cycle 8ms and 1~24000 distribution
Cycle 4ms for high-speed machining)
7-15
Chapter 7
1503
:
1523
Parameter
JOG
FEED
RATE
:
JOG
FEED
RATE
Specify the steps of jog federate. They are common to all of axes.
The maximum federate(Vmax) can be calculated as following,
Vmax(mm/min) = Maximum motor speed(rpm)×Axis moving distance per a revolution(mm)
Axis type
IS-A
10.0
10.0
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-B
IS-C
1.0
0.1
1.0
0.1
unit
mm/min
deg/min
Setup value: 1~32767
1524
EACH
AXIS
JOG
FEED RATE
Set up the JOG feed rate for each axis (valid only when No.1402 JF2 =1, however).
Linear axis
Rotary axis
IS-A
10.0
10.0
Setup Unit
IS-B
1.0
1.0
IS-C
0.1
0.1
Unit
mm/min
deg/min
Setup value: 1~32767
1525
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE 3
For each axis, set up rapid traverse rate RT3 (valid only when No.1403 RDA=1, however).
Content is the same as 1500~1502.
7-16
2. SENTROL2
7
6
5
4
1601
3
2
1
0
OVB
OVB
1620
PARAMETER
-
1: The Block Overlap function is used.
0: The Block Overlap function is not used.
TIME CONSTANT (RAPID)
Linear type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant is established for
each axis according to this parameter.
Data range : 0~1000
Data unit : msec
speed
(rapid traverse)
Rapid
traverse
rate
FL rate
time
Acc./dec.
Time constant
1621
FL (RAPID)
Linear type rapid traverse accleration/deceleration FL rate is established for each axis
Axis type
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
10.0
1.0
0.1
10.0
1.0
0.1
unit
mm/min
deg/min
Data range : 0~32767
1622
TIME CONSTANT (FEED)
Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration(exponential type) time constant is established for each axis
Data range : 0~4000
Data unit : msec
SPEED
(FEED, JOG, THREAD CUTTING)
FL SPEED
TIME
ACC./DEC.
TIME
7-17
Chapter 7 Parameter
1623
FL (FEED)
Feed acceleration/deceleration FL rate is established for each axis according to this parameter. 0
should be set in this parameter, otherwise the correct straight line or arcshapes cannot be obtained.
Axis type
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
10.0
1.0
0.1
10.0
1.0
0.1
Unit
mm/min
deg/min
Data range : 0~32767
1624
TIME CONSTANT (JOG)
Jogging acceleration/deceleration (exponential type) time constant is established for each axis
according to this parameter.
Data range : 0~4000
1625
Data unit : msec
FL (JOG)
Jogging acceleration/deceleration FL rate is established for each axis according to this parameter.
Axis type
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
10.0
1.0
0.1
10.0
1.0
0.1
unit
mm/min
deg/min
Data range : 0~32767
1626
TIME CONSTANT (THREAD)
Tread cutting acceleration/deceleration time constant is established for each axis according to this
parameter.
Data range : 0~4000
1627
Data unit : msec
FL (THREAD)
Thread cutting acceleration FL rate is established for each axis according to this parameter.
Axis type
Linear axis
Rotary axis
IS-A
10.0
10.0
Increment system
IS-B
IS-C
1.0
0.1
1.0
0.1
unit
mm/min
deg/min
Data range : 0~32767
1628
TIME CONSTANT (OSCILLATION)
For each axis, set up the time constant for the OSCILLATION function acceleration/deceleration (refer
to the parameter NO.1622 figure).
Setup value: 0~4000
Unit: ms
7-18
2. SENTROL2
1629
PARAMETER
FL (OSCILLATION)
For each axis, set up the FL speed for the OSCILLATION function acceleration/deceleration (refer to
the parameter NO.1622 figure).
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Setup value: 0~32767
1630
Setup Unit
IS-B
1.0
1.0
IS-A
10.0
10.0
IS-C
0.1
0.1
Unit
mm/min
deg/min
TIME CONSTANT (MARKING)
For each axis, set up the time constant for the MARKING feed acceleration/deceleration (refer to the
parameter NO.1622 figure).
Setup value: 0~4000
Unit: ms
1631
FL (MARKING)
For each axis, set up the FL speed for the MARKING feed acceleration/deceleration (refer to the
parameter NO.1622 figure).
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Setup value: 0~32767
1632
IS-A
10.0
10.0
Setup Unit
IS-B
1.0
1.0
IS-C
0.1
0.1
Unit
Mm/min
Deg/min
TIME CONSTANT A (RAPID)
For each axis, set up the time constant for the rapid traverse BELL type acceleration/deceleration
(linear); refer to the parameter NO.1633 figure.
Setup value: 0~4000
Unit: ms
1633
TIME CONSTANT S (RAPID)
For each axis, set up the time constant for the rapid traverse BELL type acceleration/deceleration (curve).
Setup value: 0~4000
Unit: ms
Velocity
Ts/2
Ts/2
Ta
7-19
Time(msec)
Chapter 7 Parameter
1800
SERVO AXIS NO.
Relates each control axis to a servo axis. Normally, set the same value as the control axis sequence
number to the servo axis number.
If a same servo axis number is set to more than 2 control axes, the largest control axis becomes valid.
Data range : 0~8(1~3, 5~7 : servo axis I/F, 4,8 : spindle I/F)
Setting example 1. Lathe (2 servo axes (X and Z)+spindle)
1800
X
1
Z
2
C
4
(spindle)
Setting example 2. Milling (3 servo axes (X, Y and Z)+spindle)
1800
X
1
Y
2
Z
3
C
4
(spindle)
Setting example 3. Machining center (7 servo axes (X, Y, Z, A, U, V and W)+spindle)
1800
X
1
Y
2
Z
3
A
4
U
5
V
6
W
7
C
8
(spindle)
1817
A
URO
1
(1 is set if the spindle I/F is used as servo axis I/F.)
1801
ENCODER TYPE
Set the number of pulses per pulse coder rotation for each axis.
Data range : 100~25000
1802
Data unit : PPR
MOVING MULTIPLY
Set the machine movement per motor rotation for each aixs.
Axis type
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.001
0.01
0.001
0.001
Data range : 0~32767
7-20
unit
mm
deg
2. SENTROL2
1803
PARAMETER
POSITION LOOP GAIN
Position control loop gain is specified for each axis. For a machine which performs linear or circular
interpolation cut, specify the same value for all of the axes. For a machine which only requires
positioning, different values may be specified for different axes. The larger the loop gain, the higher
the position control response. But if it is too large, the servo system becomes unstable.
Data range : 500~10000
1804
Data unit : 0.01/sec
Default value : 3000
STOP POS ERR LIMIT
Position deviation limit value at stop is specified for each axis. If the position deviation exceeds the
limit value when the axis movement stops, a servo alarm occurs and the machine stops instantly
Data range : 100 ~ 5000
1805
Data unit : Detection unit
MOVING POS ERR LIMIT
Position deviation limit value during axis movement is specified for each axis.
If the position deviation exceeds the limit value while moving, a servo alarm occurs
And the machine stops instantly.
ERROR LIMIT=
Data range : 100~25000
1806
Rapid Trav.(mm/min.) ×ENCODER PULSE(PPR) ×2
PITCH(mm/rev) ×PISITION LOOP GAIN(1/s) ×60
×1.2
Data unit : Detection unit
SERVO OFF POS ERR LIMIT
Position deviation limit value at servo off is specified for each axis.
Data range : 100~5000
1807
Data unit : Detection unit
GAIN CONSTANT
Specify the velocity command voltage to rotate the servo motor at 1000rpm.
For example, if the servo motor rotates at 1000rpm with 4 volt, set 4000.
Data range : 1000 ~ 8000
1808
Data unit : mV/1000rpm Default set : 3500
INPOSITION WIDTH
In-position width is specified for each axis. If the deviation of the machine position from the command
position is less than the in-position width, it is assumed that the machine has reached the command
position or is in-positioned.
Data range : 1 ~ 100
Data unit : Detection unit
7-21
Chapter 7 Parameter
1809
RPR FEED LOW
Feedrate(FL) after deceleration in reference point return is established for each axis according to this
parameter.
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
10.0
1.0
0.1
10.0
1.0
0.1
Axis type
Linear axis
Rotary axis
1810
unit
mm/min
deg/min
RP SHIFT AMOUNT
Specify the grid shift amount for each axis.
Data range : -25000 ~ 25000
1811
Data unit : Detection unit
BACK LASH COMPEN
Specify the backlash compensation amount for each axis. After power is turned on, the first backlash
compensation is performed when an axis moves in the direction opposite to the reference point return
direction.
Data range : 0 ~ 32767
Axis type
Linear axis
Rotary axis
1812
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.01
0.001
0.0001
unit
mm
deg
SERVO OFF DELAY TIME
Specify the delay time of servo system to be set off when emergency stop switch was pushed. This
parameter is used to keep the heavy weighted axis from dropping by turning off the servo system after
the brake holds the axis.
Data range : 0 ~ 127
1813
Data unit : 10ms
PITCH INTERVAL
Specify the compensation intervals at pitch error compensation of each axis.
Data range : -99999999~99999999
Axis type
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.01
0.001
0.0001
7-22
Unit
mm
deg
2. SENTROL2
1814
MAG
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MAG
HSP
RET
RDI
REV
MRW
ISF
ISR
PARAMETER
1 : Each axis’s control axis detach signal is valid.
0 : Each axis’s control axis detach signal is invalid.
HSP
1 : High speed positioning is performed. In this case, parameter #1825 must be set properly.
RET
1: After the reference point return deceleration, the direction of movement is reversed if Z
pulse is received.
0: After the reference point return deceleration, the direction of movement is not reversed
even if Z pulse is received.
0 : High speed positioning is not performed.
RDI
1 : Reference point return direction is “-“ axis direction for each axis.
0 : Reference point return direction is “+” axis direction for each axis.
REV
1 : Specify as rotary axis for each axis.
0 : Specity as non-rotary axis for each axis.
MRW
: Servo motor rotates in one direction..
ISF
ISF
ISR
ISR
0
0
0.001mm, 0.001deg
IS-B
0
1
0.01mm, 0.01deg
IS-A
1
0
0.0001mm, 0.0001deg
IS-C
7
6
5
4
SAC
OHC
VOC
F1C
1815
SAC
Least command increment
3
2
Abbreviation
1
0
SOC
1 : Cancel next alarms : over load, over heat, encoder disconnection, voltage alarm, V ready
ON/OFF, over current. Diagnosis 0010 EBL, PRD display “1” but PREADY ENABLE
signal does not display “1”.
0 : Next alarms are not canceled : over load, over heat, encoder disconnection, voltage alarm,
V-ready ON/OFF, over current.
OHC
1 : Motor overheat cancel function is valid.
0 : Motor overheat cancel function is invalid.
VOC
1 : V READY ON/OFF check cancel function is valid.
0 : V READY ON/OFF check cancel function is invalid.
F1C
1 : Encoder feedback counter check cancel function is valid.
0 : Encoder feedback counter check cancel function is invalid.
SGM
1 : Use YASKAWA SIGMA SERIES SERVO DRIVE/MOTOR.
Can be displayed SERVO ALARM
0 : Do not use YASKAWA SIGMA SERIES SERVO DRIVE/MOTOR
SOC
1 : Servo off error check cancel function is valid.
0 : Servo off error check cancel function is invalid.
7-23
Chapter 7 Parameter
1816
EMH
AVO
EVF
MPS
M10
7
6
EMH
AVO
5
EVF
4
MPS
3
2
1
0
M10
ACP
VRA
ALB
1 : The function is 100 times as valid as encoder pulse setting value.
The setting unit of parameter 1801 encoder type is 0.01PPR.
If this function is valid, the setting unit of parameter 1802 is also 1/100.
0 : The function is 100 times as invalid as encoder pulse setting value.
The setting unit of parameter 1801 encoder type is 0.01PPR.
1 : EPS3 analog voltage output function is valid.
0 : EPS3 analog voltage output function is invalid.
1 : Follow up is valid with servo OFF. (mechanical handle used)
0 : Follow up is invalid with servo OFF.
1 : Machine origin point shift function is valid.
0 : Machine origin point shift function is invalid
1 : The unit of parameter 1802 MOVING MULTIPLY is multiplied by 10.
0 : The unit of parameter 1802 MOVING MULTIPLY is not multiplied by 10.
ACP
1 : SERVO ALARM, ENCODER DISCONECT and V-READY ON/OFF ALARM are not
checked, when P-READY signal is off.
0 : SERVO ALARM, ENCODER DISCONECT and
V-READY ON/OFF ALARM are
checked, when P-READY signal is off.
VRA
1 : V READY signal is normally open contact.
0 : V READY signal is normally closed contact.
ALB
1 : V READY signal is A contact.
0 : SERVO ALRAM signal is B contact.
Standard setting value for difference servo units.
1
2
3
SERVO UNIT
ACP
VRA
ALB
YASKAWA SIGMA/ SIGMAⅡ SERIES
FDA-5001~04
LG FDA-5000 SERIES
FDA-5005~45
PANASONIC MINAS SERIES
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
7-24
2. SENTROL2
1817
UR7
UR6
UR5
UR4
UR3
UR2
UR1
UR0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UR7
UR6
UR5
UR4
UR3
UR2
UR1
UR0
1st axis 1: Interrupt SYSTEM ERROR 14004 and 14007 are ignored.
2nd axis 1: Interrupt SYSTEM ERROR-related DATA is displayed.
3rd axis 1: The Time Chart function is segmented.
4th axis 1: LAN TYPE DNC is operated.
5th axis 1: Interrupt SYSTEM ERROR 13000~ is ignored.
1: During simple synchronization control, the Grid Shift is synchronized as well.
0: During simple synchronization control, the Grid Shift is not synchronized.
1 : Change meaning of parameter 1810. 10 times or 100 times is determined according to
1816 M10 or 1817 UR2.
(Valid up to 1000 times in case of 9090 DB6 = 1)
0 : Do not change meaning of parameter 1810.
1 : Change meaning of parameter 1816.
(Valid only in case of 1816 M10=1 and 1817 UR2=1)
Setting unit of moving multiply: 1000 times
0 : Do not change meaning of parameter 1816.
1 : Use absolute encoder.
0 : Do not use absolute encoder.
1 : Change meaning of parameter 1810.
Setting unit of moving multiply: 100 times
0 : Do not change meaning of parameter 1816.
Setting unit of moving multiply: 10 times
1 : Cs axis is valid. (Valid only in case of UR0 = 1)
0 : Cs axis is invalid.
1 : Use spindle I/F as servo axis.
0 : Do not use spindle I/F as servo axis.
7
1818
DPF
GCT
MDR
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
NDR
PARAMETER
1:
0:
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GCT
DPF
MDR
NDR
(SPIN)
The DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK function is valid.
The DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK function is invalid.
This is used as the target axis of the GAIN CONSTANT TABLE.
This is not used as the target axis of the GAIN CONSTANT TABLE.
The shortest distance selection function for the reference point return without reference
point DOG is valid.
The shortest distance selection function for the reference point return without reference
point DOG is invalid.
The reference point return function without reference point DOG is valid.
The reference point return function without reference point DOG is invalid.
7-25
Chapter 7 Parameter
1821
FEED FORWARD GAIN
Specify the feed forward gain constant.
Data range : 0~25000
1822
DRIFT AMOUNT
Specify drift compensation amount for each axis when the parameter #1823 ADF is set to 0.
Data range : -2000~2000
7
ADF
1823
ADF
6
DIA
(L)
Data unit : velo(1velo=0.31mv)
5
AUG
4
3
ERC
2
P1O
1
0
1 : Automatic drift compensation is performed.
0 : Automatic drift compensation is not performed.
DIA
1 : Each axis movement amount is specified by diameter.
0 : Each axis movement amount is specified by radius.
AUG
1 : Automatic gain compensation is performed.
ERC
0 : Automatic gain compensation is not performed.
1 : Reference point is lost by emergency stop on.
P10
1824
0 : Reference point is not lost by emergency stop on.
1 : The setting unit of parameter 1801 encoder type increases to 10 times.
0 : The setting unit of parameter 1801 encoder type does not increases to 10 times.
ZERO PULSE WIDTH
Specify the encoder’s zero width signal for each axis.
Data unit : Detection unit
Data range : 0~50
How to find out the set value : Set the parameter #1824=0 first of all and turn off the power. Turn on
the power again, make a reference point return. Then DIAG 0012 will display some values while an
axis moves and also display the different value when the axis move direction changes. Find the
maximum value of DIAG 0012 and set the absolute value of that maximum value to this parameter.
example)
YASKAWA SIGMA, HYOSUNG YASKAWA AC SERVO
:4
LG AC SERVO, PANASONIC MINAS AC SERVO
:4
7-26
2. SENTROL2
1825
PARAMETER
GAIN CHANGE POS ERR
Specify the maximum amount of position error
VCMC
when high speed positioning is executed
Data unit : Detection unit
HIGH SPEED POSITIONING
Data range : 0~25000
NORMAL POSITIONING
This parameter is invalid when parameter
1814 HSP is set to 0.
-POSERR
POSITION ERROR
+POSERR
INCLINATION TWICE AS BIG
POSITION ERROR/VCMD GRAPH
1826
F/B PULSE CHECK DATA
When power is turned on, servo motor rotates as mush as set in this parameter to check if feedback
pulse is generated normally.
When this parameter is set to 0, feedback pulse check sepuence is not performed. Set 0 for those
motors which have brake system, they cannot perform the check sequence normally.
Data unit : Detection unit
1827
Data range : -500 ~ 500
Default set : 50
BACK LASH MAX LIMIT
Set the maximum limit of backlash compensation amount for each axis. If the value exceeds the
maximum limit, divide the backlash compensation amount and perform the setup. (It the amount is 0,
set to 256 according to previous standard.)
Setting value: 0~256
Axis type
Linear axis
Rotary axis
1828
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.01
0.001
0.0001
unit
mm
deg
ELECTRONIC GEAR (NUMERATOR)
Set up the numerator (A) for the gear ratio. This is used if the rotary axis or GEAR ratio is a fractional
value.
Setup value: 0~99999999 4byte data
1829
ELECTRONIC GEAR (DENOMINATOR)
Set up the denominator (B) for the gear ratio. This is used if the rotary axis or GEAR ratio is a
fractional value.
Setup value: 0~99999999 4byte data
The gear ratio range must satisfy the following: 0.01<= A/B <= 100.
7-27
Chapter 7 Parameter
1832
FEED STOP POSITION
Specify feedstop position deviation for each axis. If the position deviation exceeds the feedstop position
deviation while moving, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration controls are temporarily
stopped.
When the position deviation becomes less than the feedstop position deviation, the pulse distribution
and acceleration/deceleration controls are restarted.
Data unit : Detection unit
1833
Data range : 0~32767
CLAMP VOLTAGE
Set up the control value for the hydraulic Servo minimum speed Clamp.
Setup value: 0~32767 Unit: Detection unit (PULSE)
1834
2ND INPOSITION WIDTH
G00 in-position check value if inplevel=6 from G code C64.1
Setup value: 0~32767 Unit: Detection unit (PULSE)
1841
GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 1
(SPIN)
1842
GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 2
(SPIN)
1843
GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 3
(SPIN)
1844
GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 4
(SPIN)
1845
GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 5
(SPIN)
1846
GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 6
(SPIN)
1847
GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 7
(SPIN)
1848
GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 8
(SPIN)
1849
GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 9
(SPIN)
GAIN CONSTANT value for each axis
Select the TABLE number with the following 4 bits: G262.0~G262.3.
Setup value: 1000 ~ 65535
7-28
2. SENTROL2
1860
PARAMETER
BL ACCEL VALUE
Set the acceleration amount of the backlash acceleration function.
Data unit : 3.05mV
1861
Data range : 0~4095
Default set : 0
BL ACCEL TIME
Set the accelerating time of backlash acceleration function.
Data unit : msec(10msec)
1862
Data range : 0~127
Default set : 0
BL ACCEL STOP
Set the move amount of the backlash acceleration function at acceleration stop. Acceleration will stop
if the move amount after direction change exceeds this value.
Data unit : pulse
1863
Data range : 0~127
Default set : 0
BL ACCEL VALUE 2
Acceleration value for backlash acceleration function is set. (Direction moves from + to -. )
Setting to 0 invalidates the function.
Setting Unit: 3.05mV
Setting value: 0 ~ 4095 Standard value: 0
1870
DUAL POS FB IN
Set up the ENCODER Input PORT for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP used in DUAL POSITION
FEEDBACK with the control axis number.
For example, to connect the detector for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP in the X axis (first axis) to the
fifth axis, set the 1870 parameter to 5.
An 8-axis NC may be set to 8, and a 16-axis NC, to 16.
Set the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function to 0 when not in use.
Setup range: 0~16
1871
DUAL POS FB A
1872
DUAL POS FB B
In the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK function, set up the ratio for converting the separate placementtype detector signal used in the FULLY CLOSED LOOP to a unit for the SEMI-CLOSED LOOP
detector in the numerator (1871) and the denominator (1872).
Ex.) If the SEMI-CLOSED LOOP unit is 0.00025 mm, and the FULLY-CLOSED LOOP unit, 0.001
mm, the SEMI-CLOSED LOOP and the FULLY CLOSED LOOP generate 4000 pulses and 1000
pulses, respectively, when moving 1 mm.
Since A/B = 4000/1000, set up as A (1871) = 4, B (1872) = 1.
Any one side set to 0 is treated as a 1:1 ratio.
7-29
Chapter 7 Parameter
1873
DUAL POS FB TC
For the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function, set up the time constant of the first order lag
system for error compensation.
If set to 32767, the time constant becomes infinite, and compensation does not occur.
Setup unit: mm
Setup range: 0~32767
Standard value: 10000
1874
DUAL POS ZERO WIDTH<?>
For the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function, set up the compensation override range.
If the difference between FEEDBACK from the FULLY CLOSED LOOP and FEEDBACK from the
SEMI-CLOSED LOOP is lower than the setup value, compensation is not executed.
Setup unit: Detection unit for the SEMI-CLOSED LOOP
Setup range: 0~32767
Standard value: 10
1875
CLOSED LOOP REF COUNTER
When using the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function, the REFERENCE COUNTER value
for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP is set up for each axis.
Setup unit: Detection unit for FULLY CLOSED LOOP
Setup range: 0~32767
Standard value: 10
1876
CLOSED LOOP RP SHIFT
When using the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function, set up the origin GRID SHIFT
amount of each axis for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP.
To SHIFT the GRID position, set up the GRID SHIFT amount.
If the DATA sign is +, the GRID will SHIFT in the + direction; if the DATA sign is –, the GRID
will SHIFT in the - direction. The GRID SHIFT amount cannot exceed the REFERENCE COUNTER
value of 1875.
Setup unit: Detection unit for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP
Setup range: -32767~32767
Standard value: 0
7-30
2. SENTROL2
7
6
5
2000
OPS
4
3
OPS
STR
2
1
PARAMETER
0
1 : Cycle operating signal is turned on when searching for a sequence number.
0 : Cycle operating signal is not turned on when searching for a sequence number.
STR
1 : Cycle start lamp signal is output when programs are loaded by cycle start signal in part
program edit mode. (refer to parameter #2200 RDS)
0 : Cycle start lamp signal is not output when programs are loaded by cycle start signal in
part program mode.(refer to parameter #2200 RDS)
2001
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EDT
MMC
SWD
DLO
MNL
RAM
LWS
SQC
EDT
1 : Use background I/O function ( SOFT DKU ).
0 : Do not use background I/O function ( SOFT DKU ).
MMC
1: Multiple M-codes in one block can be commanded(max.4)
0: Only one M-codes command per block is allowed.
SWD
1 : Servo feedback graphic display screen can be selected.
0 : Servo feedback graphic display screen cannot be selected.
DLO
1 : Display the spindle load on machine operator panel.
0 : Display the spindle load on the screen.
MNL
1 : Output signal is forced to output by manual operation in PLC diagnostic display.
0 : Output signal is not forced to output by manual operation in PLC diagnostic display.
RAM
LWS
SQC
1 : PLC SEQUENCE as written in RAM is valid(RAM operation)
0 : PLC SEQUENCE as written in ROM is valid(no RAM operation)
1: During SEQUENCE COMPILE, the LOW LEVEL partition is valid.
0: During SEQUENCE COMPILE, the LOW LEVEL partition is invalid.
1 : PLC sequence editing on screen is possible.
0 : PLC sequence editing on screen is not possible.
7
6
5
4
2003
BSN
3
2
1
0
BSN
TSN
SSN
MSN
1 : Minus sign “-“ can be used in the second auxiliary function.
0 : Minus sign “-“ cannot be used in the second auxiliary function.
TSN
1 : Minus sign “-“ can be used in T code
0 : Minus sign “-“ cannot be used in T code.
SSN
1 : Minus sign “-“ can be used in S code.
0 : Minus sign “-“ cannot be used in S code.
MSN
1 : Minus sign “-“ can be used in M code.
0 : Minus sign “-“ cannot be used in M code.
7-31
Chapter 7 Parameter
2004
OF7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OF7
OF6
OF5
OF4
OF3
OF2
OF1
HOB
1 : Contents of F7 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “CLNT CAN”) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F7 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “CLNT CAN”) is
displayed.
OF6
1 : Contents of F6 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “CLNT CAN”) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F6 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “CLNT CAN”) is
displayed.
OF5
1 : Contents of F5 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “M01”) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F5 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “M01”) is displayed.
OF4
1 : Contents of F4 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “SNGL BLOK”) is
not displayed.
0 : Contents of F4 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “SNGL BLOK”) is
displayed.
OF3
1 : Contents of F3 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “OPT.SKIP”) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F3 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “OPT.SKIP”) is
displayed.
OF2
1 : Contents of F2 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “DRY RUN”) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F2 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “DRY RUN”) is
displayed.
OF1
1 : Contents of F1 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “CHIP CONV”) is
not displayed.
0 : Contents of F1 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch “CHIP CONV”) is
displayed.
HOB
1 : Gear ratio of the spindle position coder is 2:75(for hobbing m/c)
0 : Gear ratio of the spindle position coder is 1:1
7-32
2. SENTROL2
2020
PARAMETER
OP PANEL PLUS BUTTON
Specify the operators panel numeric value key number which instructs the manual feed positive(+)
direction on the software operators panel.
Data unit : Integer
2021
Data range : 0~9
OP PANEL RPR BUTTON
Specify the operators panel numeric value key number which instructs the manual reference point
return direction on the software operators panel.
Data unit : Integer
Data range : 0~9
2030
ALLOWABLE DIGITS M
2031
ALLOWABLE DIGITS S
2032
ALLOWABLE DIGITS T
2033
ALLOWABLE DIGITS 2ND
Specify the allowable digits in the M,S,T and the second auxiliary function code.
Data unit : Integer
2034
Data range : 1~8
FEED OVERRIDE STEP
Specify the max. number of step for the feed override/jog feed bar display.
Data range : 0~21 Standard setting : SOFT OP PANEL : 21 HARD OP PANEL : 15
2049
WORK NO. SEARCH METHOD
When set value is 0 to 99 : External work number search is done only in those program numbers
whose higher two digits is same as the set value.
When set value is less than 0 or larger than 99 : External work number search is done ignoring the
higher two digits of the program number.
If there are more than one program found, they are searched by registered order.
Data range : -127~127
7-33
Chapter 7 Parameter
2200
DGD
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DGD
RDS
PAL
NM9
NPE
RAL
REP
RDL
1 : In DNC mode the graphic menu is displayed.
0 : In DNC mode the graphic menu is not displayed.
RDS
1 : The register of programs by cycle start signal under part program edit mode is valid.
0 : The register of programs by cycle start signal under part program edit mode is invalid.
PAL
1 : All programs are punched out when punching the program with external I/O device
control.
0 : A single program is punched out when punching the program with external I/O device
control.
NM9
1 : M99 is not assumed as the program end when programs are loaded.
0 : M99 is assumed as the program end when programs are loaded.
NPE
1 : M02, M30 and M99 should not be assumed as program end when programs are loaded.
0 : M02, M30 and M99 should be assumed as program end when programs are loaded.
RAL
1 : All programs are registered when registering the program with external I/O devices
control or with cycle start signal.
0 : A single program is registered when registering the program with external I/O devices
control or with cycle start signal.
REP
1 : If the program with the same program number as the already loaded program is loaded,
the already loaded program is deleted first, then the attempted program is loaded.
0 : If the program with the same program number as the already loaded program is loaded,
an alarm is indicated.
RDL
1 : Previously loaded programs are deleted and programs are loaded when programs are
loaded by external I/O control.
0 : Programs are loaded without deleting the previously loaded programs when programs are
loaded by external I/O control.
7-34
2. SENTROL2
2201
HSC
DEL
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
HSC
DEL
LSP
MRH
ND9
NE9
PDR
PARAMETER
0
1 : High speed canned cycle is valid.
0 : High speed canned cycle is invalid.
1 : The cancel menu on the program list in edit mode is not displayed.
LSP
0 : The cancel menu on the program list in edit mode is displayed.
1 : Restrict editing program with not less than 5 MB.
0 : Do not restrict editing program with not less than 5 MB
MRH
1 : (Total running time) value can be changed.
0 : (Total running time)value cannot be changed.
ND9
1 : Programs O9000~O9999 are mot displayed during execution.
0 : Programs O9000~O9999 are displayed during execution.
NE9
1 : Programs O9000~O9999 cannot be edited.
0 : Programs O9000~O9999 can be edited.
PDR
1 : At power on the program table will be displayed as a programming screen.
0 : At power on the last program will be displayed as a programming screen.
7
2202
6
5
4
3
MSD
MSD
2
1
0
DTL
HCH
MBL
1 : CYCLE TIME is displayed in seconds.
0 : CYCLE TIME is displayed in units of 10msec.
DTL
1 : Absolute coordinate position is displayed with not tool length(tool pos.) offset.
0 : Absolute coordinate position is displayed with tool length(tool pos.) offset.
HCH
MBL
1 : AUTO program displayed appears in a small letter.
0 : AUTO program displayed appears in a big letter.
1 : Set the number of previously translated program block to 100.
0 : Set the number of previously translated program block to 4.
7-35
Chapter 7 Parameter
2203
COL
TCC
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
COL
TCC
RC2
RC1
RC0
TC2
TC1
TC0
COLOR Display Method
Change the COLOR and display the cutting processing path each time a tool is
replaced.
The tool path is displayed using a COLOR between TC0~2.
The rapid traverse and cutting feed are displayed using a COLOR between RC0~2
and TC0~2, respectively.
Change the COLOR and display the path each time a tool is replaced.
RC2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
RC1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
RC0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
COLOR
YELLOW
RED
GREEN
WHITE
CYAN
MAGENTA
BLUE
BLACK
TC2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
TC1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
TC0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
COLOR
YELLOW
RED
GREEN
WHITE
CYAN
MAGENTA
BLUE
BLACK
Note) If TCC=1, the first COLOR after POWER ON is a COLOR between TC0~2.
Each time tool replacement occurs, the COLOR changes according to the order in the table. For
example, when starting with GREEN, the succeeding COLOR is WHITE, CYAN, and MAGENTA. In
this case, however, BLACK is ignored, and YELLOW follows BLUE.
2210
PARAMETER DISPLAY AXIS
Specify the number of axes to display the parameter data.
Data range : 1~8
2211
POSITION DISPLAY AXIS
Specify the number of axes to display the position data.
Data range : 1~8
7-36
2. SENTROL2
7
DPF
[L]
2400
DPF
6
GSC
(L)
4
DWL
3
2
1
0
DPQ
SCA
DPI
1: Recognize Feed that has been commanded without a decimal point as 1 mm/min unit.
0: Recognize as an input unit.
GSC
0
0
1
DWL
5
GSB
(L)
PARAMETER
GSB
0
1
0
G CODE SELECTION
G CODE SYSTEM A
G CODE SYSTEM B
G CODE SYSTEM C
1 : Dwell(G94) is dwell in second in the feed per minute mode(G94) or dwell in revolution in
the feed per revolution mode(G95)
0 : Dwell(G04) is always dwell in second.
DPQ
SCA
DPI
1: With the G32 command issued, process the decimal point for Q Address.
0: The decimal point cannot be used. The internal unit is 0.001deg.
1: In case of thread cutting, the starting angle is assigned in 0.001deg units.
0: In case of thread cutting, the starting angle is assigned in 1deg units.
1 : Decimal point is entered by calculator method.
0 : Decimal point is entered by conventional method.
2401
Command
Calculator method
Conventional method
X1000
1000 mm
1 mm
X1000.
1000 mm
1000 mm
7
6
5
4
3
G64
NCM
G18
G95
G64
Not used
NCM
1 : The next modal information is not cleared by reset.
2
1
0
G90
G01
0 : The next modal information is cleared by reset.
G00~G03, G17~G19, G43~G49, G54~G59, G90~G91,
G93~G95, G96~G97, F, H, S, T code.
G18
1 : G18(ZX plane) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
0 : G17(XY plane) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
G95
1 : G95(feed per revolution) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
0 : G94(feed per minute) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
G90
1 : G90(absolute) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
0 : G91(incremental) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
G01
1 : G01(linear interpolation) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
0 : G00(rapid traverse) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
7-37
Chapter 7 Parameter
2410
ARC RADIUS ERROR
Specify a limit value as difference between start point radius and end point radius for circular
interpolation command.
Millimeter system
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
unit
mm
Data range : 0~99999999
2426
WORK COUNT UP M CODE
Allow the M code that COUNTS UP the number of work pieces to be set up.
Setup value: 0~97
2900
DOUBLE TURRETS DISTANCE
(L)
When mirror image for double turrets function is used, specify the distance between the double turrets.
Millimeter system
IS-A
0.01
Increment
IS-B
0.001
IS-C
0.0001
unit
mm
Data range : -99999999 ~ +99999999
5001
IO I/F NO. (RS232C 1)
Specify the
I/O device number to be connected to the RS 232C interface 1. Set the device
specifications corresponding to I/O device number 1 to 6 in parameter 5110~5162.
Data range : 1~6
5002
IO I/F NO. (RS232C 2)
Same as 5001
5110
DEVICE NUMBER 1
Specify the specification number of I/O device corresponding to device number 1. The relationships
between specifications numbers and I/O devices are follows:
Spec.No
1
2
3
4
I/O device specifications
Use control codes(DC1~DC4) and punch a feed
Use no control codes (DC1~DC4) and punch a feed
Use control codes(DC1~DC4) and punch no feed
Use no control codes(DC1~DC4) and punch no feed
Data range : 1~4
7-38
2. SENTROL2
5111
STOP BITS 1
Specify the number of stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 1.
Data range : 1~2
5112
BAUD RATE 1
Specify the baud rate of I/O device corresponding with device number 1.
The relationship between set value and I/O device is as follows;
Set value
BAUD RATE (BPS)
5120
8
1200
9
2400
10
4800
11
9600
12
19200
13
38400
DEVICE NUMBER 2
Specify the specification number of I/O device corresponding to device number 2.
Data range : 1~4
5121
STOP BITS 2
Specify the number of stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 2.
Data range : 1~2
5122
BAUD RATE 2
Specify the baud rate of I/O device corresponding with device number 2.
Data range : 8~13
5130
DEVICE NUMBER 3
Specify the specification number of I/O device corresponding to device number 3.
Data range : 1~4
5131
STOP BITS 3
Specify the number of stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 3
Data range : 1~2
5132
BAUD RATE 3
Specify the baud rate of I/O device corresponding with device number 3.
Data range : 8~13
7-39
PARAMETER
Chapter 7 Parameter
5140
DEVICE NUMBER 4
Specify the specification number of I/O device corresponding to device number 4.
Data range : 1~4
5141
STOP BITS 4
Specify the number of stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 4
Data range : 1~2
5142
BAUD RATE 4
Specify the baud rate of I/O device corresponding with device number 4.
Data range : 8~13
5150
DEVICE NUMBER 5
Specify the specification number of I/O device corresponding to device number 5.
Data range : 1~4
5151
STOP BITS 5
Specify the number stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 5.
Data range : 1~2
5152
BAUD RATE 5
Specify the baud rate I/O device corresponding with device number 5.
Data range : 8~13
5160
DEVICE NUMBER 6
Specify the specification number of I/O device corresponding to device number 6.
Data range : 1~4
5161
STOP BITS 6
Specify the number of stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 6.
Data range : 1~2
5162
BAUD RATE 6
Specify the baud rate of I/O device corresponding with device number 6.
Data range : 8~13
7-40
2. SENTROL2
7
6
5
4
3
5200
2
1
POT
PCO
PARAMETER
0
OUT
(L)
POT
1: For G2.7 signal, converting the forbidden area is validated.
0: For G2.7 signal, converting the forbidden area is invalidated.
PCO
1 : Check soft over limit travel in advance before the movement.
0 : Do not check soft over limit travel in advance before the movement.
OUT
1 : Exterior is inhibited area for stored stroke limit 3.
0 : Interior is inhibited area for stored stroke limit 3.
7
6
5
4
3
5210
OT1
OT3
2
1
0
OT1
OT3
OT2
1: STORED STROKE LIMIT 1 is not checked for each axis.
0: STORED STROKE LIMIT 1 is checked for each axis.
1 : Stored stroke limit 3 is checked for each axis.
0 : Stored stroke limit 3 is not checked for each axis.
OT2
1 : Stored stroke limit 2 is checked for each axis.
0 : Stored stroke limit 2 is not checked for each axis.
STROKE LIMIT 1 VALUE +
5220
Specify stored stroke limit 1 positive(+) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for
each axis.
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.01
0.001
0.0001
unit
mm
deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999
STROKE LIMIT 1 VALUE -
5221
Specify stored stroke limit 1 negative (-) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for
each axis.
Linear axis
Rotary axis
IS-A
0.01
0.01
Increment system
IS-B
IS-C
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
Data range : -99999999~99999999
7-41
unit
mm
deg
Chapter 7 Parameter
STROKE LIMIT 2 VALUE +
5222
Specify stored stroke limit 2 positive coordinate value in machine coordinate system for each axis
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.01
0.001
0.0001
unit
mm
deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999
STROKE LIMIT 2 VALUE -
5223
Specify stored stroke limit 2 negative(-) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for
each axis.
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.01
0.001
0.0001
unit
mm
deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999
STROKE LIMIT 3 VALUE +
5224
(L)
Specify stored limit 3 positive(+) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for each
axis.
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.01
0.001
0.0001
unit
mm
deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999
STROKE LIMIT 3 VALUE -
5225
(L)
Specify stored stroke limit 3 negative (-) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for
each axis.
Linear axis
Rotary axis
IS-A
0.01
0.01
Increment
IS-B
0.001
0.001
Data range : -99999999~99999999
7-42
IS-C
0.0001
0.0001
Unit
mm
deg
2. SENTROL2
5226
PARAMETER
STROKE LIMIT 1_2 VALUE +
If G2.7 is 1, set up the + direction coordinate values for the STORED STROKE LIMIT 1_2 for each
axis.
Linear axis
Rotary axis
Setup Unit
IS-B
0.001
0.001
IS-A
0.01
0.01
IS-C
0.0001
0.0001
Unit
Mm
Deg
Setup value: -99999999~99999999
5227
STROKE LIMIT 1_2 VALUE -
If G2.7 is 1, set up the - direction coordinate values for STORED STROKE LIMIT 1 for each axis.
Linear axis
Rotary axis
IS-A
0.01
0.01
Setup Unit
IS-B
0.001
0.001
IS-C
0.0001
0.0001
Unit
mm
deg
Setup value: -99999999~99999999
5420
PITCH ERROR OF R POINT
Specify the pitch error compensation point number corresponding to reference point of each axis.
Data range : 0~639
5421
PITCH ERROR NEAREST -
Specify the pitch error compensation point number nearest the “-“ end of each axis.
Data range : 0~639
5422
PITCH ERROR NEAREST +
Specify the pitch error compensation point number nearest the “+” end of each axis.
Data range : 0 ~ 639
7-43
Chapter 7 Parameter
7
PDC
5603
PDC
6
P20
(L)
5
RPR
4
MDR
3
PDR
2
PP1
1
PP0
0
RSC
1 : Disconnection of position coder is not detected.
0 : Disconnection of position coder is detected.
P20
1 : Spindle position coder for lathe(for feed/rev.calc.) is 2000PPR type.
0 : Spindle position coder for lathe(for feed/rev.calc.) is 1024PPR type.
RPR
1 : When starting rigid tapping operation, spindle orientation is not performed first.
0 : When starting rigid tapping operation, spindle orientation is performed first
MDR
1 : When the analog speed command for spindle is +voltage, spindle turns CCW.
0 : When the analog speed command for spindle is +voltage, spindle turns CW. By changing
this parameter from 0->1 for 1->0 the necessary spindle rotation direction for rigid tapping
separation can be matched easily
PDR
1 : Spindle position coder pulse direction for CW spindle rotation is CCW.
0 : Spindle position coder pulse direction for CW spindle rotation is CW.
PP1, PP0
Select the right pulse per rotation
PP1
0
0
1
1
Setting for the rigid tapping pos.
Coder according the right table.
RSC
PP0
0
1
0
1
No. of pulse
256PPR
512PPR
1024PPR
2048PPR
1 : The constant surface speed control in rapid traverse(G00) is calculated based on the
position at the end point of the block.
0 : The constant surface speed control in rapid traverse(G00) is calculated based on the
current position of the tool.
7
6
5
4
5605
AN2
3
2
AN2
AN1
1
IDM
(L)
1 : ANALOG output2(PNC2 #2)is valid
0 : ANALOG output2(PNC2 #2)is invalid
AN1
1 : ANALOG output1(PNC2 #1)is valid.
0 : ANALOG output1(PNC2 #1)is invalid.
IDM
1 : Positioning direction for spindle positioning M-code is minus.
0 : Positioning direction for spindle positioning M-code is plus.
IOR
1 : Spindle positioning mode is not cancelled by spindle pos. reset.
0 : Spindle positioning mode is cancelled by spindle pos. reset.
7-44
0
IOR
(L)
2. SENTROL2
5614
PARAMETER
SPINDLE GAIN ADJUSTMENT
Set the position loop gain for spindle and Z-axis at rigid tapping.
Data range : 0~4000
5615
Unit : 0.01/SEC
SPINDLE ORIENT SPEED
Set the position shift amount for spindle orientation at rigid tapping operation start.
Data range : 10~500
5616
Unit : rpm
SPINDLE RP SHIFT
Set the position shift amount for spindle orientation at rigid tapping operation start.
Data range : 0~4095
5640
Unit : Detection Unit
CONST SURFACE SPEED CTRL
Specify the axis number for the constant surface speed control.
Data range : 0~3
* If 0 is set, constant surface speed control is performed on the X axis.
5680
M SPINDLE ORIENTATION
Set M code for spindle orientation command.
Data range : 6~97
5681
M CANCEL POSITIONING
Specify the M-code number, which cancels the spindle orientation and establishes normal spindle
speed control mode.
Data range : 6~97
5682
M SPINDLE POSITIONING BY M
Specify the initial M-code of the
“spindle positioning by M-code” function. Thus 6 M-code will be
established, starting with the M-code of parameter 5682, whereby the initial M-code brings about a
spindle positioning of the basic rotation angle of parameter 5683 and the all calculated from the
orientation 0-point.
Data range : 6~92
5683
BASIC ROTATION ANGLE
Specify the basic rotation angle for the “spindle positioning by M-code” function.
Data range : 1~60
Unit : DEG
7-45
Chapter 7 Parameter
5691
SRVO GAIN LOOP (GEAR1)
Set the spindle gain constant for rigid tapping Gain constant in the command voltage at 1000rpm
spindle rotation.
EX) In case the command volta
ge for 6000rpm(max.)
10 ×1000 / 6000 = 1666
Data range : 0~9999
Unit : mV
5692
SPIDLE GAIN LOOP (GEAR2)
5693
SPIDLE GAIN LOOP (GEAR3)
5694
SPIDLE GAIN LOOP (GEAR4)
5751
TIME CONSTANT (RIGID GR1)
Set the spindle and Z-axis acceleration/deceleration time for rigid tapping.
Data range : 10~1270
Unit : msec
Spindle speed
S MAX
(Parameter
No.5766)
Time
Acc./D
ec. time
5752
STOP POS ERR LIMIT
Set the allowable position error for spindle stop in rigid tapping mode. An alarm is issued when the
position error amount exceeds this limit.
Data range : 10~4000
Unit : Detection unit
standard setting : 500
7-46
2. SENTROL2
5754
PARAMETER
MOVING POS ERROR LIMIT
Set the allowable spindle moving position error for rigid tapping.
An alarm is issued and the spindle stops when the position amount exceeds that limit during rigid
tapping.
The set value is calculated as below :
Set value = 1.2 ×s ×N ×4 / (G ×60)
Whereby S : max. spindle rpm during rigid tapping
N : No. of pulse per spindle rotation (before the NC calculates them internally times 4)
G : Spindle rotation loop gain.
Data range : 100~25000
5755
Unit : Detection unit
INPOSITION WIDTH
Set the imposition width of the spindle for rigid tapping. If the difference between spindle position and
command position is smaller than the imposition width, the spindle is regarded as having reached the
command position.
Data range : 0~127
5756
Unit : Detection unit
Standard setting : 20
BACKLASH COMPEN
Set the spindle backlash compensation amount for rigid tapping.
Data range : 0~127
5757
Unit : Detection unit
M RIGID TAPPING
Specify the M-code that command rigid tapping mode.
Data range : 0~127
5758
Standard setting : 29
TAP RETURN RPM
Set rpm during rigid tapping return.
Setting value: 0~10000 Standard value : 0 (invalid)
5761
TIME CONSTANT (RIGID GR2)
Refer to 5751.
5762
TIME CONSTANT (RIGID GR3)
Refer to 5751.
5763
TIME CONSTANT (RIGID GR4)
Refer to 5751.
7-47
Chapter 7 Parameter
5766
S MAX SPEED (RIGID GR1)
Specify the maximum spindle – RPM for rigid tapping
Data range : 0~4000
Unit : RPM
5767
S MAX SPEED (RIGID GR2)
5768
S MAX SPEED (RIGID GR3)
5769
S MAX SPEED (RIGID GR4)
5770
MANUAL RIGID TAP LEAD
(M)
Set up the manual RIGID TAPPING LEAD
Setup value: -32767~32767; Unit : 0.001mm
7
OFH
(M)
6000
OFH
6
LWM
(L)
5
LD1
(L)
4
LVK
3
LXY
(M)
2
PC1
(M)
1
PNH
(M)
0
EVO
1 : “H” is used for tool radius offset.
0 : “D” is used for tool radius offset.
LWM
LD1
Not used
1 : The tool offset number is specified by low order one digit of the T code.
0 : The tool offset number is specified by low order two digits of the T code.
LVK
1 : The tool offset vector is maintained without being cleared by reset.
0 : The tool offset vector is cleared by reset.
LXY
PC1
PNH
EVO
1 : The axis, where G43, G44 tool length offset applies can be freely assigned in the parts
program.
0 : The axis, to where G43, G44 tool length offset applies, is always the Z-axis
1 : Tool offset(G45~G48) is valid for circular commands.
0 : Tool offset(G45~G48) is not valid for circular commands
1 : Tool offset(G45~G48) is commanded by “H” code.
0 : Tool offset(G45~G48) is commanded by “D” code.
1 : When the offset value is changed, the new offset value is effective from the next block
which is loaded in buffer register.
0 : When the offset value is changed, the new offset value is effective from
7-48
2. SENTROL2
7
DRZ
(M)
6001
DRZ
CNI
LGC
LGN
LWT
LGT
CNC
CSU
6
CNI
5
LGC
(L)
4
LGN
(L)
3
LWT
(L)
2
LGT
(L)
1
CNC
PARAMETER
0
CSU
1 : For dry run mode the data of parameter 6223 is added to the tool length offset
amount(add. Offset shift function)
0 : For dry run mode the data of parameter 6223 is not added to the tool length offset
amount(add. Offset shift function).
1 : Interference check is not performed for tool nose radius compensation.
0 : Interference check is performed for tool nose radius compensation.
1 : Both wear and geometry offsets are canceled when tool number 0 is specified with
parameter LGN=0 (wear offset number and geometry offset number are common).
0 : Wear offset is canceled while geometry offset is not canceled when tool number 0 is
specified with parameter LGN=0 (wear offset number and geometry offset number is
common)
1 : Lower 2 or 1 digit of T code specifies wear offset number and tool number digit(s) (3rd
digit or 2nd and higher digits of T code) specifies geometry offset number.
0 : Lower 2 or 2 digit of T code specifies geometry and wear offset numbers commonly.
1 : Tool wear offset is done by moving the tool.
0 : Tool wear offset is done by shifting work coordinate system.
1 : Tool geometry offset is done by moving the tool.
0 : Tool geometry offset is done by shifting work coordinate system.
1 : An alarm is not indicated when the programmed movement direction and the offset
movement direction differ by 90 to 270 degree in tool nose R compensation(G41, G42).
0 : An alarm is indicated when the programmed movement direction and the offset
movement direction differ by 90 to 270 degree in tool nose R compensation(G41, G42).
1 : B type is used for the start up type in tool nose R compensation(G41, G42)
0 : A type is used for the start up type in tool nose R compensation(G41,G42)
7-49
Chapter 7 Parameter
7
TMB
(L)
6002
TMB
6
OD2
5
OD1
4
OHS
(L)
3
OFE
2
ORC
(L)
1
0
K40
1 : B function is performed for direct input of measured tool offset(tool setter)
0 : A function is performed for direct input of measured tool offset(absolute).
OD2, OD1 : Specify the maximum number of the tool offset data.
OHS
OD2
OD1
No. of Data(L)
No. of Data(M)
0
0
32
32
0
1
64
99
1
0
94
200
In case direct input of measured tool offset function B in used(TMB=1) :
1 : High speed skip signal is not used when B function is performed for direct measured tool
offset(TMB=1).
0 : High speed skip signal is used when B function is performed for direct input of measured
tool offset(TMB=1).
OFE
1 : The tool path at the graphic tool path display is shown without calculation of tool length
offset(M) or tool position offset(L).
0 : The tool path at the graphic tool path display is shown including the calculation of tool
length offset(M) or tool position offset(L).
ORC
1 : Tool offset value is specified by radius value.
0 : Tool offset value is specified by diameter value.
K40
1: Even if cutter compensation cancellation is commanded following circular interpolation,
ALARM 121 will not be generated.
0: If cutter compensation cancellation is commanded following circular interpolation, ALARM
121 will be generated.
6015
TOUCH SENSOR +X (Xp)
(L)
6016
TOUCH SENSOR -X (Xm)
(L)
6017
TOUCH SENSOR +Z (Zp)
(L)
6018
TOUCH SENSOR -Z (Zm)
(L)
These parameters are referred to when B function is performed for direct input of measured tool offset.
Specify the distance from the measurement standard point to the contact face of sensor. For the
diameter designated axis, set in diameter value.
7-50
2. SENTROL2
Increment
system
METRIC unit
INCH
unit
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
PARAMETER
Data range : -99999999~99999999
6019
TOOL LENGTH BIAS
(M)
Specify the difference(bias amount) between tool and table surface for tool length offset input through
the PLC I/F
Data range : -999999~999999
6020
Standard setting : 0
LASER ON INTERVAL
(LASER SCRIBER)
Not used
6021
DRY RUN Z OFFSET
OFFSET amount for the OFFSET function of the Z axis during a DRY RUN
mm type machine
IS-A
0.01
Setup Unit
IS-B
0.001
IS-C
0.0001
Unit
mm
Setup value: 0~ +99999999
6100
CLEARANCE 1
(LASER CUTTING)
Standard setting : 1000
6101
CREARANCE 2
(LASER CUTTING)
Standard setting : 2000
6102
CREARANCE 3
(LASER CUTTING)
Standard setting : 3000
Specify the value for nominal clearance 1,2,3 for the tracing function clearance 1,2 or 3 is selected by
PLC-NC interface signals.
Data range : 0~32767
6103
Standard unit : 0.001mm
COMP. TIME 1
(LASER CUTTING)
Standard setting : 20
7-51
Chapter 7 Parameter
6104
COMP. TIME 2
(LASER CUTTING)
Standard setting : 20
Specify a “motor control offset time”, which will then be valid after the collision(=tracing) signal goes
to high(=ON). Within this specified time the motor will no move. The motor elevates the axis only if
the signal stays high longer than the specified time. Time 1 is valid when clearance 1 or 2 are selected,
time 2 is valid when clearance 3 is selected.
Data range : 0~32767
6105
Standard unit : msec
THRESHOLD
(LASER CUTTING)
Specify the threshold value for output of the “position reached” signal.
Data range : 0~32767
6106
Unit : 0.001mm
Standard setting : 1000
MEASURING RANGE
(LASER CUTTING)
Specify the distance between work and nozzle at which the sensor outputs exactly 10V
Data range : 0~32767
Unit : 0.001mm
Standard setting : 10000
6110
GAIN P
(LASER CUTTING)
Set the proportional gain for tracing operation.
Data range : 0~32767
6111
Standard setting : 500
GAIN I
(LASER CUTTING)
Set the integral gain for tracing operating.
Data range : 0~32767
Standard setting : 0
6112
GAIN D
(LASER CUTTING)
Set the differential gain for tracing operating.
Data range : 0~32767
Standard setting : 0
6113
INPOSITION WIDTH CUT
(LASER CUTTING)
Establish the allowable in-position error value for the automatic edge showdown function.
Data range : 0~25000 Unit : Detection unit(PULSE)
7
6
5
4
3
6115
TMD
TRD
TRE
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
2
TMD
(C)
1
TRD
(C)
0
TRE
(C)
The TRACING function clearance display and Macro variable are assigned (#5840).
The TRACING function clearance display and Macro variable are not assigned (#5840).
The TRACING function Motor direction is inverted.
The TRACING function Motor direction is not inverted.
The TRACING function is valid.
The TRACING function is invalid.
7-52
2. SENTROL2
6116
TRACING A/D INPUT NO
PARAMETER
(for a LASER cutter)
Set up the channel number for the ANALOG input used in the TRACING function.
Parameter setup range for each axis: 0 ~ 127
If it is 0, the TRACING function is invalid.
If 1ch for RAD1 is used for the second axis, set the second axis to 1.
If two ANALOG inputs and n, m channels are used, set up the value for the n×10+m values.
6117
TRACING P GAIN
(for LASER cutter)
Set up the proportional GAIN for the TRACING function for each axis.
Setup range: 0 ∼ 32767 setup
6120
CORNER ANGLE
(LASER CUTTING)
In C-axis tool direction control function, if the C-axis distance exceeds the setting value, tool moves
up(M50) or down(M51).
Data range : 0 ∼ 127 Unit : 1DEG
6121
ADVANCE
(LASER CUTTING)
Set tool width offset amount in C-axis tool direction control function.
Data range : 0 ∼ 32767 Unit : 0.01mm
6122
OVERCUT
(LASER CUTTING)
Set overcut amount in C-axis tool direction control function.
Data range : 0 ∼ 32767 Unit : 0.01mm
6123
CORNER ADVANCE
(LASER CUTTING)
In C-axis tool direction control function, set tool width offset amount if the tool moves up or down at
the corner.
Data range : 0 ∼ 32767 Unit : 0.01mm
6124
CORNER OVERCUT
(LASER CUTTING)
In C-axis tool direction control function, set overcut amount if the tool moves up or down at the corner.
Data range : 0 ∼ 32767 Unit : 0.01mm
6125
(CLOTH
CUTTING)
MAX DISTANCE
In cutter C-axis tool direction control function, set the maximum continuous cutting distance.
Data range : 0~32767 Unit : 0.01mm
7-53
Chapter 7 Parameter
6126
(CLOTH
CUTTING)
M17 LARGE ADVANCE
In cutter C-axis tool direction control function, set advance amount during M17 large advance.
Data range : 0~32767 Unit : 0.01mm
6130
M02 REPEAT VALUE
(C)
Set repeated value by M02 code.
Data range : 0~99
6131
KERF VALUE
(C)
Set processing kerf width of gas cutter. (Specification B)
Data range : 0~100000 Unit : 0.001mm
6132
GAS CUTTING FEED
(C)
Set processing cutting speed of gas cutter. (Specification B)
Data range : 0~32767 Unit : mm/min
6133
FEED DOWN SIGNAL LEVEL
(C)
Set up the speed limit at which the gas cutter will output a signal that the cutting speed has dropped
(Specification B).
Setup value: 0~25000 Unit: mm/min
6134
FEED DOWN LEVEL (1/100%)
(C)
Set up the speed limit at which the gas cutter will output the signal that cutting speed has dropped.
The FEED DOWN signal (F153.6) is turned ON when parameter number 6133 is “0” and if 6134
contains a value by comparing the % for the assigned FEED.
Setup value: 0~10000 Unit: 1/100%
6154
SPINDLE ZERO OFFSET
Set zero offset of D/A converter for spindle.
Data range : -32767 ~ 32767
6170
ROUGH GRIND POWER
(G)
Set target grinding force for roughing. The maximum spindle grinding force should be set to 100%.
Data range : 1~100
Unit : 1 %
7-54
2. SENTROL2
6171
PARAMETER
FINISH GRIND POWER
(G)
Set target grinding force for threading.
The maximum spindle grinding force should be set to 100%.
Data range : 1~100
Unit : 1 %
6172
GAIN KC
(G)
Set gain for finishing force control is set.
Data range : 0~32767
6173
COMPENSATION TYPE
(G)
Set compensation type of grinding stone. The maximum axis grinding force should be set to 100%
Data range : 0~2
0
Target grinding
Force
Target value of
grinding force
1
2
current
6174
CONYTOL M CODE
initial
(G)
Set the first number of the 4 M codes, which is used in finishing force control function.
Adding the above number to offset amount creates M code for each control function. There are no M
flags from M code used in finishing force control function.
Data range : 0~127
6175
GRIND POWER DI
(G)
Set up the address of the Digital input for entering the grinding force used in finish grinding force
control.
If the value is, the grinding force input for the usual specification is rendered valid.
Use analog input for EPS4 if 9010<ES4>=1.
If 9010<ES4>=0 and 9013<AD1>=1, use the analog input for CHI for RAD1.
Setup range: 0 ~ 499
7-55
Chapter 7 Parameter
6176
FULL POWER VOLTAGE
(G)
Voltage parameters for 100% grinding force (main axis load)
Setup range: 0 ~ 127
Unit: %
6177
POWER FILTER CONSTANT
(G)
Low Pass Filter for finish grinding force.
Setup range: 0 ~ 127
Unit: ms
7
V40
(M)
6200
6
5
4
3
FCU
SRP
2
SIJ
1
DWL
0
FXY
V40
1 : Tool change for TNV-40 can be commanded by T-code alone.
0 : Tool change for TNV-40 cannot be commanded by T-code alone.
SRP
1: Shift is performed by rapid traverse.
0: Shift is not performed by rapid traverse.
FCU
1 : Rapid traverse in positioning mode(G00), or linear interpolation in the mode other than
positioning mode(G01, G02, G03), is performed to move to the hole machining point in
canned cycle.
0 : Always rapid traverse is performed to move to the hole maching point in canned cycle.
SIJ
1 : After spindle orientation, the tool retract direction and movement amount are specified by
the program(I,J,K) in canned fine boring cycle and black boring cycle.
0 : After spindle orientation, the tool retract direction is set by a parameter #6240 and the
movement amount is specified by program (Q) in canned fine boring cycle and black
boring cycle.
DWL
1 : Dwell command by P is effective in canned tapping cycle.
0 : Dwell command by P is invalid in canned tapping cycle.
FXY
1 : Hole machining axis in canned cycle is selected by a program.
0 : Hole machining axis in canned cycle is always Z axis.
7
6
5
4
3
6201
MN5
2
1
0
MN5
1 : Among the boring canned cycles, M05 is not output before M19,M03 and M04 are output.
Applied G code : G74, G76, G84, G87
0 : Among the boring canned cycles, M05 is output before M19,M03 and M04 are output.
Applied G code : G74, G76, G84, G87
7-56
2. SENTROL2
6202
7
6
5
TPK
ABS
FCK
4
3
2
OAC
1
NRC
(L)
PARAMETER
0
MOR
(L)
TPK 1: In automatic operation MODE, the design screen is maintained, with manual operation and
handle operation selected.
0: In automatic operation MODE, the design screen is not maintained, with manual operation
and handle operation selected.
ABS
1 : Graphic tool path is displayed according to absolute coordinates.
0 : Graphic tool path is displayed according to machine coordinates.
FCK
1 : Feed check function on the graphic screen enabled.
0 : Feed check function on the graphic screen disenabled.
OAC
1: Tool length offset(lath: tool position offset) during G28/G30 mode will be automatically
cancelled.
0: Tool length offset(lath : tool position offset) during G28/G30 mode will cause “109 rpr in
tool offset” alarm.
NRC
1 : Tool length offset
Finishing for the roughing is not performed at the end of roughing cycle (G71, G72).
0 : Finishing for the roughing is performed at the end of roughing cycle (G71,G72).
MOR
1 : Turning cycle is performed in a block where no movement command, during the canned
turning cycle mode.
0 : Turning cycle is not performed in a block where no movement command, during the
canned turning cycle mode.
7
6
5
4
3
6203
Not used
6205
SPEED COLORING MAX
6206
SPEED COLORING LEVEL
Not used
7-57
2
1
0
Chapter 7 Parameter
6210
RETURN AMOUNT G73
Specify the return amount in canned cycle G73.
Increment
system
METRIC unit
INCH
unit
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Data range : 0~99999999
d : return amount
(X, Y)
Initial point
R point
Q
d
Q
d
Z point
6211
CLEARANCE AMOUNT G83
Specify the clearance amount in canned cycle G83.
Increment
system
METRIC unit
INCH
unit
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Data range : 0~99999999
(X,Y)
d : clearance amount
Initial point
R point
Q
Q
d
d
7-58
Z point
2. SENTROL2
6212
PARAMETER
CHAMFERING AMOUNT
(L)
Specify the chamfering amount in the thread cutting cycle(G76,G92).
Data range : 0~127
6213
Unit : 0.1 pitch
CHAMFERING ANGLE
(L)
Specify the chamfering angle in the thread cutting cycle.
Data range : 0~60
6215
Unit : 1 deg
RETRACT AMOUNT G71 G72
(L)
Specify the retract amount in the roughing cycle (G71,G72).
Increment
system
METRIC unit
INCH
unit
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Data range : 0~32767
6216
CLEARANCE AMOUNT G71 G72
(L)
Specify the clearance amount in the roughing cycle(G71,G72)
Increment
system
METRIC unit
INCH
unit
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Data range : 0~32767
6217
RETURN AMOUNT G74 G75
(L)
Specify the return amount in the peck drilling cycle (G74) or the grooving cycle. (G75).
Increment
system
METRIC unit
INCH
unit
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Data range : 0~32767
7-59
Chapter 7 Parameter
6218
MINMUM INFEED G76
(L)
Specify the minimum infeed amount in the thread cutting cycle(G76).
When the infeed amount of one pass in the thread cutting cycle(G76) becomes smaller than the
minimum infeed amount set by this parameter, the infeed amount is clamped at the minimum infeed
amount.
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Unit
METRIC unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
INCH
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
unit
Data range : 0~32767
6219
(L)
FINISH ALLOWANCE G76
Specify the finish allowance in the thread cutting cycle(G76)
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Unit
METRIC unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
INCH
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
unit
Data range : 0~32767
6220
(L)
SPARK OUT G76
Specify the number of spark out cut in the thread cutting cycle.
Data range : 0~255
6221
(L)
DEPTH OF CUT G71 G72
Specify the depth of cut in the roughing cycle(G71,G72).
Data range : 1~99999999 (see “Data unit” of parameter #6219)
6222
(L)
RELIEF AMOUNT I G73
Specify the relief values in X axis direction in the cutting cycle(G73).
Data range : -99999999~99999999 (See “Data unit” of parameter #6219)
6223
RELIEF AMOUNT K G73
(L)
Specify the relief in Z axis direction in the cutting cycle(G73).
Data range : -99999999~99999999 (See “Data unit” of parameter #6219)
6224
NUMBER OF DIVISIONS G73
(L)
Specify the number of divisions in the cutting cycle(G73)
Data range : 1~99999999
7-60
2. SENTROL2
6225
TOOL NOSE ANGLE G76
PARAMETER
(L)
Specify the tool nose angle in the thread cutting cycle.
Data range : 0~120
6226
unit : deg
INPOSITION WIDTH Z AXIS
(M)
Specify the Z-axis inposition width to be applied after finishing one cycle of the canned drilling cycle as
a condition to start positioning in the XY-plane for the next drilling cycle.
Data range : 0~25000
6240
Standard setting : 1000
TOOL RETRACT DIRECTION
Orientate the spindles of the canned cycle G76 (G86.1 for lathe system) and G87, and then set the
axes and directions that the tool retracts. Or, correspond to each boring axis to set such axes and
directions after the orientation. The set value is specified to axis number, while ± signs to direction.
Setting value : -8 ~ +8
Ex.) If X-axis is the boring axis, tool retracts in –Y direction after the spindle is oriented,
Y-axis is the boring axis, tool retracts in +Z direction after the spindle is oriented, and
Z-axis is the boring axis, tool retracts in –X direction after the spindle is oriented. Set as below.
(The first, second and third axis should be X, Y and Z respectively.)
For parameter of the first axis, –2 (the tool retracts in –Y direction.)
For parameter of the second axis, 3 (the tool retracts in +Z direction.)
For parameter of the third axis, –1 (the tool retracts in –X direction.)
In other than cases mentioned above, Set to 0.
7
PDM
6400
PDM
PBM
GLS
AB2
FD2
6
PBM
5
GLS
4
AB2
3
FD2
2
FPS
1
SCR
(M)
1 : Display pattern input screen in modes of zero return, manual operation or handle
operation.
0 : Do not display pattern input screen in a mode of zero return, manual operation or handle
operation.
1 : Use screen only for point boring. (From No. O6000 to O6999)
0 : Do not use screen only for point boring.
1 : Use screen only for glass scribing. (From No. O5000 to O5999)
0 : Do not use the screen only for glass scribing.
1 : Communicate with absolute encoder through COM2.
0 : Communicate with absolute encoder through COM1.
1 : RS232C No. 2 is used to connect the floppy disk unit.
0 : RS232C No.1 is used to connect the floppy disk unit.
FPS
SCR
0
RIN
(M)
1: There is no FILE extension for the USER FLOPPY DISK (O1234).
0: The FILE extension for the USER FLOPPY DISK is .nc (O1234.nc).
1 : The unit for the scaling factor is multiplied by 0.001
0 : The unit for the scaling factor is multiplied by 0.0001
7-61
Chapter 7 Parameter
RIN
1 : The angle command for coordinate system rotation(G68) is different for absolute(G90)
and incremental(G91) command mode.
0 : The angle command(R) for coordinate system rotation(G68) is always an absolute one.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ALY
CPN
ALF
XSC
PDS
SAW
FDD
ASN
(C)
(C)
(C)
(M)
6401
ALF
CPN
ALF
PDS
SAW
FDD
1 : Alignment function. Set the first and second points as a point on Y-axis.
0 : Alignment function. Set the first and second points as a point on X-axis.
1 : Use pattern data for gas cutting.
0 : Do not use pattern data for gas cutting.
1 : Use alignment function for gas cutting.
0 : Do not use alignment function for gas cutting.
1 : Display pattern input screen with AUTO mode selected.
0 : Do not display pattern input screen with AUTO selected.
1 : Use screen only for the first axis running saw.
0 : Do not use screen only for the first axis running saw.
1 : The Floppy Disk Drive unit is used.
0 : The Floppy Disk Drive unit is not used.
ASN
1 : The automatic sequence No. geration function is valid.
0 : The automatic sequence No. geration function is not valid.
XSC
1 : Scaling factor is commanded with “I,J,K”.(Scaling and mirror image are valid for each
axis.)
0 : Scaling factor is commanded with “P”
6402
RSD
RTC
RT2
EX9
EX8
ALC
NSR
7
RSD
(C)
6
RTC
(C)
5
TR2
(C)
4
3
EX9
EX8
2
ALC
(C)
1
0
NSR
PPR
1: From the automatic operation program screen, gas cutting DATA is displayed on the right.
The following must be satisfied prior to use: 2202 HCH=1, 6401 CPN=0.
0: From the automatic operation program screen, gas cutting DATA is not displayed on the
right.
1: The path is indicated in advance on the design screen.
0: The path is not indicated in advance on the design screen.
1: From the design screen preview function, the compensating value for the path is rendered
invalid.
0: From the design screen preview function, the compensating value for the path is rendered
valid.
1: Hide the program after O9000 in the table.
0: Do not hide the program after O9000 in the table.
1: Hide the program after O8000 in the table.
0: Do not hide the program after O8000 in the table.
1: The Align function is rendered invalid.
0: The Align function is rendered valid.
Function to RESTART from sequence number #699 for the macro variable #698 program
7-62
2. SENTROL2
PPR
6403
DDM
CSC
CRC
BM4
PAC
SP2
SP1
J0S
PARAMETER
1: Rendered valid
0: Rendered invalid
1: The position return function is rendered valid.
0: The position return function is rendered invalid.
7
6
DDM
CSC
5
CRC
(C)
4
3
2
1
0
BM4
PAC
SJ2
SJ1
J0S
1: From the disk, delete the CODE that cannot be displayed during NC program input.
0: From the disk, do not delete the CODE that cannot be displayed during NC program input.
1: The CHECK SUM function is rendered valid.
0: The CHECK SUM function s rendered invalid.
1: When entering a circular arc, cutter compensation is allowed.
0: When entering a circular arc, cutter compensation is not allowed.
1: In the illustrated table for the machining setup, display 4 figures in one screen.
0: In the illustrated table for the machining setup, display 16 figures in one screen.
1: For PLC axis setup, the PLC G ADDRESS has higher priority than the parameter.
0: For PLC axis setup, the parameter has higher priority than the PLC G ADDRESS.
1: For special diagnosis, carry out INTERRUPT diagnosis.
0: For special diagnosis, carry out reference point return diagnosis.
For special diagnosis
1: Display the “POS SET” menu on the manual operation position screen and make the
corresponding 0SET valid.
0: Do not display the “POS SET” menu on the manual operation position screen.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PIO
TPA
6404
SWD
RTT
CGP
AE3
AE2
AE1
(PNC)
(E)
PIO
Reserved
RTT
1: The movement for the RETURN function is carried out in a straight line.
0: The movement for the RETURN function is carried out one axis at a time.
CGP
1: From the GAS cutter PATTERN A TYPE, PLC TIMER is used.]
0: From the GAS cutter PATTERN A TYPE, MACRO is used.]
TPA
Reserved
AE3/AE2/AE1
Assign the ABSOLUTE ENCODER type (MAKER).
000: Use Panasonic.
001: Use YASKWA.
7-63
Chapter 7 Parameter
6405
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EFN
PTC
SWR
VAR
MSG
MNG
PAD
TPN
EFN
1: From the Program edit screen, the file operation function is used.
0: From the Program edit screen, the file operation function is not used.
PTC
1: From the Program edit screen, the partial copy function is used.
0: From the Program edit screen, the partial copy function is not used.
SVR
1: From the servo waveform, the ANALOG input voltage is used.
0: From the servo waveform, the ANALOG input voltage is not used.
VAR 1: From the servo waveform, the ANALOG input voltage is displayed/ expanded automatically.
0: From the servo waveform, the ANALOG input voltage is not displayed/ expanded
automatically.
MSG 1: The machine state display function is rendered valid (RUNNING SAW).
0: The machine state display function is rendered invalid (RUNNING SAW).
MNG 1: Activate for the manager (RUNNING SAW).
0: Activate for the operator (RUNNING SAW).
PAD
1: The KeyPad display is used (RUNNING SAW).
0: The KeyPad display is not used (RUNNING SAW).
PTN
1: The TOUCH PANEL is used (RUNNING SAW).
0: The TOUCH PANEL is not used (RUNNING SAW).
6406
7
6
USB
CPS
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWE
ADM
SPN
USB
1: The USB Memory Access Control Program Control MENU is displayed.
0: The USB Memory Access Control Program Control MENU is not displayed.
CPS:
1: Use the machining setup screen G-CODE generation function.
0: Do not use the machining setup screen G-CODE generation function.
SWE 1: From the Running Saw dedicated screen, the automatic operation mark is shaped like a panel.
0: From the Running Saw dedicated screen, the automatic operation mark is shaped like a
machine.
ADM 1: Carry out Demo operation according to the File “DmyInput” content.
0: Do not carry out Demo operation.
SPN
1: Use the Special screen for the Touch Panel.
0: Do not use the Special screen for the Touch Panel.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6407
Not used
6408
Not used
6409
Not used
7-64
2. SENTROL2
6410
PARAMETER
MAGNIFICATIONS P G51
(M)
Specify the (G51) scaling factor P.
Data range : 1~99999999
6411
Unit : 0.001 or 0.00001 according to parameter #6400, SCR
ROTATION ANGLE R G68
(M)
Specify the rotation angle for G68 coordinate system rotation.
Data range : -360000~360000
6421
Unit : 0.001 DEG
MAGNIFICATIONS G51
(M)
Specify the rotation angle for G68 coordinate system rotation.
Data range : -999999~999999
6500
Unit : 0.001 or 0.00001 according to parameter #6400, SCR
TYPE OF SAVE DATA
From the function that saves the internal DATA (MACRO, DATATABLE, RELAY, and COUNTER)
in a FILE when G257.0 is ON in SENTROL2, set up the DATA.
0 : No DATA to save
1 : Save the MACRO DATA.
2 : Save the DATATABLE.
3 : Save the RELAY.
4 : Save the COUNTER.
6501
NUMBER OF SAVE DATA
Set up the DATA number and Number of Bytes (for the PLC DATA) assigned by 6500.
MACRO DATA: MACRO number
DATATABLE, RELAY, COUNTER: Number of Bytes * 1000 + DATA number
6610
CORNER OVERRIDE MIN
(M)
Specify the minimum federate for deceleration(MDR) during inner circular cutting in automatic corner
override mode.
Data range : 1~100
6611
Unit : %
Standard setting : 1
CORNER OVERRIDE ANGLE
(M)
Specify the inner angle of the inside corner part for automatic corner override.
Data range : 1~89
Unit : 2 deg
Standard setting : 46
7-65
Chapter 7 Parameter
6612
CORNER OVERRIDE VALUE
(M)
Deceleration ratio for automatic corner override at an inner corner part. Specify the override amount at
inner corner.
Data range : 1~100
6613
Unit : %
Standard setting : 50
CORNER OVERRIDE LE
(M)
End point of deceleration distance of automatic override at inner corner part.
Specify the operating range LE. Unit
Increment
system
METRIC unit
INCH
6614
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Unit
1
0.1
0.01
mm
0.1
0.01
0.001
inch
unit
CORNER OVERRIDE LS
(M)
Start point of deceleration distance of automatic override at inner corner part. Specify the operating
range LS.
Data range : 1~4000
Unit : Refer to unit table of parameters 6613
6616
CIRCLE ERROR LIMIT
(M)
Establish the allowable radius error in circular motion cutting for automatic feed clamp calculation.
Data range : 1~4000
Increment system
6620
IS-A
0.01
IS-B
0.001
IS-C
0.0001
Unit
mm
NO CUTTING SPEED OVERRIDE
Set to 0 or override speed for parts without cutting.
6820
AMOUNT / DIRCETION (G60)
Set the approach amount and direction for (G60) single direction position. Direction is decided
according to the + or – sign of the data and the amount by the data itself.
Linear axis
Rotary axis.
Data range : -32767~32767
IS-A
0.01
0.01
Increment
IS-B
0.001
0.001
7-66
IS-C
0.0001
0.0001
Unit
mm
deg
2. SENTROL2
7
6
5
4
3
6901
PCM
IGP
6910
2
PCM
1
PARAMETER
0
IGP
1: Output the signal by calculating the acceleration/deceleration and servo delay.
0: Output the signal without calculating the acceleration/deceleration and servo delay.
1: The POSITION SWITCH function is rendered valid.
0: The POSITION SWITCH function is rendered invalid.
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 1
Set up the POSITION SWITCH 1 target axis number.
If the setup value is 0, POSITION SWITCH 1 is rendered invalid.
Setup value: 0~8, 16 (maximum number of axes to control)
6911
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 2
6912
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 3
6913
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 4
6914
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 5
6915
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 6
6916
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 7
6917
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 8
6918
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 9
6919
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 10
6920
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 11
6921
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 12
6922
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 13
6923
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 14
7-67
Chapter 7 Parameter
6924
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 15
6925
AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 16
6930
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 1
Set up the maximum value for the POSITION SWITCH 1 target axis setup range.
Setup value: -99999999 ~ 99999999
6931
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 2
6932
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 3
6933
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 4
6934
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 5
6935
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 6
6936
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 7
6937
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 8
6938
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 9
6939
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 10
6940
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 11
6941
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 12
6942
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 13
6943
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 14
6944
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 15
6945
MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 16
7-68
2. SENTROL2
6950
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 1
Set up the minimum value for the POSITION SWITCH 1 target axis setup range.
Setup value: -99999999 ~ 99999999
6951
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 2
6952
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 3
6953
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 4
6954
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 5
6955
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 6
6956
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 7
6957
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 8
6958
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 9
6959
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 10
6960
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 11
6961
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 12
6962
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 13
6963
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 14
6964
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 15
6965
MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 16
‘
7-69
PARAMETER
Chapter 7 Parameter
7000
PRT
MCM
BCS
SCS
TCS
7
6
PRT
MCM
5
4
3
2
1
0
BCS
SCS
TCS
1 : When outputting Dprint macro space, (blank) is output.
0 : When outputting Dprint macro space, (blank) is not output.
1 : At the program call by M-code method 09006-09009 are called by macro calls (parameter
designation possible).
0 : At the program call by M-code method 09006-09009 are called by sub program calls.
1 : Custom macro (subprogram) is called by B code.
0 : Custom macro (subprogram) is not called by B code.
1 : Custom macro (subprogram) is called by S code.
0 : Custom macro (subprogram) is not called by S code.
1 : Custom macro (subprogram) is called by T code.
0 : Custom macro (subprogram) is not called by T code.
7
6
5
7002
MIN
TSE
MPR
MUS
7010
4
3
2
1
0
MIN
TSE
MPR
-
MUS
1 : Block end interrupt.
0 : Block stop interrupt.
1 : Status trigger.
0 : Edge trigger.
1 : Specify M code with macro interrupt ON/OFF.
0 : Use M96/M97.
1 : Macro interrupt is on.
0 : Macro Interrupt is off.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
*7
*6
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
*0
Not used.
7011
Not used.
7011
Not used.
7012
Not used.
7013
Not used.
7-70
2. SENTROL2
7014
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
=7
=6
=5
=4
=3
=2
=1
=0
Not used.
7033
MACRO INTERRUPT ON M CODE
M code number with macro interrupt ON
7034
MACRO INTERRUPT OFF M CODE
M code number with macro interrupt OFF
7050
G CALLING NO.9010
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9010
Data range : -255~255
7051
G CALLING NO.9011
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9011
Data range : -255~255
7052
G CALLING NO.9012
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9012
Data range : -255~255
7053
G CALLING NO.9013
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9013
Data range : -255~255
7054
G CALLING NO.9014
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9014
Data range : -255~255
7-71
PARAMETER
Chapter 7 Parameter
7055
G CALLING NO.9015
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9015
Data range : -255~255
7056
G CALLING NO.9016
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9016
Data range : -255~255
7057
G CALLING NO.9017
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9017
Data range : -255~255
7058
G CALLING NO.9018
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9018
Data range : -255~255
7059
G CALLING NO.9019
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9019
Data range : -255~255
7071
M CALLING NO.9001
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9001.
Data range : 0~9999
7072
M CALLING NO.9002
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9002.
Data range : 0~9999
7073
M CALLING NO.9003
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9003.
Data range : 0~9999
7074
M CALLING NO.9004
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9004.
Data range : 0~9999
7-72
2. SENTROL2
PARAMETER
제7장
7075
M CALLING NO.9005
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9005
Data range : 0~9999
7076
M CALLING NO.9006
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9006
Data range : 0~9999
7077
M CALLING NO.9007
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9007
Data range : 0~9999
7078
M CALLING NO.9008
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9008
Data range : 0~9999
7079
M CALLING NO.9009
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9009
Data range : 0~9999
7110
DRY RUN PROGRAM RESTART
Specify the axis order to move to the restart position in dry run at program restart.
Data range : 1~8
Note) For axis numbers please refer to parameter 1020.
7
7200
SFP
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SFP
HSS
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1
1 : The feedrate of the skip function using high speed skip signal is set by
parameter(#7211~#7214).
0 : The feedrate of the skip function using high speed skip signal is set by
commanded F-code in program.
*This parameter set is valid only if HSS is set to “1”
*If high speed skip signal is not used but normal skip signal is used,
refer to parameter #1400 SKF and #1428.
HSS
1 : High speed skip signal is used in skip function.
0 : High speed skip signal is not used in skip function.
7-73
Chapter 7 Parameter
DS1~DS4 : Set which skip signal is valid to dwell command of G04.
The signals and the bits match as follows.
1 : Skip signal is valid
0 : Skip signal is invalid
7201
Conventional type
skip signal
High speed
skip signal
BIT
name
SKIP1
SKIP
DS1
SKIP2
None
DS2
SKIP3
None
DS3
SKIP4
None
DS4
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2S4
2S3
2S2
2S1
1S4
1S3
1S2
1S1
1S1~1S4 : Set which skip signal is valid to skip commands of G31 or G31.1
Set the value to 1 to make the signal valid
The skip signals and the bits match as follows.
Conventional type
skip signal
SKIP1
High speed
skip signal
SKIP
BIT
name
1S1
SKIP2
None
1S2
SKIP3
None
1S3
SKIP4
None
1S4
2S1~2S4 : Set which skip signal is valid to skip commands of G31.2.
The skip signals and the bits match as follows.
Conventional type
skip signal
SKIP1
High speed
skip signal
SKIP
BIT
name
2S1
SKIP2
None
2S2
SKIP3
None
2S3
SKIP4
None
2S4
7-74
2. SENTROL2
7202
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4S4
4S3
4S2
4S1
3S4
3S3
3S2
3S1
PARAMETER
3S1~3S4 : Set which skip signal is valid to skip commands of G31.3
Set the value to 1 to make the signal valid. The skip signals and the bits
match as follow.
Conventional type
skip signal
SKIP1
High speed
skip signal
SKIP
BIT
name
3S1
SKIP2
None
3S2
SKIP3
None
3S3
SKIP4
None
3S4
4S1~4S4 : Set which skip signal is valid to skip commands of G31.4.
The skip signals and the bits match as follows.
Conventional type
skip signal
SKIP1
High speed
skip signal
SKIP
BIT
name
4S1
SKIP2
None
4S2
SKIP3
None
4S3
SKIP4
None
4S4
7211
FEEDRATE (G31. G31. 1)
7212
FEEDRATE (G31. 2)
7213
FEEDRATE (G31. 3)
7214
FEEDRATE (G31. 4)
Set skip function feeerate for each G code. These parameters are valid when the
parameter #7200 SFP is set to “1”
Increment system
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
10.0
1.0
0.1
10.0
1.0
0.1
Linear axis
Rotary axis
unit
mm/min.
deg/min.
Data range : 0~32767
7
6
5
4
7300
AMH
3
2
1
0
AMH
MDC
1 : High speed skip signal is used for automatic tool offset(G37).
0 : High speed skip signal is not used for automatic tool offset(G37).
MDC
1 : Add the tool measured amount to the current offset amount.
0 : Subtract the tool measured amount from the current offset amount.
7-75
Chapter 7 Parameter
7311
MEASUREMENT FEEDRATE 1
Set the measurement feedrate of tool measurement 1(G37.1)
7312
MEASUREMENT FEEDRATE 2
Set the measurement feedrate of tool measurement2(G37.2)
7313
MEASUREMENT FEEDRATE 3
Set the measurement feedrate of tool measurement 3(G37.3)
Increment
system
Linear axis
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
unit
10.0
1.0
0.1
mm/min
Data range : 1~6000
7321
GAMMA VALUE 1
Set the gamma value of tool measurement 1(G37.1)
7322
GAMMA VALUE 2
Set the gamma value of tool measurement 2(G37.2)
7323
GAMMA VALUE 3
Set the gamma value of tool measurement 3(G37.3)
Increment
system
Linear
axis(metric)
Linear axis(inch)
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Data range : -99999999~99999999
Note 1) X axis takes the radius value.
Note 2) Set the value larger than the epsilon value which is set to the parameter.
7331
EPSILON VALUE 1
Set the epsilon value of tool measurement 1(G37.1)
7332
EPSILON VALUE 2
Set the epsilon value of tool measurement 2(G37.2)
7-76
2. SENTROL2
7333
PARAMETER
EPSILON VALUE 3
Set the epsilon value of tool measurement 3(G37.3)
Increment
system
Linear axis(mm)
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
Unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Linear axis(inch)
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Data range : -99999999~99999999
Note) X axis takes the radius value.
7
7400
ABT
SNG
PAG
LTM
SIG
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ABT
SNG
PAG
LTM
SIG
GS2
GS1
1 : An alarm is issued for tool change method A when the group of the
return tool number is not the same as the group currently in use.
0 : No alarm is issued for tool change method A, even though the group of
the return tool number is not the same as the group currently in use.
1 : The tool skip signal is accepted only while the tool life managed tool is
in use.
0 : The tool skip signal is accepted for tools of the designated group on the
group used before(refer to parameter 7400 “SIG”).
1 : All group execution data are cleared when the tool reset signal is input.
0 : Only the execution data of the group designated(from outside or through
MDI) are cleared, when the tool reset signal is input.
1 : Tool life is specified by time
0 : Tool life is specified by frequency of tool use.
1 : At the time of tool skip signal input, the group No. is also entered.
0 : At the time of tool skip signal input, the current group is skipped.
GS1, GS2 : Specify the number of registerable groups together with the
number of tools per group according to the table below.
GS2
GS1
No. of groups
No. of tools/group
0
0
16
16
0
1
32
8
1
0
64
4
1
1
128
2
7-77
Chapter 7 Parameter
7
6
5
4
3
2
7401
1
CT2
(M)
0
CT1
(M)
CT1, CR2 : Specify the tool change method for tool life monitoring according to the
table below
7440
CT2
CT1
0
0
Tool change
method
A
0
1
B
1
0
C
1
1
D
TOOL LIFE IGNORE 0 ~ 9999
(M)
Specify a number which will be substracted from any commanded tool number with
a bigger value than this number, and the remaining value then becoming the tool
group number in tool life management
Data range : 0~9999
7470
MASTER AXIS FOR SYNC
(M)
Determine to which axis synchronous control is performed if performing using
synchronous control selection signals, SYNC1, SYNC2, SYNC3 and so on.
Set master number of axis where synchronous control is to be performed.
(Ex.) Display parameter under the following condition below.
1st axis --- X-axis
2nd axis --- Y-axis
3rd axis --- Z-axis
4th axis --- U-axis
5th axis --- W-axis
If synchronous control is performed with synchronous control selection signals
SYNC4 and SYNC5, X-axis is synchronously controlled with U-axis, while Z-axis
with W-axis.
Parameter 7470 master axis for sync.
X
0
Y
0
Z
0
U
1
W
3
Make sure to set 0 to parameters 1036 and 1037 if using parameter 7470.
7-78
2. SENTROL2
7480
TWT
TPN
TDC
PDC
TDA
PDA
7481
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-
-
TWT
TPN
TDC
PDC
TDA
PDA
1: The Twin Table control function is valid.
0: The Twin Table control function is invalid.
1: During synchronized operation, invert the sign for the feedback control
amount based on the difference in Torque.
0: During synchronized operation, do not invert the sign for the feedback
control amount based on the difference in Torque.
1: During synchronized operation, control to reduce the Torque difference
between Master and Slave.
0: During synchronized operation, do not control to reduce the Torque
difference between Master and Slave.
1: During synchronized operation, control to reduce the difference in the
amount of position variation between Master and Slave.
0: During synchronized operation, do not control to reduce the difference in
the amount of position variation between Master and Slave.
1: During synchronized operation, CHECK the difference in Torque between
Master and Slave. If it exceeds the limit for Parameter 7486, display an
ALARM.
0: During synchronized operation, do not CHECK the difference in Torque
between Master and Slave.
This is valid for simple synchronized control as well.
1: During synchronized operation, CHECK the difference in the amount of
position variation between Master and Slave. If it exceeds the limit for
Parameter 7485, display an ALARM.
0: During synchronized operation, do not CHECK the difference in the
amount of position variation between Master and Slave.
This is valid for simple synchronized control as well.
SYNCRO POSITION ERR P GAIN
Position variation control proportional GAIN for each Slave axis
Setup range: 0 ~ 32767
GAIN 1 if the setup value is 256
7482
SYNCRO POSITION ERR I GAIN
Position variation control differential GAIN for each Slave axis
Setup range: 0 ~ 32767
GAIN 1 if the setup value is 256
7483
SYNCRO TORQUE P GAIN
Torque control proportional GAIN for each Slave axis
Setup range: 0 ~ 32767
GAIN 1 if the setup value is 256
7484
PARAMETER
SYNCRO TORQUE I GAIN
Torque control differential GAIN for each Slave axis
Setup range: 0 ~ 32767
GAIN 1 if the setup value is 256
7-79
Chapter 7 Parameter
7485
SYNCRO POSITION ERR LIMIT
Position variation difference limit for each Slave axis
If the position variation difference for the synchronized axis exceeds the Setup Value,
an ALARM will be generated.
If parameter 7480 <PDA> is 0, the threshold check is invalid.
Unit: Detection unit (pulse)
Setup range: 0 ~ 32767
7486
SYNCRO TORQUE LIMIT
Torque difference limit for each Slave axis
If the Torque difference for the synchronized axis exceeds the Setup Value, an
ALARM will be generated.
If parameter 7480 <TDA> is 0, the threshold check is invalid.
Unit: 4.88mV
Setup range: 0 ~ 500
7487
SYNCRO TORQUE CHANGE
Set up the Torque value to reduce the Torque difference between each Slave axis.
If the difference between the Master and Slave axes exceeds the Setup Value, control
to reduce the Torque.
Unit: 4.88mV
Setup range: 0 ~ 1000
7
6
5
7600
4
3
2
1
2A1
0
1A1
2A1 1 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is valid to the G37.2 command.
0 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is invalid to the G37.2 command.
1A1 1: High speed skip signal(SKIP) is valid to the G37.3 command.
0 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is invalid to the G37.1 command
7
6
5
4
7601
3A1
3
2
1
0
3A1
1 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is valid to the G37.3 command
0 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is invalid to the G37.3 command
7-80
2. SENTROL2
7603
OP7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OP7
OP6
OP5
OP4
OP3
OP2
OP1
OP0
PARAMETER
1 : Feed override is commanded from(MOP) machine operators panel.
0 : Feed override is commanded from DKU (display & keyboard unit).
OP6
1 : MPG pulse multiplier is selected from MOP.
0 : MPG pulse multiplier is selected from DKU
OP5
1 : MPG move axis is selected from MOP
0 : MPG move axis is selected from DKU
OP4
1 : Jog feed or rapid traverse is selected from MOP
0 : Jog feed or rapid traverse is selected from DKU
OP3
1 : Rapid traverse rate is selected from MOP.
0 : Rapid traverse rate is selected form DKU
OP2
1 : Jog feedrate is selected from MOP
0 : Jog feedrate is selected form DKU
OP1
1 : Jog feed axis is selected from MOP
0 : Jog feed axis is selected from DKU
OP0
1 : Operating mode is selected from MOP
0 : Operating mode is selected from DKU
7
7604
OPF
6
5
4
OPD
OPC
3
2
1
0
OP9
OP8
OPF
Not used
OPD
1 : The cursor display will change immediately in case one of the protect
key signals(G5.4~G5.7) changes.
0 : The cursor display will not change immediately in case one of the protect
key signals (G5.4~G5.7) changes.
OPC
1 : The override cursors on the spindle speed screen are not displayed.
0 : The override cursors on the spindle speed screen are displayed.(override
display follows the input at the PLC-NC signals G18.0-7)
OP9
1 : Software operators panel switches are not displayed in program display
mode.
0 : Software operators panel switches are displayed in program display
mode.
OP8
1 : Feed override cancel is commanded from machine operators panel.
0 : Feed override cancel is commanded from DKU (display & key board unit)
7-81
Chapter 7 Parameter
8000
7
6
TAC
STF
5
4
3
BAK
PRT
2
1
0
NPA
TAC
1: THERMAL ALARM CHECK is not carried out.
0: THERMAL ALARM CHECK is carried out.
STF
1 : Use step feed function in MPG mode.
0 : Do not use step feed function in MPG mode.
BAK
1 : Save data for parameter, pitch error and tool life to a file only once
during startup.
0 : Save data for parameter, pitch error and tool life to a file on a periodic
basis during startup.
PRT
NPA
1: The NC Program PROTECT function is rendered valid.
0: The NC Program PROTECT function is rendered invalid.
1: Even if an alarm is generated, the screen is not changed automatically to
the alarm message display screen.
0: If an alarm is generated, the screen changes automatically to the alarm
message display screen.
.
8002
RPC
7
6
5
4
3
2
RPC
WSM
CAP
BZ2
BUZ
TPE
1
0
ENG
1 : For the graphic scaling function rapid traverse movement is disregarded
(only cutting path is regarded), when calculating the display area.
0:
WSM
CAP
For the graphic scaling function both, rapid traverse movement and cutting
path, are regarded, when calculating the display area.
1 : Search or replace even if part correspondence is shown at the word
beginning.
0 : Search or replace only if correspondence is shown over the whole words.
1 : The simple interactive graphic input function is fully valid.
0 : Only mune programming (without graphic support) is available.
BZ2
1 : Built-in BUZZER function valid(BUZZER CONTROL1 OFF).
0 : Built-in BUZZER function invalid(BUZZER CONTROL1 On).
TPE
1 : In reset state the toolpath display is cleared in auto mode.
0 : In reset state the toolpath display is not cleared in auto mode.
ENG
1 : English display.
0 : Korea display
7-82
2. SENTROL2
8003
FND
MCL
FND
PARAMETER
MCL
1: Actual Feed is not displayed.
0: Actual Feed is displayed.
1: In the machining setup screen, the “CLR” menu is displayed at the MACRO
DATA input position.
0: In the process setup screen, the “CLR” menu is not displayed at the
MACRO DATA input position.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8004
Not used
8005
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Select the basic language.
0: Korean
1: Japanese
2: Chinese
8010
EOF
PSM
BMP
BZH
SWM
HLP
MEF
MEN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EOF
PSM
BMP
BZH
SWM
HLP
MEF
MEN
1 : Do not recognize ‘ % ’ as the end of a file to display data after ‘ % ’.
0 : Recognize ‘ % ’ as the end of a file not to display data after ‘ % ’ .
1 : Use absolute coordinates for position data setting.
0 : Use relative coordinates for position data setting.
1: For the Illustrated Table function, display the table with a BITMAP.
0: For the Illustrated Table function, display the table with a program.
1 : Set buzzer frequency to 3000.
0 : Set buzzer frequency to 18000.
1 : Set on the right side of a wood figure machine.
0 : Set on the left side of a wood figure machine.
1 : Use parameter help function.
0 : Do not use parameter help function.
1 : Determine effective digit number of macro data.
0 : Do not determine effective digit number of macro data.
1 : Set effective digit number of macro data to 12.
0 : Set effective digit number of macro data to 8.
7-83
Chapter 7 Parameter
8011
ST2
ST1
EAC
UBK
UMC
CLT
SMF
OPK
8012
AS1
AS0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ST2
ST1
EAC
UBC
UMC
CLT
SMF
OPK
1 : Continues searching by scrolling from the end to the beginning or vice
versa during search on the ladder screen.
0 : No scroll search is available during search on the ladder screen.
1 : Start from the beginning in case of the first search of address on the
ladder screen.
0 : Start from the displayed position in case of the first search of address on
the ladder screen.
1: During the movement of the assigned position due to the PLC, allow speed
to be assigned for each axis.
0: During the movement of the assigned position due to the PLC, assign the
same speed to all axes.
1 : Insert space between data devices on the processing setting screen.
0 : Do not insert space between data devices on the processing setting
screen.
1 : Distinguish automatic mode from other modes on the processing setting
screen.
0 : Do not distinguish automatic mode from other modes on the processing
setting screen.
1 : Text calculation function become valid.
0 : Text calculation function become invalid.
1 : Display in a small font on the processing setting screen.
0 : Display in a big font on the processing setting screen.
1 : Extend keys used in parameters 2020 and 2021.
0 : Do not extend keys used in parameters 2020 and 2021.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AS1
AS0
RET
AMA
EPL
SCD
EAX
WNS
Position return coordinates system setup 2
Position return coordinates system setup 1
AS1
RET
AMA
EPL
AS0
Assigned coordinate system
0
0
Machine coordinate system
0
1
Absolute coordinate system
1
0
Relative coordinate system
1
1
Relative coordinate system
1 : Use automatic operation position return function.
0 : Do not use automatic operation position return function.
1: Allow movement of the assigned position due to the PLC in automatic
operation as well (in the PLC axis).
0: Prohibit movement of the assigned position due to the PLC in automatic
operation.
1 : PLC axis is excluded in display showing zero return of all axes is
completed.
7-84
2. SENTROL2
PARAMETER
0 : PLC axis appears is included in display showing zero return of all axes is
completed.
SCD
1 : Display the second auxiliary data value on the automatic operation
program screen. (L/G)
0 : Do not display he second auxiliary data value on the automatic
operation program screen. (L/G)
EAX
1 : E –axis is available.
0 : E-axis is unavailable.
WNS
1 : Do not regard program set in WORK NO. SEARCH function as selection
program.
0 : Regard program set in WORK NO. SEARCH function as selection program.
8100
CN0
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN6
CN7
8101
CNF
CNE
CND
CNC
CNB
CAN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CN7
CN6
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN2
CN1
CN0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Accept file sending request.
Do not accept file sending request.
Accept file receiving request.
Do not accept file receiving request.
High speed directory transfer is valid.
High speed directory transfer is invalid.
High speed transfer for file sending request is valid.
High speed transfer n for file sending request is invalid.
High speed transfer for file receiving request is valid.
High speed transfer for file receiving request is invalid.
Attach comment to directory.
Do not attach comment to directory.
1
0
1
0
:
:
:
:
Directory update control is valid.
Directory update control is invalid.
Confirmation for remote operating data receiving is valid.
Confirmation for remote operating data receiving is invalid.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CNF
CNE
CND
CNC
CNB
CNA
CN9
CN8
( i,PR )
( i,PR )
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
1: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, if the Write command
fails, store the data in the buffer and send it later.
0: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, if the Write command
fails, gather and send the data again later.
1: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, receive the response for
the Read command and then send the Write command after processing the
PLC inside the NC.
0: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, receive the response for
7-85
Chapter 7 Parameter
CNA
CN9
CN8
8110
the Read command and then send the Write command without processing
the PLC inside the NC.
Parameter for communication with MITSUBISHI PLC
1: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, receive the data and
then send the next command immediately.
0: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, send the command first
before processing the received data.
1: From the Network, process the received data immediately.
0: From the Network, process the received data one at a time.
NETWORK MAX CONNECTION
( i,PR )
Set the maximum connection of N network.
Setting value: 1~100
8111
NETWORK RESPONSE DELAY
( i,PR )
Set network response delay.
Setting value: 0~10000
Setting unit: msec
8120
NET COMMAND REPEAT PERIOD
( i,PR )
Set network command repeat period.
Setting value: 1~10000
Setting unit: msec
8121
NET COMMAND REPEAT TIMES
( i,PR )
Set network command repeat times.
Setting value: 1~10
8122
DIR COMMAND REPEAT PERIOD
( i,PR )
Set directory command repeat period.
Setting value: 1~10000
Setting unit: msec
8123
DIR COMMAND REPEAT TIMES
( i,PR )
Set directory command repeat times.
Setting value: 1~10
8124
DIRECTORY PACKET SIZE
Set directory packet size.
Setting value: 512~1024
7-86
( i,PR )
2. SENTROL2
8125
PARAMETER
FILE COMMAND REPEAT PERIOD
( i,PR )
Set file sending/receiving command repeat period.
Setting value: 1~10000
Setting unit: msec
8126
FILE COMMAND REPEAT TIMES
( i,PR )
Set file sending/receiving command repeat times.
Setting value: 1~10
8127
FILE PACKET SIZE
( i,PR )
Set file sending/receiving packet size.
Setting value: 512~1024
8128
NUMBER OF FILE PACKETS
( i,PR )
Set the number of file sending/receiving packets.
Setting value: 1~10
8150
NB7
NB5
NB2
NB1
NB0
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
8151
NBA
NB8
1:
0:
1:
0:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NB7
NB6
NB5
NB4
NB3
NB2
NB1
NB0
( i,PR )
Functions for handle axis and unit remote setting are valid.
Functions for handle axis and unit remote setting are invalid.
Remote operation start/stop/reset functions are valid.
Remote operation start/stop/reset functions are invalid.
Remote modification function for parameter is valid.
Remote modification function for parameter is invalid.
File sending/receiving function is valid.
File sending/receiving function is invalid.
Remote monitoring function is valid.
Remote monitoring function is invalid.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NBF
NBE
NBD
NBC
NBB
NBA
NB9
NB8
1
0
( i,PR )
All files are receivable.
Only processing programs are receivable.
Remote override function is valid.
Remote override function is invalid.
7
6
5
4
8152
Not used.
7-87
3
2
( i,PR )
Chapter 7 Parameter
8400
SPEED MAX ( ABI )
(i)
Set the maximum parameter speed that determines linear positive (negative)
acceleration prior to interpolation during high-speed precision processing.
Setting value: 0~32767
Setting unit: 10mm/min
8401
TIME CONSTANT ( ABI )
(i)
Set the time for the maximum parameter speed that determines linear positive
(negative) acceleration prior to interpolation during high-speed precision
processing.
Setting value: 0~4000
Setting unit: msec
Feedrate V
[ mm/min]
parameter 8400
Parameter 8401
Time T [ msec ]
7
8402
6
5
4
OVP
3
2
1
0
DT2
DT1
DT0
(i)
OVP
1 : Overlap function is valid.
0 : Overlap function is invalid.
Bit6
1: The Maximum speed CLAMP is rendered invalid.
0: The Maximum speed CLAMP is rendered valid.
Bit4
1: From the Edge Stop Block, carry out the in-position Check.
0: From the Edge Stop Block, do not carry out the in-position Check.
Set distribution cycle using DT2, DT1 and DT0. The relationship between setting
value and distribution cycle is shown below.
For SENTROL2, the standard distribution cycle is 8msec, but softwear option can
be set to 4msec.
DT2
DT1
DT0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dist. cycle
Block speed
Remarks
8msec
125block/sec
Standard setting
1
4msec
250block/sec
1
0
2msec
500block/sec
Optional
0
1
1
1msec
1000block/sec
Optional
1
0
0
0.5msec
2000block/sec
Optional
7-88
2. SENTROL2
7
8403
HS6
HS4
HS3
HS2
HS1
HS0
8404
6
5
HS6
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
4
3
2
1
0
HS4
HS3
HS2
HS1
HS0
PARAMETER
(i)
The acceleration CLAMP function is valid.
The acceleration CLAMP function is invalid.
The pre-deceleration function for the speed CLAMP is valid.
The pre-deceleration function for the speed CLAMP is invalid.
The speed CLAMP due to a SMALL BLOCK is valid.
The speed CLAMP due to a SMALL BLOCK is invalid.
The automatic Path Correction function is valid.
The automatic Path Correction function is invalid.
The ERASE SMALL BLOCK function is valid.
The ERASE SMALL BLOCK function is invalid.
BELL type acceleration/deceleration valid prior to interpolation
BELL type acceleration/deceleration invalid prior to interpolation
TIME CONSTANT L (ABI )
(i)
For high-speed, high-precision processing, set up the time for the straight section of
the time it takes to reach the maximum speed for the parameter that determines the
acceleration for the BELL type acceleration/deceleration during interpolation.
Setup value: 0~4000
Unit: ms
8405
TIME CONSTANT S (ABI )
(i)
For high-speed, high-precision processing, set up the time for the curved section of
the time it takes to reach the maximum speed for the parameter that determines the
acceleration for the BELL-type acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation.
Setup value: 0~4000
Unit: ms
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8406
( i,PR )
Not used
8407
Not used
7-89
( i,PR )
Chapter 7 Parameter
8410
CORNER VELOCITY DIFF
(i)
Set the limit value of corner velocity difference for each axis.
Setting value: 0~32767
Setting unit: mm/min
Feedrate V
[ mm/min ]
Decelerated to limit value of velocity increment
Time T [ msec ]
8411
TIME CONSTANT FOR MAX ACCEL
(i)
Number constant for allowable acceleration of each axis. Set the time to reach the
maximum speed (parameter 1422).
Setting value: 0~32767
Setting unit: msec
8412
IGNORED VELOCITY FLUCTUATION
(i)
Set the ignored velocity fluctuation as ratio.
Setting value: 0~100
Setting unit: %
Standard value: 10 %
8415
AREA2 OVERRIDE
(i)
Override value in area 2.
Setting value: 0~100
Setting unit: %
AREA1 :
Standard value : 80 %
0°≤ θ< 30°
AREA2 : 30°≤ θ< 45°
AREA3 : 45°≤ θ< 60°
θ
AREA4 : 60°≤ θ< 90°
7-90
2. SENTROL2
8416
AREA3 OVERRIDE
(i)
Override value in area 3.
Setting value: 0~100
Setting unit: %
8417
Standard value : 70 %
AREA4 OVERRIDE
(i)
Override value in area 4.
Setting value: 0~100
Setting unit: %
8418
PARAMETER
Standard value : 60 %
TIME CONSTANT ( AAI )
(i)
Set the time constant for linear positive (negative) acceleration after interpolation
in high-speed fixed processing mode (G61.1).
Valid if the parameter 1400 < LAI > equals 1.
Setting value: 0~100
Setting unit: msec
Standard value : 8
8419
CORNER ANGLE
(i)
If the corner angle difference exceeds the value in high-speed precision processing
mode, a machine is decelerated and then stopped.
Setting value: 0~90
Setting unit: DEG
Standard value : 15
8420
CUTTING INPOSITION
(i)
Set the width for inposition check in case of 8402<INP>=1 if a machine is
decelerated and then stopped in high-speed precision processing mode (G61.1).
Setting unit: detection unit (pulse) Setting range: 0~1000
8422
FEED FORWARD GAIN1
(i)
Set up the FEED FORWARD GAIN1 integer.
Setup value: 0~100
8423
FEED FORWARD GAIN2
(i)
Set up the FEED FORWARD GAIN2 number.
Setup value: 0~32767
8425
POSITION TOLERANCE
(i)
Set up the POSITION TOLERANCE integer.
Setup value: 0~10000
8426
TOLERANCE TO ERASE SMALL BLOCK
Set up the path tolerance to erase small blocks.
Setup value: 0~1000
7-91
(i)
Chapter 7 Parameter
8427
TOLERANCE FOR SMOOTHING
(i)
Set up the tolerance for automatic path correction.
Setup value: 0~1000
9000
PC DIAG. MAX DISP:X
From the PLC diagnosis screen, set up the maximum number that can be displayed
for command “X.”
Setup value: 0~432
9001
PC DIAG. MAX DISP:Y
From the PLC diagnosis screen, set up the maximum number that can be displayed
for command “Y.”
Setup value: 0~432
9002
PC DIAG. MAX DISP:R
From the PLC diagnosis screen, set up the maximum number that can be displayed
for command “R.”
Setup value: 0~519
9003
PC DIAG. MAX DISP: D
From the PLC diagnosis screen, set up the maximum number that can be displayed
for command “D.”
Setup value: 0~511
9010
EP4
SPS
IO4
IO3
IO2
IO1
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
7
6
EP4
SPS
5
4
3
2
1
0
IO4
IO3
IO2
IO1
EPS4 RAD ANALOG input is used.
EPS4 RAD ANALOG input is not used.
The SPINDLE axis is not used.
The SPINDLE axis is used.
DIO3Board NO. 4 is installed.
DIO3Board NO. 4 is not installed.
DIO3Board NO. 3 is installed.
DIO3Board NO. 3 is not installed.
DIO3Board NO. 2 is installed.
DIO3Board NO. 2 is not installed.
DIO3Board NO. 1 is installed.
DIO3Board NO. 1 is not installed.
7-92
2. SENTROL2
7
6
5
4
3
9011
R12
R11
R1A
1
0
1
0
1
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
9012
R28
R27
R26
R25
R24
R23
R22
R21
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
1
0
R12
R11
R1A
RIO1 printed board No.2 is mounted.
RIO1 printed board No.2 is not mounted.
RIO1 printed board No.1 is mounted.
RIO1 printed board No.1 is not mounted.
RIO1printed board is automatically recognized.
RIO1printed board is not automatically recognized.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R28
R27
R26
R25
R24
R23
R22
R21
1
0
AD2
AD1
1 : RIO1 printed board No.8 is mounted.
0 : RIO1 printed board No.8 is not mounted.
1 : RIO1 printed board No.7 is mounted.
0 : RIO1 printed board No.7 is not mounted.
1 : RIO1 printed board No.6 is mounted.
0 : RIO1 printed board No.6 is not mounted.
1 : RIO1 printed board No.5 is mounted.
0 : RIO1 printed board No.5 is not mounted.
1 : RIO1 printed board No.4 is mounted.
0 : RIO1 printed board No.4 is not mounted.
1 : RIO1 printed board No.3 is mounted.
0 : RIO1 printed board No.3 is not mounted.
1 : RIO1 printed board No.2 is mounted.
0 : RIO1 printed board No.2 is not mounted.
1 : RIO1 printed board No.1 is mounted.
0 : RIO1 printed board No.1 is not mounted.
7
6
5
4
3
2
9013
AD8
2
AD8
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
Use ALALOG voltage input CH8.
Do not ALALOG voltage input CH8.
Use ALALOG voltage input CH7.
Do not ALALOG voltage input CH7.
Use ALALOG voltage input CH6.
Do not ALALOG voltage input CH6.
Use ALALOG voltage input CH5.
Do not ALALOG voltage input CH5.
Use ALALOG voltage input CH4.
Do not ALALOG voltage input CH4.
Use ALALOG voltage input CH3.
Do not ALALOG voltage input CH3.
Use ALALOG voltage input CH2.
Do not ALALOG voltage input CH2.
7-93
AD3
PARAMETER
Chapter 7 Parameter
AD1
1 : Use ALALOG voltage input CH1.
0 : Do not ALALOG voltage input CH1.
9014
GM7
GM6
GM5
GM4
GM3
GM2
GM1
GMA
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GM7
GM6
GM5
GM4
GM3
GM2
GM1
GMA
Mask F7 key menu for gas cutter.
Do not mask F7 key menu for gas cutter.
Mask F6 key menu for gas cutter.
Do not mask F6 key menu for gas cutter.
Mask F5 key menu for gas cutter.
Do not mask F5 key menu for gas cutter.
Mask F4 key menu for gas cutter.
Do not F4 key menu for gas cutter.
Mask F3 key menu for gas cutter.
Do not F3 key menu for gas cutter.
Mask F2 key menu for gas cutter.
Do not F2 key menu for gas cutter.
Mask F1 key menu for gas cutter.
Do not F1 key menu for gas cutter.
Mask all menus for gas cutter.
Do not all menus for gas cutter.
7
6
5
4
9015
3
2
1
0
R2C
R2B
R2A
R29
A parameter that allows up to 12 RIO2 Boards to be connected by mounting a third
EPS3 board
R29
1: RIO2 Board NO. 9 is installed.
0: RIO2 Board NO. 9 is not installed.
R2A
1: RIO2 Board NO. 10 is installed.
0: RIO2 Board NO. 10 is not installed.
R2B 1: RIO2 Board NO.11 is installed.
0: RIO2 Board NO. 11 is not installed.
R2C 1: RIO2 Board NO. 12 is installed.
0: RIO2 Board NO. 12 is not installed.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9016
WIP
9017
0
WIP
1: AnyWire (UniWire) is used.
0: AnyWire (UniWire) is not used.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WA8
WA7
WA6
WA5
WA4
WA3
WA2
WA1
This is a parameter for measuring the voltage value from the servo waveform
(may be used if mounted on a RAD board).
7-94
2. SENTROL2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PARAMETER
9018
reserve Parameter
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9090
DB7
DB6
DB5
DB4
DB3
DB2
DB1
DB0
9091
DBF
DBE
DBD
DBC
DBB
DBA
DB9
DB8
9092
DBN
DBM
DBL
DBK
DBJ
DBI
DBH
DBG
9093
DBW
DBU
DBT
DBS
DBR
DBQ
DBP
DBO
9094
DB*
DB/
DB-
DB+
DBZ
DBY
DBX
DBW
9095
Parameter for development debug
9096
9097
Parameter for development debug
7-95
1. Repair Tools
Chapter 8 Ordinary Repair
1. Repair Tools
The following measuring instruments are required to determine whether the power supplied to NC is
appropriate and whether the wiring is appropriate:
(1) Measuring instruments
Measuring Instrument
Condition
AC voltmeter
Allowance of ±2% or less
DC voltmeter
Maximum scale: 10V,
30V
Allowance of ±2% or less
Usage
Measures the AC power
voltage
Measures the DC power
voltage
General measurements
and troubleshooting
OSCILLOSCOPE
(2) Tools
Cross-tip screwdriver --------------- Large, medium, small
Slotted screwdriver --------------- Medium, small
2. Air filter
The cabinet of the equipment uses SENTROL2 MAIN UNIT and has an air filter that needs to be cleaned
periodically (once a week). This is because the efficiency decreases as the dust accumulates; this in turn
increases the temperature inside the cabinet.
① Unscrew the bolt and remove the air filter.
② Remove dust from the filter.
③ Screw the filter back with the bolt.
8-1
Chapter 8 Ordinary Repair
3. Checkpoints Before Requesting for After-sales Service
Check the following first before requesting for after-sales service:
1) When?
ㆍ Date and time of trouble.
2) When was the trouble found?
ㆍ What was the NC operation mode?
ㆍ Information on the program number, contents, tool offset value, etc., in case of automatic operation
ㆍ Position display value when the trouble occurred
ㆍ Do other functions work properly?
3) What type of trouble is it?
ㆍ Alarm number
ㆍ LED display on PCB
ㆍ Display on SERVO UNIT and SPINDLE UNIT
ㆍ Is the screen displayed normally?
4) How often was the trouble found?
ㆍ How often was the trouble found (every time or from time to time?)
ㆍ Does the trouble occur when other machines are operated?
ㆍ Are the power and voltage normal (does the voltage drop suddenly when other machines are
operated?)?
ㆍ Does the trouble occur during a specific operation?
8-2
1. Basic Interface Connection
Appendix
1. Basic Interface Connection
MAIN UNIT
DIO3 Board NO.1
CNIN1
Dsub37P
CABLE CNIN1
H50F
TBU1
CNOUT1
Dsub37P
CABLE CNOUT1
H50F
TCN2
CNIO1
Dsub37P
CABLE CNIO1
H50F
TBU1
Power Circuit
of Machine
Power Circuit
of Machine
Power Circuit
of Machine
MAIN UNIT
EPS3 Board
/EPS4 Board
NO.1
CNA1
Dsub25P
CABLE CNA1
Dsub25P
CNA2
DIO3 Board NO.2
CNIN2
Dsub37P
CABLE CNIN2
H50F
TBU1
CNOUT2
Dsub37P
CABLE CNOUT2
H50F
TCN2
CNIO2
Dsub37P
CABLE CNIO2
H50F
TBU1
Power Circuit
of Machine
Power Circuit
of Machine
Power Circuit
of Machine
CABLE CNA2
Dsub25P
CNA3
CABLE CNA3
Dsub25P
DIO3 Board NO.3
CNIN3
Dsub37P
CABLE CNIN3
H50F
TBU1
CNOUT3
Dsub37P
CABLE CNOUT3
H50F
TCN2
CNIO3
Dsub37P
CABLE CNIO3
H50F
TBU1
CNMPG1
Dsub9P
CABLE MPG
MPG NO.1
CNMPG2
OPTION
CNMPG3
Dsub9P
CABLE MPG
MPG NO.2
Dsub9P
CABLE MPG
MPG NO.3
Note)CNS1
Power Circuit
of Machine
Power Circuit
of Machine
Power Circuit
of Machine
EPS3 Board
/EPS4 Board
NO.2
CNA4
CABLE CNS1
Dsub25P
CABLE CNA4
OPTION
Dsub9S
CABLE COM1
PUNCH PANEL
RS232C
CNCOM2
Dsub9S
CABLE FDD
FDD UNIT (OPTION)
CNA5
CABLE CNA5
Dsub25P
(CRT)CND1
Dsub15P
Dsub15P
CABLE CND1
(KEY)CND2
CABLE CND2
Dsub25P
Power UNIT
CNACOUT
(PSP7 Board)
CNACIN
Dsub9P
CNA6
CND1
DKU (For SENTROL2)
(Display Keyboard Unit)
CND2 (DKU7)
ACIN
CABLE CNA6
Dsub25P
Note)CNS2
CABLE CNS2
MOL6R
CABLE ACOUT
MOL4R
CABLE ACIN
CABLE
AC SERVO
UNIT
Y-Axis
CABLE
AC SERVO
UNIT
Z-Axis
CABLE
AC SERVO
UNIT
(The 4th Axis)
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE CN90-4
CABLE CN2-4
AC SERVO
UNIT
A-Axis
CABLE
AC SERVO
UNIT
B-Axis
CABLE
AC SERVO
UNIT
C-AXIS
CABLE
CABLE
Dsub25P
RS232C
CNCOM1
AC SERVO
UNIT
X-Axis
Power ON/OFF
SWITCH
AC SERVO
UNIT
(The 8th Axis)
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE CN90-8
AC
MOTOR
X-Axis
AC
MOTOR
Y-Axis
AC
MOTOR
Z-Axis
AC
MOTOR
(The 4th Axis)
AC
MOTOR
A-Axis
AC
MOTOR
B-Axis
AC
MOTOR
C-AXIS
AC
MOTOR
(The 8th Axis)
CABLE CN2-8
AC220V Single P
MAIN UNIT
EPS3 Board
/EPS4 Board
NO.1
CNA1
Dsub25P
CABLE CNA1
AC SERVO
UNIT
X-Axis
CABLE
AC SERVO
UNIT
Y-Axis
CABLE
AC SERVO
UNIT
Z-Axis
CABLE
CABLE
AC
MOTOR
X-Axis
LINEAR
SCALE
AC
MOTOR
Y-Axis
LINEAR
SCALE
AC
MOTOR
Z-Axis
LINEAR
SCALE
CABLE CNA1L
Dsub25P
CNA2
CABLE CNA2
CABLE
CABLE CNA2L
Dsub25P
CNA3
CABLE CNA3
CABLE
CABLE CNA3L
Dsub25P
Note)CNS1
CABLE CNS1
AC SERVO
UNIT
(The 4th Axis)
CABLE CN90CABLE CN2-4
LINEAR
AC
SCALE
MOTOR
(The 4th Axis)
CABLE CNS1L
EPS3 Board
/EPS4 Board
NO.2
CNA4
Dsub25P
CABLE CNA4
CABLE CNA4L
Dsub25P
CNA5
CABLE CNA5
AC SERVO
UNIT
A-Axis
CABLE
AC SERVO
UNIT
B-Axis
CABLE
AC SERVO
UNIT
C-Axis
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
AC
MOTOR
A-Axis
LINEAR
SCALE
AC
MOTOR
B-Axis
LINEAR
SCALE
AC
MOTOR
C-Axis
LINEAR
SCALE
CABLE CNA5L
Dsub25P
CNA6
CABLE CNA6
CABLE
CABLE CNA6L
Dsub25P
Note)CNS2
CABLE CNS2
CABLE CNS2L
9-1
AC SERVO
UNIT
(The 8th Axis)
CABLE CN90CABLE CN2-8
LINEAR
AC
SCALE
MOTOR
(The 8th Axis)
Appendix
2. DIO3 Board I/O Signal List
CNIN1 Input Signal (DI) 32
CNOUT1 Output Signal (DO) 32
1
OV
20
Y0.0
1
COMMON 0 20
X0.0 *DEC1
2
X0.1 *HSKIP 21
X0.2 *DEC2
2
Y0.1
21
Y0.2
22
X0.4 *DEC3
3
Y0.3
22
Y0.4
3
X0.3 *EMG
23
X0.6 *DEC4
4
Y0.5
23
Y0.6
4
X0.5 *ELS
5
X0.7
24
COMMON 1
5
Y0.7
24
0V
25
X1.1
6
Y1.0
25
Y1.1
6
X1.0 *DEC5
26
X1.3
7
Y1.2
26
Y1.3
7
X1.2 *DEC6
27
X1.5
8
Y1.4
27
Y1.5
8
X1.4 *DEC7
28
X1.7
9
Y1.6
28
Y1.7
9
X1.6 *DEC8
10
COMMON 2 29
X2.0 *DEC9
10
0V
29
Y2.0
11
Y2.1
30
Y2.2
11
X2.1
30
X2.2 *DEC10
12
X2.3
31
X2.4 *DEC11
12
Y2.3
31
Y2.4
13
Y2.5
32
Y2.6
13
X2.5
32
X2.6 *DEC12
14
X2.7
33
COMMON 3
14
Y2.7
33
0V
X3.1
15
Y3.0
34
Y3.1
15
X3.0 *DEC13 34
X3.3
16
Y3.2
35
Y3.3
16
X3.2 *DEC14 35
17
0V
36
Y3.4
17
COMMON 4 36
X3.4 *DEC15
18
Y3.5
37
Y3.6
18
X3.5
37
X3.6 *DEC16
19
X3.7
19
Y3.7
* EMG: Emergency Stop Signal * ELS : Emergency Stop Limit Switch Signal
* DEC1,2,3,4 ~ 16 : Speed Reduction Start Signal for Home R* HSKIP : Rapid Skip Signal
Note) *DEC signal and *HSKIP signal of the unused axis can be used arbitrarily.
CNIO1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Input Signal(DI)16 / Output Signal(DO)16
COMMON 0 20
X4.0
X4.1
21
X4.2
X4.3
22
X4.4
X4.5
23
X4.6
X4.7
24
COMMON 1
X114.0
25
X114.1
X114.2
26
X114.3
X114.4
27
X114.5
X114.6
28
X114.7
0V
29
Y4.0
Y4.1
30
Y4.2
Y4.3
31
Y4.4
Y4.5
32
Y4.6
Y4.7
33
0V
Y412.0
34
Y412.1
Y412.2
35
Y412.3
0V
36
Y412.4
Y412.5
37
Y412.6
Y412.7
Example of Connection
(For 24V COMMOM)
AVR
DIO3 Board NO.1
CNIN1-1
0V
*DEC1
X0.0
CNIN1-20
*HSKIP
X0.1
CNIN1-2
*DEC2
X0.2
CNIN1-21
*EMG
X0.3
CNIN1-3
*DEC3
X0.4
CNIN1-22
*ELS
X0.5
CNIN1-4
*DEC4
X0.6
CNIN1-23
X0.7
CNIN1-5
CNIN1-24
*DEC5
*DEC6
*DEC7
*DEC8
X1.0
CNIN1-6
X1.1
CNIN1-25
X1.2
CNIN1-7
X1.3
CNIN1-26
X1.4
CNIN1-8
X1.5
CNIN1-27
X1.6
CNIN1-9
X1.7
CNIN1-28
DV
Example of Connection
Y0.0
CNOUT1-20
RELAY
0V
Y0.1
Y0.2
Y0.3
Y0.4
Y0.5
Y0.6
Y0.7
Y1.0
Y1.1
Y1.2
Y1.3
Y1.4
Y1.5
Y1.6
Y1.7
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
0V
CNOUT1-2
CNOUT1-21
CNOUT1-3
CNOUT1-22
CNOUT1-4
CNOUT1-23
CNOUT1-5
CNOUT1-6
CNOUT1-25
CNOUT1-7
CNOUT1-26
CNOUT1-8
CNOUT1-27
CNOUT1-9
CNOUT1-28
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
CNOUT1-1,24,10,33,17
AVR
0V
9-2
24V
24V
3. RIO1 Board I/O Signal List
3. RIO1 Board I/O Signal List
RIO1 Board NO.1
OPCN3 OPERATOR'S PANEL Input Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
LG
OPOUT02
OPOUT00
X102.7
X100.7
X102.6
X100.6
X102.5
X100.5
X102.4
X100.4
X102.3
X100.3
X102.2
X100.2
X102.1
X100.1
X102.0
X100.0
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
OPOUT03
OPOUT01
X103.7
X101.7
X103.6
X101.6
X103.5
X101.5
X103.4
X101.4
X103.3
X101.3
X103.2
X101.2
X103.1
X101.1
X103.0
X101.0
OPCN1 OPERATOR'S PANEL Output Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Y100.0
Y100.2
Y100.4
Y100.6
Y101.0
Y101.2
Y101.4
Y101.6
Y102.0
Y102.2
Y102.4
Y102.6
Y103.0
Y103.2
Y103.4
Y103.6
0V
0V
0V
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Y100.1
Y100.3
Y100.5
Y100.7
Y101.1
Y101.3
Y101.5
Y101.7
Y102.1
Y102.3
Y102.5
Y102.7
Y103.1
Y103.3
Y103.5
Y103.7
0V
0V
RIO1 Board NO.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
LG
OPOUT06
OPOUT04
X106.7
X104.7
X106.6
X104.6
X106.5
X104.5
X106.4
X104.4
X106.3
X104.3
X106.2
X104.2
X106.1
X104.1
X106.0
X104.0
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
OPOUT07
OPOUT05
X107.7
X105.7
X107.6
X105.6
X107.5
X105.5
X107.4
X105.4
X107.3
X105.3
X107.2
X105.2
X107.1
X105.1
X107.0
X105.0
Dsub37P
OPCN2
Dsub37P
-3
OPOUT00
-19
X100.0
-17
X100.1
-15
X100.2
-13
X100.3
-11
X100.4
-9
X100.5
-7
X100.6
-5
X100.7
-21
OPOUT01
-37
X101.0
-35
X101.1
-33
X101.2
-31
X101.3
-29
X101.4
-27
X101.5
-25
X101.6
-23
X101.7
OPCN2 OPERATOR'S PANEL Output Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Y104.0
Y104.2
Y104.4
Y104.6
Y105.0
Y105.2
Y105.4
Y105.6
Y106.0
Y106.2
Y106.4
Y106.6
Y107.0
Y107.2
Y107.4
Y107.6
0V
0V
0V
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Y104.1
Y104.3
Y104.5
Y104.7
Y105.1
Y105.3
Y105.5
Y105.7
Y106.1
Y106.3
Y106.5
Y106.7
Y107.1
Y107.3
Y107.5
Y107.7
0V
0V
AVR
24V
0V
OPCN1
OPCN3
OPCN4 OPERATOR'S PANEL Input Signal
OPCN3
Dsub37P
TB2
24V
TB1
0V
OPCN4
Dsub37P
RIO1 Board NO.1
OPCN1
LED LAMP
-1
Y100.0
-20
Y100.1
-2
Y100.2
-21
Y100.3
-3
Y100.4
-22
Y100.5
-4
Y100.6
-23
Y100.7
-5
Y101.0
-24
Y101.1
-6
Y101.2
-25
Y101.3
-7
Y101.4
-26
Y101.5
-8
Y101.6
-27
Y101.7
0V
LAMP
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
LED LAMP
DV
LAMP
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
9-3
24V
TB2
0V
TB1
24V
0V
Appendix
4. Other Input/Output Signals
5. Connection of AC Power
MAIN UNIT
DIO3 Board NO.1
-3
Emergency Stop Signal Input
CNIN1 RELEASE S/W
*ELS
X0.5
Emergency Stop Limit Switch
Signal Input and Release
-4
CNIN1
CNOUT1
-1,24,10,33,17
AVR
0V
(FineSuntronix)
24V
CNOUT1
DV
MCCON
Y□.□
EOF
SERVO UNIT POWER ON Signal
RELAY
FG
Power Unit for FDD
represents twisted-pair
cable
ACIN
ACIN
FG
(SMPS)
CNACOUT
COM
-3
EON
-2
Exmaple of AVR) LN50-24
0V
ACIN
ACIN Power UNIT
(*)
(*)
-1
0V
0.75㎟ or Greater
CABLE ACOUT
CNACOUT
AC220VH -6
AC220VN -5
E
-4
CNIN1
*EMG
X0.3
DKU
(Display Keyboard
UNIT)
MAIN UNIT
11
E
10
0V
Power ON
SWITCH
Power OFF
SWITCH
-1
CNACIN
-3
-2
-1
0.75㎟ or Greater
CABLE ACIN
AC220V Single
Phase
50/60Hz
Connect to the earth plate of the cabine
6. Connection of 24V Power
7. Connection of MPG
MAIN UNIT
DIO3 Board NO.1,2,3
CNIN1,2,3,CNIO1,2,3
COMMON
6PIN SHIELD CABLE
0V
24V
CNMPG1
+5V
-8
0V
-3
HA1H
-7
HA1L
-2
HB1H
-6
HB1L
-1
24V AVR
24V
0V
CNOUT1,2,3,CNIO1,2,3
DV
RELAY
DV
RELAY
(*)
24V
6PIN SHIELD CABLE
CNMPG2
+5V
-8
0V
-3
HA2H
-7
HA2L
-2
HB2H
-6
HB2L
-1
RELAY
0V
0V
0V
RIO2 Board NO.1,2,3
CNIN11,12,13
0V
24V
COMMON
MPG NO.1
+5V
0V
A
A
B
B
MPG NO.2
+5V
0V
A
A
B
B
(*)
(*)
represents twisted pair cable
CNOUT11,12,13
DV
RELAY
Note) Connect MPG NO.3 to CNMPG3. Wiring is the same as NO.1,2.
24V
RELAY
0V
0V
0V
24V
0V
TB2
TB1
24V
0V
RIO1 Board NO.1,2
OPCN1,2,5,6
24V
DV
0V
0V
0V
24V
0V
TB2
TB1
24V
0V
9-4
8. FDD Connection
8. FDD Connection
9. RS232C INTERFACE
MAIN UNIT
Connecting to punch panel
FD BOX
CABLE COM1
SHIELD CABLE
RX
CNCOM2-2
CN1-2
RD2
MAIN UNIT
CNCOM1
CD (DCD) 1
TX
CNCOM2-3
CN1-3
SD2
RD (RXD) 2
3
RD (RXD)
RTS
CNCOM2-7
CN1-7
RS2
SD (TXD) 3
2
SD
(TXD)
CTS
GND
CNCOM2-8
CNCOM2-5
CN1-8
CN1-5
CS2
LG
ER (DTR) 4
20
ER
(DTR)
(GND)
CABLE FDD
FDC Board
(*)
4P TWIST PAIR
SHIELD CABLE
CABLE ACOUT
0.75㎟ or Greater
AC220VH CNACOUT-6
AC220VN CNACOUT-5
(*)
E
Power Unit for FDD
(SMPS)
Screw Terminal
ACIN
ACIN
FG
(*)
PUNCH PANEL
COM1
8
CD (DCD)
SG (GND) 5
7
SG
DR (DSR) 6
6
DR (DSR)
RS (RTS) 7
4
RS
(RTS)
CS (CTS) 8
5
CS
(CTS)
22
RI
(RI)
RI (RI)
9
(*)
FG
CNACOUT-4
(Connector Metal Part)
Dsub 9PIN
MALE
(*)
represents twisted pair cable
Dsub 25PIN
FEMALE
DKU
(DISPLAY KEYBOARD UNIT)
Power Unit
Screw Terminal
(*)
ACIN
ACIN
CABLE FDDPWR
0.75㎟ or Greater
FG
(*)
represents twist pair cable
Connect to PC through Punch Panel
Direct Connection to PC
MAIN UNIT
CNCOM1
CD (DCD) 1
CABLE PC
SHIELD CABLE
RD (RXD) 2
PC
COM1,COM2
1
CD (DCD)
2
SD (TXD) 3
PANCH PANEL
COM1
CD (DCD) 8
CABLE PC
SHIELD CABLE
PC
COM1,COM2
1
CD (DCD)
RD (RXD)
RD (RXD) 3
2
RD (RXD)
3
SD (TXD)
4
ER (DTR)
3
SD (TXD)
SD (TXD) 2
4
ER (DTR)
ER (DTR) 20
SG (GND) 5
5
SG (GND)
SG (GND) 7
5
SG (GND)
DR (DSR) 6
6
DR (DSR)
DR (DSR) 6
6
DR (DSR)
RS (RTS) 7
7
RS (RTS)
RS (RTS) 4
7
RS (RTS)
8
CS (CTS)
CS (CTS) 5
8
CS (CTS)
9
RI
RI
9
RI
ER (DTR) 4
(*)
CS (CTS) 8
RI
9
(*)
FG
(*)
22
(*)
FG
(Connector Metal Part)
(Connector Metal Part)
MAX. 15m
Dsub 9PIN
MALE
(*)
Dsub 9PIN
MALE
represents twisted pair cable
MAX. 15m
Dsub 25PIN
FEMALE
(*)
Dsub 9PIN
MALE
represents twisted pair cable
Note) In case the cable length is 10m or greater, or in DNC operation,
make a twisted pair with signal cable (RD,SD,RS,CS) and ground cable (SG,GND).
Note) In case the cable length is 10m or greater, or in DNC operation,
make a twisted pair with signal cable (RD,SD,RS,CS) and ground cable (SG,GND).
9-5
Appendix
11. Connection to SENTROL2 MAIN
UNIT and DKU
10. LAN INTERFACE
RJ-45 PLUG
MAIN UNIT
PC
(LAN CARD)
R
R-GND
G
G-GND
B
MAIN UNIT
RJ-45 PLUG
NETWORK HUB
CNLAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TD+ ORG/WHT
TD- ORG
RD+ GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
RD- GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN
RJ-45 PLUG
RJ-45 PLUG
CABLE CNLAN
(STRAIGHT CABLE)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CND1-1
CND1-6
CND1-2
CND1-7
CND1-3
CND1-1
CND1-6
CND1-2
CND1-7
CND1-3
CND1-8
CND1-8
B-GND
CND1-11
CND1-11
MONID0
MONID1
CND1-12
CND1-12
MONID1
HSYNC
CND1-13
CND1-13
HSYNC
BLU/WHT
VSYNC
CND1-14
CND1-14
VSYNC
GRN
GND
CND1-5
CND1-5
GND
BRN/WHT
GND
CND1-10
CND1-10
GND
BRN
FG (Connector Metal Part)
BLU
(Connector Metal Part) FG
MAX. 15m
RJ-45 PLUG
BRN
BRN/WHT
GRN
BLU/WHT
BLU
GRN/WHT
ORG
ORG/WHT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BRN/WHT
GRN
BLU/WHT
BLU
GRN/WHT
ORG
ORG/WHT
CLOCK
CND2-1
CND2-1
CLOCK
GND
CND2-5
CND2-5
DATA
DATA
CND2-2
CND2-2
SPEAKER+
GND
CND2-3
CND2-3
SPEAKER-
SPEAKER+
CND2-6
CND2-6
VCC
GND
CND2-8
CND2-8
GND
SPEAKER-
CND2-7
CND2-7
GND
CND2-9
CND2-9
(*)
FG (Connector Metal Part)
RJ-45 PLUG
BRN
(Note 2)
CABLE CND2
SHIELD CABLE(Note 1)
CABLE CNLAN
NETWORK HUB
CATEGORY5 SHIELD TYPE LAN CABLE
1
TD+ ORG/WHT
2
TD- ORG
3
RD+ GRN/WHT
4
BLU
5
BLU/WHT
6
RD- GRN
7
BRN/WHT
8
BRN
TD+ ORG/WH 1
TD- ORG
2
RD+ GRN/WH 3
4
BLU
BLU/WHT5
RD- GRN
6
BRN/WHT7
8
BRN
R
R-GND
G
G-GND
B
MONID0
(Note 2)
MAIN UNIT
CNLAN
DKU
(Display Keyboard Unit)
B-GND
TD+ ORG/WHT
TD- ORG
RD+ GRN/WHT
RD-
CABLE CND1
SHIELD CABLE(Note 1)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CNACOUT
AC220VH -6
AC220VN -5
E
-4
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
0.75㎟ or Greater
CABLE ACOUT
(*)
(Note 1) To cope with noise, attach ferrite
core on both ends of the cable.
FERRITE CORE
MAKER:TDK ZCAT2132-1130-M
(Note 2) Connect cable shield to connector's
metal part only, not GND PIN
(to cope with noise)
(*)
represents twisted pair cable
9-6
(Connector Metal Part) FG
Power Unit
ACIN
ACIN
FG
Power Unit for FDD
(SMPS)
ACIN
ACIN
FG
12. AC SERVO Connection
12.1 YASKAWA SIGMA
12. Connecting to SENTROL2 and AC SERVO
12.1 Connecting to YASKAWA SIGMA/SIGMA Ⅱ SERIES AC SERVO
MAIN UNIT(EPS3/4 Board NO.1,2)
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
YASKAWA SIGMA/SIGMAⅡ
CABLE
AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3
1CN
1 SG
26
CNA4,5,6
2 SG
27
HP50V
3
28
Dsub25P
(3M50F)
1 AG
14 VCMD
2
15 +24V
3
16 ENBLB
4
17 ENBLA
4
29 S-RDY+
5 PZH
18 PRDYB
5 V-REF
30 S-RDY-
6 PZL
19 PRDYA
6 SG
31 ALM+
7 PBH
20 0V
7
32 ALM-
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 Board NO.1,2
CNA1,2,3,5,6,7
YASKAWA SIGMA/SIGMAⅡ
AC SERVO UNIT
CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
SHIELD CABLE
1CN
+24V
15
SERVO
ON
ON
47 +24VIN
ENBLB 16
ENBLA 17
20
43 N-OT
Counterclockwise
Rotation Inhibit
Iniput Signal
CLOCKWISE
ROTATION Inhibit
Input Signal
0V
8 PBL
21 SALM
8
33 PAO
42 P-OT
9 PAH
22 SRDY
9
34 *PAO
1
10 PAL
23 0V
10
35 PBO
11
24 COMMON
11
36 *PBO
12 AL2
25 AL1
12
37
13
38
13 AL0
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG)
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP)
HP20V
(3M20F)
14
39
15
40 S-ON
OVL
*VRD
41
42 P-OT
18
43 N-OT
19 PCO
44
20 *PCO
45
21
46
22
47 +24VIN
23
48
24
49
25
50
AC SERVO MOTOR
2 PG0V
12
3 PG0V
13
4 PG5V
14 PC
5 PG5V
15 *PC
6 PG5V
16 PA
7
17 *PA
8
18 PB
9
19 *PB
10
20 FG
SERVO
ALARM
SALM 21
SERVO
READY
32 ALM-
SRDY 22
SERVO ALARM
--> OFF
30 S-RDY-
SERVO READY
--> ON
※
ANALOG
Speed Command
Voltage Output
VCMD 14
5
V-REF
6
SG
PAH 9
33
PAO
PAL
10
34 *PAO
PBH
7
35
PBL
8
36 *PBO
PZH
5
19
1
ANALOG
Speed Command Voltage
Input
AG
※
2CN
CABLE
2CNX-A
2CNY-A
2CNZ-A
2CNA-A
31 ALM+
29 S-RDY+
17
11
SG
COMMON24
16
1 PG0V
SERVO ON
Input Signal
40 S-ON
ENCODER
Phase A Signal Input
ENCODER
Phase B Signal Input
ENCODER
Phase Z Signal Input
PZL
PBO
ENCODER
Phase B Signal Output
PCO
6
20 *PCO
23
2
0V
ENCODER
Phase A Signal Output
ENCODER
Phase Z Signal Output
SG
Connect to the Earth
Plate of the Cabinet
YASKAWA SIGMA
AC SERVO UNIT
CABLE 2CNX,2CNY,2CNZ,2CNA
SHIELD CABLE
MOTOR ENCODER
2CN
PA
16
A
*PA
17
B
PB
18
C
*PB
19
D
PC
14
E
*PC
15
F
PG5V
4
H
PG5V
5
PG5V
6
PG0V
1
PG0V
2
PG0V
3
FG
20
※
G
J
※
represents twisted pair cable
9-7
PG
Appendix
12.2 Connection with LG AC SERVO(FDA-5000/6000)
MAIN UNIT(EPS3/4 Board NO.1,2)
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
1 AG
14 VCMD
2
15 +24V
3
16 ENBLB
4
17 ENBLA
5 PZH
18
6 PZL
19
7 PBH
20 0V
8 PBL
21 SALM
9 PAH
22 SRDY
10 PAL
23 0V
11
24 COMMON
12
25
13
CABLE
CNA1,2,3
LG FDA-5000/6000
AC SERVO UNIT
CNA4,5,6
CN1
HP50V
1 GND
26 GND
Dsub25P
(3M50F)
2
27 SPDIN
3
28
4
29
5 PZO
30 /PZO
6 PB0
31 /PBO
7 PAO
32 /PAO
8
33
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15 CCWLIM40 CWLIM
16
41
17
42
18 SVONEN43
19
44
20 ALARM 45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24 GND24V49 +24VIN
25 GND24V50
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG)
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP)
HP20V
(3M20F)
CABLE
CN2X-A
CN2Y-A
CN2Z-A
CN2A-A
CN2
1 PW
2 /PW
3 PV
4 /PV
5 PU
6 /PU
7
8
9 0V
10
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 Board NO.1,2
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
+24V
15
49 +24VIN
ENBLB 16
SERVO ON
--> ON
POWER
READY
PRDYB 18
39 ESTOP
24
COMMON
24
GND2
SERVO
*OVL ALAR
M
SALM 21
20 ALARM
SERVO
READY
SRDY 22
25 GND24
VRD
20
※
ANALOG
Speed Command
Voltage Output
VCMD 14
1
GND
PBO
A
ANALOG
Speed Command
V lt
I
t
※
/PZ
FG
/PB
PZ
/PA
PB
ENCODER
Phase B Signal Input
ENCODER
Phase Z Signal Input
PAH
9
6
PAL
10
31 /PBO
PBH
7
7
PBL
8
32 /PAO
PZH
5
5
PZL
※
30 /PZO
26
PG
15
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
OPTICAL ENCODER
A
B
C
D
E
F
K
L
M
N
P
R
H
G
※
CN2-12
J
represents twisted pair cable
9-8
ENCODER
Phase A Signal Output
ENCODER
Phase Z Signal Output
Connect to the Earth
Plate of the Cabinet
OPTICAL ENCODER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ENCODER
Phase B Signal Output
GN
represents twisted pair cable
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
PZO
6
0V
PA
5V
PAO
23
(B) Connecting FLANGE SIZE 130,180 MOTOR and FDA 5000
※
27 SPDIN
1
represents twisted pair cable
FG
SERVO ALARM
--> OFF
0V
CN2-12
LG AC SERVO UNIT
PA
CN2-18
/PA
CN2-15
PB
CN2-16
/PB
CN2-13
PZ
CN2-14
/PZ
CN2-11
PU
CN2-5
/PU
CN2-6
PV
CN2-3
/PV
CN2-4
PW
CN2-1
/PW
CN2-2
+5V
CN2-19
0V
CN2-9
CLOCKWISE
ROTATION
I hibit I
t
Emergency
Stop Input
Signal
40 CWLIM
※
※
ALARM
RESET
38 ALMRST
PRDYA 19
(A) When connecting FLANGE SIZE 60,80 MOTOR and FDA 5000
FG
Counterclockwise
Rotation Inhibit
Iniput Signal
15 CCWLIM
AC SERVO MOTOR
LG AC SERVO UNIT
PA
CN2-18
/PA
CN2-15
PB
CN2-16
/PB
CN2-13
PZ
CN2-14
/PZ
CN2-11
PU
CN2-5
/PU
CN2-6
PV
CN2-3
/PV
CN2-4
PW
CN2-1
/PW
CN2-2
+5V
CN2-19
0V
CN2-9
SERVO ON
Input Signal
18 SVONEN
ENBLA 17
ENCODER
Phase A Signal Input
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
LG FDA-5000/6000
AC SERVO UNIT
CN1
CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
PG
12. AC SERVO Connection
12.3 HYOSUNG/YASKAWA
12.3 Connection with HYOSUNG/YASKAWA AC SERVO
MAIN UNIT
Hyosung/YASKAWA AC SERVO UNIT
(EPS3/4 Board NO.1,2)
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
1 AG
CABLE
CNA1,2,3
CNA4,5,6
14 VCMD
2
15 +24V
3
16 ENBLB
4
17 ENBLA
5 PZH
18
6 PZL
19
7 PBH
20 0V
8 PBL
21 SALM
9 PAH
22 SRDY
10 PAL
23 0V
11
24 COMMON
12
25
Dsub25P
H50F
13
1CN
1 SG
2
3
4
5
6
7 +24VIN
8 S-ON
9
10
11
12 IN-A
13 SG-A
14 IN-B
15 SG-B
16
17 SG
18
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 Board NO.1,2
CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
CNA1,2,3,5,6,7
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
PCO
34
*PCO 35
36
37
38
39
40
N-OT
41
S-RDY- 42
S-RDY+ 43
44
45
46
SG
47
48
49
50
PAO
*PAO
PBO
*PBO
Hyosung/YASKAWA
AC SERVO UNIT
1CN
SHIELD CABLE
+24V
ENBLB
SERVO ON
--> ON
ENBLA
15
7
+24VIN
16
8
S-ON
17
20
ALM+
ALM-
26 N-OT
0V
Counterclockwise
Rotation Inhibit
Iniput Signal
Power Failure
Inhibit Input
Signal
41 P-OT
P-OT
SERVO ON
Input Signal
32
17
COMMON
SG
24
38 ALM+
OV
SERVO
ALARM
SALM 21
39 ALM-
*VRD
SERVO
READY
SRDY 22
27 S-RDY-
28 S-RDY+
SERVO ALARM
--> OFF
SERVO READY
--> ON
※
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG)
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP)
H20F
CABLE
2CNX-A
2CNY-A
2CNZ-A
2CNA-A
2CN
1 0P
2 0P
3 0P
4 +5P
5 +5P
6 +5P
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
PU
*PU
PV
*PV
PW
*PW
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ANALOG
Speed Command
Voltage Output
PC
*PC
PA
*PA
PB
*PB
FG
VCMD 14
14 IN-B
1
15 SG-B
A
12 IN-A
13 SG-A
※
ENCODER
Phase A Signal Input
ENCODER
Phase B Signal Input
AC SERVO MOTOR
ENCODER
Phase Z Signal Input
PAH
9
33
PAL
10
34 *PAO
PBH
7
35
PBL
8
36 *PBO
PZH
5
19
PZL
※
20 *PCO
16
A
17
B
PB
18
C
*PB
19
D
PC
14
E
*PC
15
F
PU
8
K
*PU
9
L
PV
10
M
*PV
11
N
PW
12
P
*PW
13
R
+5P
4
H
0P
1
G
+5P
5
0P
2
+5P
6
0P
3
FG
20
J
※
represents twisted pair cable
※
9-9
ENCODER
Phase A Signal Output
ENCODER
Phase B Signal Output
ENCODER
Phase Z Signal Output
SG
Connect to the Earth
Plate of the Cabinet
2CN
*PA
PCO
1
OPTICAL ENCODER
PA
PBO
6
represents twisted pair cable
CABLE 2CNX,2CNY,2CNZ,2CNA
SHIELD CABLE
AC SERVO UNIT
PAO
23
0V
Hyosung/YASKAWA
ANALOG
Speed Command
Voltage Input
PG
APPENDIX
12.4 CONNECTION WITH PANASONIC MINAS A SERIES AC SERVO
MAIN UNIT
CABLE
PANASONIC MINAS A SERIES
(EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2)
CNA1,2,3
AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
CNA4,5,6
CN I/F
1 AG
HP50V
1
14 VCMD
26 ZEROSPD
2
Dsub25P
(3M50F)
2
15 +24V
27
3
3
16 ENBLB
28
4
4
17 ENBLA
29 SRV-ON
5 PZH
5
18
30
6 PZL
6
19
31
7 PBH
7 COM+
20 0V
32 C-MODE
8 PBL
8 CWL
21 SALM
33
9 PAH
9 CCWL
22 SRDY
34 S-RDY10 PAL
23 0V
10
35 S-RDY+
11
24 COMMON
11
36 ALM12
25
12
37 ALM+
13
13
38
14 SPR/TRQR 39
15 GND
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21 OA+
46
22 OA47
23 OZ+
48
24 OZ49
25
50
MAIN UNIT
PANASONIC MINAS A SERIES
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2
AC SERVO UNIT
CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
CN I/F
+24V
15
7
ENBLB16
SERVO ON
--> ON
POWER
READY
COM+
29 SRV-ON
ENBLA17
PRDYB18
9
CCWL
8
CWL
PRDYA19
26 ZEROSPD
32 C-MODE
SERVO ON
INPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCK
WISE ROTATION
INHIBIT INIPUT
SIGNAL
ALARM
RESET
CLOCKWISE
ROTATION
INHIBIT INPUT
SIGNAL
EMERGENCY
STOP INPUT
SIGNAL
COMMON24
*OVL
SERVO
ALARM
VRD
SERVO
READY
SALM 21
37 ALM+
COM-
36 ALMSRDY 22
35 S-RDY+
34 S-RDY-
20
SERVO ALARM
--> OFF
SERVO READY
--> ON
41 COM-
0V
ANALOG
SPEED
COMMAND
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
OB+
OBFG
※
14 SPR/TRQR ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
VCMD 14
1
15 GND
A
※
FOLLOWING CONNECTORS ARE USED
FOR MOTORS WITH 1KW OR HIGHER CAPACITY
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG)
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP)
HP20V
(3M20F)
CABLE
CN SIGX
CN SIGY
CN SIGZ
CN SIGA
CN SIG
1 0V
2 0V
3 +5V
4 +5V
5 BATT+
6 BATT7
8
9
11
12
13
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL
INPUT
PAH 9
48 OB+
PAL
10
49 OB-
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL
INPUT
PBH
7
21 OA+
PBL
8
22 OA-
PZH
5
23 OZ+
6
24 OZ-
23
50
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL
INPUT
14
15
16
17
18
10
20
0V
RX/TX
-RX/-TX
※
19
PZL
CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
OF THE CABINET
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
AC SERVO MOTOR
CABLE CN SIGX,CN SIGY
CABLE CN SIGX,CN SIGY
SHIELD CABLE
MOTOR ENCODER
CN SIG
BATT+
5
T
BATT-
6
S
RX/TX
17
K
-RX/-TX
18
L
+5V
4
H
0V
2
G
+5V
3
0V
1
FG
20
※
J
※
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
9-10
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL
OUTPUT
FG
FG
PANASONIC MINAS A
AC SERVO UNIT
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL
OUTPUT
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL
OUTPUT
PG
12. AC SERVO CONNECTION
12.5 MITSUBISHI MR-J2
12.5 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI MR-J2 SERIES AC SERVO
MAIN UNIT
CABLE
MITSUBISHI MR-J2 SERIES
(EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2)
CNA1,2,3
AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
CNA4,5,6
CN1B
14 VCMD
HP20V
1 LG
11
1 AG
2
15 +24V
Dsub25P
(3M20F)
2 VC
12
3
16 ENBLB
3 VDD
13 COM
17 ENBLA
4
14
4
5 PZH
18 PRDYB
5 SON
15 EMG
6
6 PZL
19 PRDYA
16 LSP
7
7 PBH
20 0V
17 LSN
8 ST1
8 PBL
21 SALM
18 ALM
9
9 PAH
22 SRDY
19
10 PAL
23 0V
10 SG
20 SG
11
24 COMMON
12
25
CN1A
1
2
3
4
5 LZ
6 LA
7 LB
8
9
13
HP20V
(3M20F)
HC-SF,HC-RF SERIES MOTOR
MS3106B20-29S (PLUG)
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP)
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2
MITSUBISHI MR-J2 SERIES
AC SERVO UNIT
CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
CN1B
3
PRDYB18
POWER
READY
5
SON
8
ST1
ENBLB16
POWER FAILURE
COMMAND INPUT
SIGNAL
ENBLA17
20
17 LSN
COUNTERCLOCKWI
SE ROTATION
INHIBIT INIPUT
SIGNAL
16 LSP
CLOCKWISE
ROTATION
INHIBIT INPUT
SIGNAL
15 EMG
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
0V
10
+24V
15
11
20
SG
COMMON24
12
*OVL
13
SERVO
ALARM
SALM 21
18 ALM
SERVO
ALARM
--> OFF
14
LZR
LAR
17 LBR
15
18
19
20
※
ANALOG
SPEED
COMMAND
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
16
10
RD
SG
VCMD 14
1
SG
2
VC
1
LG
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
A
CN1A
SERVO
READY
SRDY 22
19 RD
SERVO READY
--> ON
※
CN2
1 LG
2 LG
3
4
5
6
7 MR
8
9 BAT
HP20V
(3M20F)
SERVO ON
INPUT SIGNAL
PRDYA19
SERVO ON
--> ON
VRD
CABLE
CN2X
AC SERVO MOTOR CN2Y
CN2Z
HC-MF,HC-UF,HA-FF SERIES MOTORCN2A
1-172161-9 (MAKER:AMP)
+24V
VDD
13 COM
ENCODER
PHASE A
SIGNAL INPUT
11
12
LG
ENCODER
PHASE B
SIGNAL INPUT
13
14
ENCODER
PHASE Z
SIGNAL INPUT
15
16
17
18
PAH 9
7
PAL
10
17 LBR
PBH
7
6
20
8
16 LAR
5
5
6
15 LZR
23
20
※
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
AC SERVO MOTOR
A) FOR HC-SF,HC-RF SERIES MOTOR
CABLE CN2X,CN2Y
MITSUBISHI MR-J2
CABLE CN2Z,CN2A
SHIELD CABLE
AC SERVO UNIT
CN SIG
BAT
9
NOTE)
MOTOR ENCODER
F
LG
1
G
MR
7
C
MRR
17
D
P5
18
S
LG
2
R
P5
20
LG
12
PG
※
GROUND PLATE
N
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
NOTE) CONNECT BAT SIGNAL FOR ABSOLUTE SYSTEM ONLY
※
B) FOR HC-MF,HC-UF,HA-FF SERIES MOTOR
CABLE CN2X,CN2Y
MITSUBISHI MR-J2
CABLE CN2Z,CN2A
SHIELD CABLE
AC SERVO UNIT
CN SIG
BAT
9
NOTE)
MOTOR ENCODER
3
BT
7
1
MR
17
2
MRR
P5
18
7
P5
LG
2
8
LG
P5
20
LG
12
9
SHD
LG
1
MR
MRR
PG
※
GROUND PLATE
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
NOTE) CONNECT BAT SIGNAL FOR ABSOLUTE SYSTEM ONLY
※
9-11
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL
OUTPUT
LZ
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL
OUTPUT
SG
0V
P5
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL
OUTPUT
LA
PZH
19
10
LB
PBL
PZL
MRR
P5
SG
CONNECT TO THE EARTH
PLATE OF THE CABINET
APPENDIX
12.6 CONNECTION WITH DAEWOO M SERIES AC SERVO
1) IF SERVO UNIT CONNECTOR IS HALF PITCH CONNECTOR (3M)
MAIN UNIT
CABLE
(EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2)
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
14 VCMD
1 AG
15 +24V
2
16 ENBLB
3
17 ENBLA
4
5 PZH
18
19
6 PZL
7 PBH
20 0V
21 SALM
8 PBL
9 PAH
22 SRDY
10 PAL
23 0V
11
24 COMMON
12
25
13
DAEWOO M SERIES
AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3
CN1
CNA4,5,6
1 24GND 19
20
HP36V
2
21 SVON/
Dsub25P
(3M36F)
3
22 P-OT
4
23 N-OT
5
6
24
7 COM1/ 25
8 ALM
26
27
9 PLA
10 PLA/
28 PLB
11
29 PLB/
12
30 PLZ
13
31 PLZ/
14
32 DGND
15
33
16
34
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
+24V
SERVO ON
--> ON
HP20V
(3M20F)
CABLE
CN2X-A
CN2Y-A
CN2Z-A
CN2A-A
SERVO ON
INPUT SIGNAL
21 SVON/
COUNTERCLOCK
WISE ROTATION
INHIBIT INIPUT
SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE
ROTATION
INHIBIT INPUT
SIGNAL
ENBLA17
23 N-OT
22 P-OT
+24V
15
1
24GND
COMMON24
*OVL
SERVO
ALARM
VRD
SERVO
READY
SALM 21
8
ALM
7
COM1/
SERVO ALARM
--> OFF
SRDY 22
20
0V
17 VELCMD35
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG)
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP)
CN1
ENBLB16
※
ANALOG
SPEED
COMMAND
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
18 VELCMD/ 36
CN2
1 +5VE
2 +5VE
3 +5VE
4
5 PA
6 PA/
7 PB
8 PB/
9 PZ
10 PZ/
DAEWOO M SERIES
AC SERVO UNIT
CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
VCMD 14
17 VELCMD
ANALOG
18 VELCMD/ SPEED COMMAND
1
VOLTAGE INPUT
A
※
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
DGND
DGND
DGND
PU
PU/
PV
PV/
PW
PW/
FG
PAH 9
9
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL
INPUT
PAL
10
10 PLA/
PLA
PBH
7
28 PLB
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL
INPUT
PBL
8
29 PLB/
PZH
5
30 PLZ
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL
INPUT
PZL
6
31 PLZ/
23
32
0V
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL
OUTPUT
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL
OUTPUT
DGN
AC SERVO MOTOR
※
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL
OUTPUT
CONNECT TO THE EARTH
PLATE OF THE CABINET
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
2) IF SERVO UNIT CONNECTOR IS HONDA CONNECTOR
MAIN UNIT
DAEWOO M SERIES
(EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2)
AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
CABLE
CN1
14 VCMD
CNA1,2,3
1 PLA
26
1 AG
2
CNA4,5,6
2 PLA/
15 +24V
27 ALM
3
Dsub25P
H50F
3
16 ENBLB
28 ALM/
17 ENBLA
4
29
4
5 PZH
5
18
30
6 PZL
6
19
31 SVON/
7 PBH
20 0V
7
32 24GND
8 PBL
8
21 SALM
33 PLZ
9 PAH
9 SG
22 SRDY
34 PLZ/
10 PAL
23 0V
10
35
11
24 COMMON
12
25
11
13
12
37 VELCMD
38 VELCMD/
14
39
15
40
42
18
43
PLB
20 PLB/
44
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG)
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP)
H20F
CABLE
CN2X-A
CN2Y-A
CN2Z-A
CN2A-A
45
SERVO ON
--> ON
47
23
N-OT
48 P-OT
24
25
49
50
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ENBLA 17
COUNTERCLOCKWIS
E ROTATION INHIBIT
INIPUT SIGNAL
47 N-OT
CLOCKWISE
ROTATION INHIBIT
INPUT SIGNAL
48 P-OT
+24V
15
32
COMMON 24
45
24GND
*OVL
SERVO
ALARM
SALM 21
VRD
SERVO
READY
SRDY 22
27 ALM
28 ALM/
SERVO ALARM
--> OFF
20
0V
24GND
46 ALMRST/
12
SERVO ON INPUT
SIGNAL
31 SVON/
※
VCMD 14
37 VELCMD ANALOG
38 VELCMD/ SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
1
A
※
22
11
CN1
+24V
ANALOG
SPEED
COMMAND
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
21
CN2
1 SG
2 SG
3 SG
4 +5V
5 +5V
6 +5V
7
8 PU
9 PU/
10 PV
DAEWOO M SERIES
AC SERVO UNIT
CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
ENBLB 16
41
17
19
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6
36
13
16
MAIN UNIT
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL
INPUT
PAH
9
1
PLA
PAL
10
2
PLA/
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL
INPUT
PBH
7
19 PLB
PBL
8
20 PLB/
PZH
5
33 PLZ
PZL
6
34 PLZ/
23
9
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL
INPUT
0V
PV/
PW
PW/
PZ
PZ/
PA
PA/
PB
PB/
FG
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL
OUTPUT
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL
OUTPUT
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL
OUTPUT
SG
DIO3 BOARD NO.1,2,3
+24V
46 ALMRST/
EMERGE
NCY
Y□.□
0V
CNOUT1,2,3
□: DETERMINED BY SEQUENCE PROGRAM
CONNECT TO THE EARTH
PLATE OF THE CABINET
*EMG
TMRS
TMRB
AC SERVO MOTOR
10
300
G0.4
R□.□
TMRS
SVRES
R□.□
Y□.□
ADD TO LOW LEVEL SEQUENCE
9-12
SERVO RESET
(ALMRST)
※
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
12. AC SERVO CONNECTION
12.7 AC220V POWER CONNECTION
12.7 CONNECTION BETWEEN AC SERVO UNIT AND AC 220V POWER
MAIN UINT (DIO3 BOARD)
RELAY
DV
CNOUT1-□
Y□.□
POW
RELAY MC
0V
OV
OV
+24V
CNOUT1-1,24,10,33,17
AVR
NOTE)□: THIS VALUE IS DETERMINED BY SEQUENCE PROGRAM
F7.2
SPARK
KILLER
Y□.□
PLC HIGH LEVEL PROCESSING
AC SERVO UNIT
MC
R
AC 3Ø
220V
50/60Hz
NF
S
MAIN CIRCUIT
POWER
T
r
CONTROL
POWER
NOTE)
t
NOTE) CONNECT CONTROL POWER WHEN THERE IS A CONNECTOR
9-13
APPENDIX
13. CONNECTION BETWEEN SENTROL2 AND SPINDLE UNIT
13.1 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE SG-J SERIES
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
1 AG
14 VCMD
2 DOCOM15 +24V
3 ORC
16 SRN
4 +5V
17 SRI
5 PZH
18 ESP
6 PZL
19 SET
7 PBH
20 0V
8 PBL
21 FA
9 PAH
22 ZS
10 PAL
23 0V
11 HSP
24 COMMON
12
25 USC
13 ORA
Dsub25P
H50F
CABLE CNS1
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI SG-J
CON1
1
33
2
19
34
3
20
35
4
21
36
5
22 RG
37
6 +24V
23 CES
38
7 SET
24
39
8 +24V
25 IN4
40
9
26
41
10 RG
27
42
11 FA
28
43
12 FC
29
44
13 RG
30 SES
45
14
31 SE1
46
15
US
ZS
OUT3
32
SPINDLE
TROUBLE
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
12 FC
21
11 FA
ZS
22
34 ZS
ZERO SPEED
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
ORA
13
35 OUT3
ORIENTATION
ORIENTATION
COMPLETE
COMPLETE
--> ON
OUTPUT SIGNAL
USC
SPEED MATCH SPEED MATCH
OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
+24V
ZERO SPEED
ZS1
(F44.6) INPUT SIGNAL
ORA1
(F44.4)
ORIENT
INPUT SIGNAL
SPEED MATCH
USO
(F44.7) INPUT SIGNAL
ALARM
--> OFF
FA
*FA SPINDLE TROUBLE
(F44.5) INPUT SIGNAL
25
33 US
COMMON
24
10
DOCOM
2
8
ESP
18
17 IN5
SET
19
7
SRN
16
45 SRN
SRI
17
46 SRI
ORC
3
25 IN4
HSP
11
47 IN7
ZERO SPEED
--> ON
RG
49
18
+24V
6
48
IN5
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI SG-J
CON1
CABLE CNS1
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
CNS1
SRN
SRI
47 IN7
16
17
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
50
*ESP
(G43.4)
EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT
SIGNAL
EMERGENCY STOP --> OFF
INPUT SIGNAL
SET1
(G42.4)
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGNAL
COMPLETION --> ON
SRN
(G43.6)
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND --> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
SRI
(G43.5)
CABLE CNS1P
POSITION CODE
(FOR LATHE)
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND --> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
ORC1
(G43.7)
ORIENTATION COMMAND OUTPUT
SIGNAL
ORIENTATION COMMAND --> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
HSP
(G42.2)
RAPID TAPPING OUTPUT SIGNAL
RAPID TAPPING --> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
+24V
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
SET
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION
INPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
ROTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
ORIENTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNALL
HIGH SPEED TAPPING
INPUT SIGNAL
23 CES
22
20
13
※
0V
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
VCMD
RG
14
31 SE1
1
30 SES
A
※
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
AG
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
CONNECT TO THE EARTH
PLATE OF THE CABINET
13.2 CONNECITON WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE SF SERIES
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
1 AG
14 VCMD
2 DOCOM15 +24V
3 ORC
16 SRN
4 +5V
17 SRI
5 PZH
18 ESP
6 PZL
19 SET
7 PBH
20 0V
8 PBL
21 FA
9 PAH
22 ZS
23 0V
10 PAL
11
24 COMMON
12
13
Dsub25P
H50F
CABLE CNS1
25
USC
ORA
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI SF
CON1
1
2
19
3 ZS1
20
4 ZS2
21
5
22 ORA1
6 +24V
23 ORA2
7 SET1
24
8 SET2
25 ORC1
9 US10
26 ORC2
10 DO24
27
11 FA
28
12 FC
29
13
30 SES
14 OS
31 SE1
15
32 SE2
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
+24V
COMMON 24
33
34
35
6
*FA
(F44.5)
SPINDLE
TROUBLE IINPUT
SIGNAL
ZS1
(F44.6)
ZERO SPEED
INPUT SIGNAL
ZS
22
3
ZS1
ORA1
(F44.4)
4
ZS2
ORIENTATION
INPUT SIGNAL
ORA
13
22 ORA1
USO
(F44.7)
SPEED MATCH
INPUT SIGNAL
USC
25
9
20
10
FA
21
11 FA
SPINDLE
TROUBLE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ALARM
--> OFF
ZERO SPEED
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ZERO SPEED
--> ON
ORIENTATION
COMPLETION
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ORIENTATION
COMPLETION
--> ON
SPEED
MATCHOUTPUT
SIGNAL
SPEED MATCH
--> ON
12 FC
36
37
38
39
40
41
23 ORA2
42
US10
0V
43
DO24
44
16
SRN
SRI
47 ESP1
48 ESP2
17
49
18
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI SF
CON1
CABLE CNS1
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
+24V
45
*ESP
(G43.4)
46
DOCOM
EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT SIGNAL
EMERGENCY STOP --> OFF
ESP
2
48 EPS2
18
47 EPS1
RV
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
RV
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION
INPUT SIGNAL
MACHINE PREPARATION
SET1 COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G42.4) COMPLETION --> ON
SRN
(G43.6)
50
CABLE CNS1P
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
--> ON
SET
19
7
SRN
16
45 SRN
SET1
RV
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
SRI
(G43.5)
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND --> ON
SRI
17
46 SRI
RV
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
ROTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
ORCI
(G43.7)
ORIENTATION COMMAND OUTPUT
SIGNAL
ORIENTATION COMMAND --> ON
ORC
3
25 ORC1
RV
ORIENTATION
COMMAND INPUT
POSITION CODE
(FOR LATHE)
※
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
VCMD 14
1
A
31 SE1
30 SES
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
32 SE2
AG
※
9-14
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
CONNECT TO THE EARTH
PLATE OF THE CABINET
13. SPINDLE UNIT CONNECTION
13.3 MITSUBISI MDS-A-SPA
13.3 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE MDS-A-SPA SERIES
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
1 AG
14 VCMD
2 DOCOM15 +24V
3 ORC
16 SRN
4
17 SRI
5 PZH
18 ESP
6 PZL
19 SET
7 PBH
20 0V
8 PBL
21 FA
9 PAH
22 ZS
10 PAL
23 0V
24 COMMON
11 HSP
12
25 USC
13 ORA
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPA
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPA
CABLE CNS1
SHIELD CABLE
CNS1
Dsub25P
HP20V
CABLE CNS1
CN10
HP20V
10
20
1
11
..
CN11
17
..
10
20
1
ZS1
(F44.6)
ZERO SPEED
INPUT SIGANL
ORA1
(F44.4)
ORIENTATION
INPUT SIGNAL
USO
(F44.7)
SPEED MATCH
INPUT SIGNAL
1
2
3
4
FA
20
GND
SYA
SYB
SYZ
11
..
*ESP
(G43.4)
OUT2
FC
10
EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT
SIGNAL
EMERGENCY STOP --> OFF
SET1
(G42.4)
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGANL
COMPLETION --> ON
SRN
(G43.6)
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
--> ON
SRI
(G43.5)
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND --> ON
ORC1
(G43.7)
ORIENTATION COMMAND
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ORIENTATION COMMAND --> ON
HSP
(G42.2)
RAPID TAPPING OUTPUT SIGNAL
RAPID TAPPING --> ON
1
2
3
4
5
CABLE CN6
CN6
HP20V
10
ZERO
SPEED -->
ON
ORIENTATION
COMPLETE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ORIENTATION
COMPLETE
--> ON
SPEED MATCH
OUTPUT SIGNAL
SPEED MATCH
--> ON
CN11-17 OUT2
USC
25
CN11-8 OUT3
COMMON
24
CN10-10
RG
DOCOM
2
ESP
18
SET
19
SRN
16
CN10-11 SRN
SRI
17
CN10-2 SRI
ORC
3
CN10-3 IN2
HSP
11
CN10-12 IN1
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CN10-1 REDY
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION
INPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
ROTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
ORIENTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
VCMD
CN10-13 IN3
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT
19
11
12
13
14
14
CN8A-7 SE1
1
CN8A-8 SE2
RAPID TAPPING
INPUT SIGNAL
GND
MA*
MB*
MZ*
GND
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT
20
PAH
9
PAL
10
PBH
7
CN8A-3 SYB
PBL
8
CN8A-13 SYB*
PZH
5
CN8A-4 SYZ
PZL
6
CN8A-14 SYZ*
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPA
CN6
CABLE CN6
(A)
2
(N)
12 MA*
MA
(C)
3
(R)
13 MB*
MB
(B)
4
(P)
14 MZ*
MZ
(H)
10 P5
(K)
1
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT
GND
19 P5
11 GND
20 P5
15 GND
CONNECTOR CASE
0V
CONNECT TO THE
EARTH PLATE OF
THE CABINET
※
9-15
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL OUTPUT
CN8A-12 SYA*
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL OUTPUT
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL OUTPUT
CN8A-1
GND
0V
※
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND VOLTAGE INPUT
0V ~ +10V
(RIGID TAPPING:±10V)
CN8A-2 SYA
23
P5
P5
GND
※
AG
18
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
PG
ZERO SPEED
OUTPUT SIGNAL
※
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
17
19
P5
CN11-7 OUT1
13
..
9
POSITION CODER
22
CN10-19 CES1
SYA*
13 SYB*
14 SYZ*
15
..
POSITION CODER
ALARM
--> OFF
ORA
20
GND
MA
MB
MZ
SPINDLE TROUBLE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CN10-17
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT
CONNECT FOR ORIENTATION OPTION LATHE
CONNECT FOR RIGID TAPPING OPTION MILLING
CN12-10 FA
12
..
7 SE1
8 SE2
9
CN12-20 FC
21
20
..
10
15
0V
..
..
CN8A
SPINDLE TROUBLE
INPUT SIGNAL
ZS
11
..
*FA
(F44.5)
18
..
HP20V
FA
..
7 OUT1
8 OUT3
HP20V
CN12
+24V
1 REDY 11 SRN
2 SRI
12 IN1
3 IN2
13 IN3
4
14
5
15
6
16
7
17 +24V
8
18
9
19 CES1
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
OF THE CABINET
APPENDIX
13.4 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE MDS-A-SPJA SERIES
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
1 AG
14 VCMD
2 DOCOM15 +24V
3 ORC
16 SRN
4 +5V
17 SRI
5 PZH
18 ESP
6 PZL
19 SET
7 PBH
20 0V
8 PBL
21 FA
9 PAH
22 ZS
10 PAL
23 0V
11 HSP
24 COMMON
12
25 USC
13 ORA
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPJA
Dsub25P
CABLE CNS1
CN1
20B
19B
18B
17B
16B
15B
14B
13B
12B
11B
10B
9B
8B
7B
6B
5B
4B
3B
2B
1B
F40
NOTE)
NOT) CN1 SYMBOL
CONNECTOR
HIF3C-40D-2.54C
PIN
HIF3-2226SCA
MAKER HIROSE KOREA
NOT REQUIRED WHEN RIGID TAPPING
WITH BUILT IN ENCODER
REDY
SRI
IN2
US
OUT1
FA
GND
SYA
SYB
SYZ
..
POSITION CODER
10
1
2
3
4
CN2 5
6
7
8
9
AC SPINDLE MOTOR
10
20A
19A
18A
17A
16A
15A
14A
13A
12A
11A
10A
9A
8A
7A
6A
5A
4A
3A
2A
1A
+24V
SRN
IN1
IN3
*FA
(F44.5)
SPINDLE TROUBLE
INPUT SIGNAL
CES1
ZS1
(F44.6)
ZERO SPEED INPUT
SIGNAL
ORA1
(F44.4)
ORIENTATION
COMPLETE
INPUT SIGNAL
USO
(F44.7)
SPEED MATCH
INPUT SIGNAL
15
FA
CN1-2A FC
21
22
CN1-8A ZS
ZERO SPEED
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ZERO SPEED
--> ON
ORA
13
CN1-7B OUT1
ORIENTATION
COMPLETE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ORIENTATION
COMPLETE
--> ON
USC
25
CN1-8B US
SPEED MATCH
OUTPUT SIGNAL
COMMON
24
20
EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT SIGNAL
EMERGENCY STOP --> OFF
CN1-3A
2
ESP
18
CN1-19A IN1
SET
19
CN1-20B REDY
SRN
16
CN1-20A SRN
SRI
17
CN1-19B SRI
ORC
3
CN1-18B IN2
HSP
11
CN1-18A IN3
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
P24
SET1 MACHINE PREPARAITON
(G42.4) COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGNAL
COMPLETION --> ON
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
SRN
(G43.6) OUPUT SIGNAL POWER FAILURE
RG
FC
COMMAND --> ON
GND
SYA*
13 SYB*
14 SYZ*
12
ORC1 ORIENT COMMAND OUTPUT
(G43.7) SIGNAL
ORIENT COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
CN1-16A CES1
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
SE1
19
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P5
20
VCMD
14
CN3-18 SE1
1
CN3-9 SE2
※
AG
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT
GND
PC*
PB*
PA*
RG
MA*
MB*
MZ*
P5
P5
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT
CN3-2 SYA
PAL
10
CN3-12 SYA*
PBH
7
CN3-3 SYB
PBL
8
CN3-13 SYB*
PZH
5
CN3-4 SYZ
PZL
6
CN3-14 SYZ*
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPJA
CN2
P
(A)
4
(N)
14 PA*
PA
(C)
3
(R)
13 PB*
(B)
2
(P)
12 PC*
(H)
10 P5
(K)
1
PB
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT
PC
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT
GND
20 P5
11 GND
CONNECTOR CASE
0V
CONNECT TO THE
EARTH PLATE OF
THE CABINET
※
9-16
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL OUTPUT
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL OUTPUT
GN
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
CABLE CN6
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL OUTPUT
CN3-1
0V
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
GN
9
23
※
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
PAH
BUILT IN ENCODER
POSITION CODER
RAPID TAPPING
INPUT SIGNAL
※
20
GND
PC
PB
PA
MOH
MA
MB
MZ
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
ROTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
ORIENT COMMAND --> ON
HSP RAPID TAPPING OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G42.2) RAPID TAPPING --> ON
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION
INPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND INPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
SRI
COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G43.5) COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND --> ON
11
18
SPEED MATCH
--> ON
RG
DOCOM
ZS
ALARM
--> OFF
ZS
0V
*ESP
(G43.4)
SPINDLE TROUBLE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CN1-2B FA
CN1-5A P24
..
8
9 SE2
HP20V
AC SPINDLE UNIT
MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPJA
CABLE CNS1
SHIELD CABLE
CNS1
1
2
3
CN3 4
HP20V
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
OF THE CABINET
13. SPINDLE UNIT CONNECTION
13.5 FUJI 5000M3
13.5 CONNECTION WITH FUJI SPINDLE FRENIC 5000M3
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
1 AG
14 VCMD
2 DOCOM15 +24V
3
16 SRN
4 +5V
17 SRI
5 PZH
18
6 PZL
19
7 PBH
20 0V
8 PBL
21 AL
9 PAH
22 SST
23
10 PAL
24 COMMON
11 RST
12
25 SAR
Dsub25P
H50F
CABLE CNS1
AC SPINDLE UNIT
FUJI FRENIC 5000M3
CN1
1 ASS1
23 ASM
2
13
24 FWD
3
14
25 REV
4
15
26
5
16
27 RST
6
17
28 SST
7 CM
18
29 SAR
8
19
30 AL
9
20
31
10
21
32
11
22
33
12
34
P
13
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
+24V
*AL
(F44.5)
ZERO SPEED
INPUT SIGNAL
SAR
(F44.7)
SPEED MATCH
INPUT SIGNAL
SRN
(G43.6)
CABLE CNS1P
SRI
(G43.5)
NOTE) SET PARAMETER NO. 9103 AS FOLLOWS.
9103
SP1 SP0
1
0
15
34 P
AL
21
30 AL
ALARM
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
SST
22
28 SST
ZERO SPEED
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
SAR
25
29 SAR
COMMON
24
RST
11
27 RST
RV
SRN
16
24 FWD
RV
SRI
17
25 REV
RV
2
7
ALARM
INPUT SIGNAL
SST
(F44.6)
RST
(G42.5)
AC SPINDLE UNIT
FUJI FRENIC 5000M3
CN1
CABLE CNS1
20PIN SHIELD CABLE
ALARM RESET OUTPUT
SIGNAL RESET --> OFF
INPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
--> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND
--> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
DOCOM
SPEED MATCH
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
CM
0V
※
POSITION CODER
(FOR LATHE)
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
VCMD 14
1
1
ZERO SPEED
--> ON
SPEED MATCH
--> ON
ALARM RESET INPUT
SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
ROTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
ASS1
23 ASM
AG
ALARM
--> OFF
0V
20
0V
※
CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
OF THE CABINET
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
13.6 CONNECTION WITH FUJI SPINDLE FRENIC 5000MS5
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
14 VCMD
1 AG
2 DOCOM15 +24V
16 SRN
3
17 SRI
4 +5V
5 PZH
18
6 PZL
19
7 PBH
20 0V
8 PBL
21 AL
9 PAH
22 SST
23
10 PAL
11 RST
24 COMMON
12
25 SAR
Dsub25P
HP20V
CABLE CNS1
AC SPINDLE UNIT
FUJI FRENIC 5000MS5
CN3
1 FWD 11 SST
2 REV
12 SAR
3 RST
13 AL
4 EMG 14 CMO
5 CMS 15
6
16
7 ASS
17
8 ASM 18
9
19
10
20
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
+24V
*AL
(F44.5)
ALARM
INPUT SIGNAL
SST
(F44.6)
ZERO SPEED
INPUT SIGNAL
SAR
(F44.7)
SPEED MATCH
INPUT SIGNAL
14 CMO
21
13 AL
ALARM
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ALARM
--> OFF
SST
22
11 SST
ZERO SPEED
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ZERO SPEED
--> ON
SAR
25
12 SAR
SPEED MATCH
OUTPUT
SIGANL
SPEED MATCH
--> ON
COMMON
24
20
RST
(G42.5)
ALARM RESET OUTPUT SIGNAL
RESET --> OFF
INPUT SIGNAL
SRN
(G43.6)
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
--> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
SRI
(G43.5)
CABLE CNS1P
NOTE) SET PARAMETER NO. 9103 AS FOLLOWS.
SP1 SP0
1
0
15
AL
0V
13
9103
AC SPINDLE UNIT
FUJI FRENIC 5000MS5
CN3
CABLE CNS1
SHIELD CABLE
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND
--> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
11
3
RST
RV
SRN
16
1
FWD
RV
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
SRI
17
2
REV
RV
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
ROTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
4
EMG
RV
5
CMS
DOCOM2
EXTERNAL ALARM
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
0V
※
VCMD 14
1
AG
POSITION CODER
(FOR LATHE)
ALARM RESET
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
RST
7
ASS
8
ASM
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
0V
CONNECT TO THE EARTH
PLATE OF THE CABINET
※
9-17
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
APPENDIX
13.7 CONNECTION WITH YASAKAWA VS626M5
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
CNS1
1 AG
14 VCMD
2 DOCOM15 +24V
3 ORC
16 SRN
4
17 SRI
5 PZH
18 ESP
6 PZL
19 SET
7 PBH
20 0V
8 PBL
21 FA
9 PAH
22 ZS
10 PAL
23 0V
11 HSP
24 COMMON
12
25 USC
13 ORA
AC SPINDLE UNIT
YASAKAWA VS626 (CIMR-M5)
Dsub25P
CABLE CNS1
HP50V
(3M50F)
6CN
1
2
3 SCOM
4 0V
5
6 RDY
7 EMG
8 FWD
9 REV
28
30
31
32
34
36
ZSPD
AGR
38
14
39
15
ORE
40
ORT
41
17
42
18
43
COM1
19 EXTCOM 44 FLTNC
20
45 FLTCOM
21
46
22 24VCOM 47
HP36V
(3M36F)
23
48
24 0VCOM
49
25
50
FA
21
45 FLTCOM
ZS1
(F44.6)
ZS
22
33 ZSPD
ORA1 ORIENTATION
(F44.4) COMPLETE
ORA
13
39 ORE
USO SPEED MATCH
(F44.7) INPUT SIGNAL
USC
25
34 AGR
20
42 COM1
ZERO SPEED
INPUT SIGNAL
*ESP
(G43.4)
EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT SIGNAL
EMERGENCY STOP
--> OFF
INPUT SIGNAL
SET1
(G42.4)
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGNAL
COMPLETE --> ON
SRN
(G43.6)
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND --> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
SRI
(G43.5)
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND --> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
ORC1
(G43.7)
ORIENTATION COMMAND
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ORIENTATION COMMAND --> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
HSP
(G42.2)
RAPID TAPPING
RAPID TAPPING --> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
SPEED MATCH
2
22 24VCOM
18
7
EMG
SET
19
6
RDY
SRN
16
8
FWD
SRI
17
9
REV
ORC
3
16 ORT
HSP
11
12 SSC
+24V
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
ROTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ORIENTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
RAPID TAPPING
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
19 EXTCOM
24 OVCOM
※
1CN
11 PCO
12 *PCO
13 PAO
14 *PAO
15 PBO
16 *PBO
17 SS
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
VCMD
0V
14
3
SCOM
1
4
0V
AG
0V
※
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT
POSITION CODER
(FOR LATHE)
13
PAL
14 *PAO
10
15
PBL
8
16 *PBO
PZH
5
11
PZL
6
12 *PCO
23
17
13.8 CONNECTION WITH POSITION CODER
CABLE CNS1P
SHIELD CABLE
POSITION CODER
CNS1
PZH
5
(B)
PZL
6
(P)
PAH
9
(A)
PAL
10
(N)
PBH
PBL
7
8
(C)
(R)
+5V
4
(H)
0V
23
PG
(K)
※
CCONNECT TO THE EARTH
PLATE OF THE CABINET
※
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR
*) 20P SHIELD CABLE
*) LENGTH MAX 14m
*) NUMBER OF CALBES OF +5V AND 0V
3 EACH IN CASE THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE IS 8m OR LES
6 EACH IN CASE THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE IS GREATER
9-18
PAO
PBH 7
0V
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
0V ~ +10V
(RIGID TAPPING:±10V)
1CN
PAH 9
NOTE)USE SPINDLE DO(ESP,SET,SRN,…)
AS COLLECTOR COMMON.
SEE PAGE 6-11.
EPS3 BOARD
ZERO SPEED
--> ON
SPEED MATCH
--> ON
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ESP
DOCOM
ALARM
--> OFF
ORIENTATION
ORIENTATION
COMPLETE
COMPLETE
OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
CABLE CNS1P
MAIN UNIT
SPINDLE
TROUBLE
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
ZERO SPEED
OUTPUT SIGNAL
0V
37
13
6CN
*FA SPINDLE TROUBLE
(F44.5) INPUT SIGNAL
44 FLTNC
29
33
15
COMMON 24
27
35
16
+24V
26
11
SSC
AC SPINDLE UNIT
YASAKAWA VS626M5
(CIMR-M5)
CABLE CNS1
SHIELD CABLE
CNS1
10
12
MAIN UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD
PBO
PCO
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL OUTPUT
ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL OUTPUT
ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL OUTPUT
SS(FG)
CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
OF THE CABINET
14. DNC FUNCITON
14.1 WHAT IS DNC?
14. DNC FUNCTION
14.1 WHAT IS DNC?
Normally, NC operates automatically by executing the built-in programs.
Unlike NC, DNC (Direct Numerical Control) executes programs it received
from external devices such as PCs through a communication network
while operating automatically.
Complex processes such as the mold are usually created with CAM, and the complex
processing curve is created by connecting short linear
interpolating (G01) microblocks.
As a consequence, the program becomes longer and cannot be built into the NC Memory,
and this is where DNC is required. Also, the program DNC received through the communication
network will be cleared from NC memory as soon as it is executed for each block.
(Magnified)
Fig. Example of microblock process
14.2 Preparation for DNC Operation
1) Scope of Effect of Communication Data
%
;
O0001
(PROGRAM)
G40
………
;
%
Scope of Effect (Subject of Execution)
Concerning the data received from an external device through communication line,
NC considers the data between ;(end of block) which comes after the first %(end of record)
and the second % as the scope of effect.
9-19
APPENDIX
2) STANDARD PARAMETERS FOR COMMUNICATION
① COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC AND SENTROL2
NO.0000
<TVC> = 0
(DOES NOT CHECK TV)
NO.0000
<CTV> = 0
(DID NOT CHECK TV IN COMMENTS)
NO.0000
<ISP> = 0
(THERE IS PARITY BIT)
NO.0000
<NCR> = 1
(EOB : LF)
NO.0000
<EIA> = 0
(ISO CODE)
NO.0020 = 0
(INPUT THROUGH COM1)
NO.0021 = 0
(OUTPUT THROUGH COM1)
NO.5001 = 1
(SELECT NO.5110~5112 PARAMETER GROUP)
NO.5110 = 3
NO.5111 = 2
(NUMBER OF STOP BIT: 2)
NO.5112 = 11
(9600 BAUD)
9-20
Download PDF